Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 386

DIP5000

Teleprotection

Version A

User's Manual

DIP5K/EN U/A11
User's Manual DIP5K/EN U/A22

DIP5000 Page 1/2

DIP5000
Teleprotection
CONTENT

Overview DIP5K/EN OS/A22

Safety Section DIP5K/EN SS/A22

Main Characteristics DIP5K/EN IT/A22

Installation DIP5K/EN IN/A22

Commissioning DIP5K/EN CM/A22

Maintenance DIP5K/EN MT/A22

Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22


DIP5K/EN U/A22 User's Manual

Page 2/2 DIP5000

BLANK PAGE
Overview DIP5K/EN OS/A22

DIP 5000

OVERVIEW
Overview DIP5K/EN OS/A22

DIP 5000 Page 1/6

CONTENTS

1. OVERVIEW 5
1.1 Safety Section 5
1.2 Main Characteristics 5
1.3 Installation 5
1.4 Human machine Interface DIP5000 DIGITAL 5
1.5 Human machine Interface DIP5000 ANALOG SINGLE TONE 5
1.6 Human machine Interface DIP5000 ANALOG DUAL TONE 5
1.7 Commissioning 5
1.8 Maintenance 5

2. DEFINITIONS 6
DIP5K/EN OS/A22 Overview

Page 2/6 DIP 5000

BLANK PAGE
Overview DIP5K/EN OS/A22

DIP 5000 Page 3/6

MODIFICATIONS PAGE

VERSION DATE COMMENTS


A11 11/14/2007 ORIGINAL ISSUE
A22 08/14/2008 PACKAGE RELEASE 2.2
DIP5K/EN OS/A22 Overview

Page 4/6 DIP 5000

BLANK PAGE
Overview DIP5K/EN OS/A22

DIP 5000 Page 5/6

1. OVERVIEW
The DIP5000 User manual includes eight sections:

• Safety section,

• Presentation,

• Installation,

• Human Machine Interface DIP5000 DIGITAL ,

• Human Machine Interface DIP5000 ANALOG SINGLE TONE/DUAL TONE CODED,

• Commissioning,

• Maintenance.
1.1 Safety Section
The Safety Section provides full information on safe handling, commissioning and testing of
this equipment. This Safety Section also includes reference to typical equipment label
markings.
1.2 Main Characteristics
The Presentation Section provides full information on DIP5000 DIGITAL and ANALOG
features, equipment description, main characteristics and performances.
1.3 Installation
The Installation Section provides full information on equipment description, shipment,
environmental conditions, boards installation, power supply boards and VDC range,
equipment connection.
1.4 Human machine Interface DIP5000 DIGITAL
The Human Machine Interface Section provides full information on HMI software installation,
system requirement, operating the Password manager, HMI interface description, operating
the HMI.
1.5 Human machine Interface DIP5000 ANALOG SINGLE TONE /DUAL TONE CODED
The Human Machine Interface Section provides full information on HMI software installation,
system requirements, operating the Password manager, HMI interface description, operating
the HMI (Single tone and dual tone modes).
1.6 Commissioning
The Commissioning Section provides full information on DIP5000 commissioning,
configuring hardware, testing and fault isolation during commissioning, checks.
1.7 Maintenance
The Maintenance Section provides full information on DIP5000 Maintenance, Testing and
Fault isolation, firmware upgrade.
DIP5K/EN OS/A22 Overview

Page 6/6 DIP 5000

2. DEFINITIONS
Summary of some of the terms and acronyms used in this manual

• Dependability - Ability of a Teleprotection link to issue a valid command in the


presence of interference and or noise. For convenience, the probability of missing
command Pmc is usually measured, the dependability is therefore given by 1 - Pmc.

• Security - Ability of a system to prevent interference or noise from generating a


command state at the receiving end when no command is transmitted. For
convenience, the probability of unwanted command Puc is usually measured, the
security is then given by 1 - Puc.

• Nominal transmission time - The time elapsed between the moment of a change of
state at the transmitter input and the moment of the corresponding change of state at
the receiver output when there is no interference or noise. This time does not include
propagation time.

• Guard - The guard signal is a signal that is transmitted to monitor the integrity of the
teleprotection system and it effectively supervises the channel in terms of the signal
quality. Other monitoring is also employed. When present, the guard signal inhibits
any command output of the teleprotection receiver.

• Command signal - The command signal is a signal that is transmitted to produce a


change of state at a remote location. The requirements for the command signal are
dependent upon the type of scheme.

• Permissive trip - Protection schemes where the received command initiates tripping
without qualification by local protection. Intertrip channels utilize similar principles to
permissive trip channels, however, security against unwanted operation and
dependability of correct operation are prime requirements. Speed of operation is
usually sacrificed to meet security and dependability requirements, particularly in
analogue systems.

• Direct trip / Inter-trip - Protective schemes where the received command initiates
tripping without qualification that are similar in operation to permissive trip with the
exception that security against unwanted operation and dependability of correct
operation are prime requirements. Speed of operation is usually sacrificed to meet
security and dependability requirements.

• Blocking - Protective schemes where the received command blocks the operation of
local protection. These channels utilise similar principles to permissive trip channels;
however dependability of operation and speed are prime requirements. . VF - Voice
Frequency.

• DCE - Data Communication Equipment.

• DTE - Data Terminal Equipment.

• LF (AF) - Low Frequency. Signals transmitted in the 0-4 kHz base band. Also called
Audio Frequency.

• FV - Guard Frequency.

• FC - Command Frequency.

• TMS – Teleprotection Monitoring System.

• St = Single tone analog .

• Dt = Dual tone analog .


Safety Section DIP5K/EN SS/A22

DIP 5000

SAFETY SECTION
Safety Section DIP5K/EN SS/A22

DIP 5000 Page 1/12

STANDARD SAFETY STATEMENTS FOR AREVA T&D


TELEPROTECTION EQUIPMENT

1. INTRODUCTION 3

2. HEALTH AND SAFETY 3

3. SYMBOLS AND LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT 4


3.1 Symbols 4
3.2 Labels 4

4. INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING 4

5. DE-COMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL 6

6. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY 7


6.1 Protective fuse rating 7
6.2 Protective class 7
6.3 Installation category 7
6.4 Environment 7
DIP5K/EN SS/A22 Safety Section

Page 2/12 DIP 5000

BLANK PAGE
Safety Section DIP5K/EN SS/A22

DIP 5000 Page 3/12

1. INTRODUCTION
This Safety Section and the relevant equipment documentation provide full information on
safe handling, commissioning, and testing of this equipment. This Safety Section also
includes references to typical equipment label markings.
The technical data in this Safety Section is typical only, see the technical data section of the
relevant equipment documentation for data specific to a particular equipment.

Before carrying out any work on the equipment the user should be familiar with
the contents of this Safety Section and the ratings on the equipment’s rating
label.

Reference should be made to the external connection diagram before the equipment is
installed, commissioned, or serviced.
Language specific, self-adhesive User Interface labels are provided in a bag for some
equipment.

2. HEALTH AND SAFETY


The information in the Safety Section of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure
that equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition.
When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts
of the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may
endanger personnel and equipment and also cause personal injury or physical damage.
Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated.
Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling,
proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance, and
servicing. For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment.
Qualified personnel are individuals who:

• Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and
of the system to which it is being connected;

• Are able to perform safely switching operations in accordance with accepted safety
engineering practices and are authorized to energize and de-energize equipment and
to isolate, ground, and label it;

• Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety
engineering practices;

• Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).


The equipment documentation gives instructions for its installation, commissioning, and
operation. However, the manuals cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include
detailed information on all topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do not take
any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate AREVA technical sales
office and request the necessary information.
DIP5K/EN SS/A22 Safety Section

Page 4/12 DIP 5000

3. SYMBOLS AND LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT


For safety reasons, the following symbols which may be used on the equipment or referred
to in the equipment documentation, should be understood before it is installed or
commissioned.
3.1 Symbols

Caution: refer to equipment documentation Caution: risk of electric shock

Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal Functional/Protective Conductor (*Earth)


terminal

Note: This symbol may also be used for a


Protective Conductor (Earth) terminal if
that terminal is part of a terminal block
or sub-assembly, e.g. power supply.

*NOTE: THE TERM EARTH USED THROUGHOUT THIS TECHNICAL


MANUAL IS THE DIRECT EQUIVALENT OF THE NORTH
AMERICAN TERM GROUND.
3.2 Labels
See Safety Guide (SFTY/4L M) for typical equipment labelling information.

4. INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING, AND SERVICING


Equipment connections
Personnel undertaking installation, commissioning or servicing work for this
equipment should be aware of the correct working procedures to ensure safety.
Equipment documentation should be consulted before installing, commissioning,
or servicing the equipment.
The equipment and cabinet must be earthed as specified in IEC 60950-1.
The equipment must be supplied over a circuit breaker for the power supply. The
circuit breaker must be switched off.
Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning, and maintenance may
present a hazardous voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated.
Do not work on the equipment or connecting cables during a lightning storm.
Any disassembly of the equipment may expose parts at hazardous voltage; also
electronic parts may be damaged if suitable electrostatic voltage discharge (ESD)
precautions are not taken.
If there is unlocked access to the rear of the equipment, care should be taken by
all personnel to avoid electric shock or energy hazards.
To ensure that wires are correctly terminated, the correct crimp terminal and tool
for the wire size should be used.
The equipment must be connected in accordance with the appropriate connection
diagram.
Before removing top cover, the isolating terminals of external cables must be
opened or disconnected.
Safety Section DIP5K/EN SS/A22

DIP 5000 Page 5/12

Protection Class I Equipment:


- Before energizing the equipment it must be earthed using the protective
conductor terminal, if provided, or the appropriate termination of the
supply plug in the case of plug connected equipment.
- The protective conductor (earth) connection must not be removed since
the protection against electric shock provided by the equipment would be
lost.
- When the protective (earth) conductor terminal (PCT) is also used to
terminate cable screens, etc., it is essential that the integrity of the
protective (earth) conductor be checked after the addition or removal of
such functional earth connections. For M4 stud PCTs the integrity of the
protective (earth) connections should be ensured by use of a locknut or
similar.
The recommended minimum protective conductor (earth) wire size is 2.5 mm²
(3.3 mm² for North America) unless otherwise stated in the technical data section
of the equipment documentation, or otherwise required by local or country wiring
regulations.
The protective conductor (earth) connection must be low-inductance and as short
as possible.
All connections to the equipment must have a defined potential. Connections that
are pre-wired, but not used, should preferably be grounded when binary inputs
and output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output relays are
connected to common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections should be
connected to the common potential of the grouped connections.
Before energizing the equipment, the following should be checked:
- Voltage rating/polarity (rating label/equipment documentation);
- Protective fuse rating;
- Integrity of the protective conductor (earth) connection (where
applicable);
- Voltage and current rating of external wiring, suitable to the application.
It is important that this instruction manual be read and fully understood by all
people involved, including personnel that has already undergone training and is
otherwise qualified before changing configuration or carrying out maintenance.
Otherwise the warranty will not be applicable.
Accidental touching of exposed terminals
If working in a restricted space, such as a cubicle, where there is a risk of electric
shock due to accidental touching of terminals which do not comply with IP20
rating, then a suitable protective barrier should be provided.
Unused connectors in the equipment sub-racks should be terminated with blank
plugs.
Equipment use
If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the
protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Removal of the equipment front panel/cover
Removal of the equipment front panel/cover may expose hazardous live parts,
which must not be touched until the electrical power is removed.
DIP5K/EN SS/A22 Safety Section

Page 6/12 DIP 5000

Equipment operating conditions


The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and
environmental limits.
If the link gets disturbed while tuning, testing, simulating alarms, making
measurements and loading new configurations, appropriate measures must be
taken to prevent the protection signal transmission being used.
Before switching on the circuit breaker, check that the equipment/cabinet is
securely connected to the protective earth/ground and check the polarity and
value of the power supply.
Insulation and dielectric strength testing
Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. At the
end of each part of the test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero to
discharge capacitors, before the test leads are disconnected.
Insertion of modules and pcb cards
Modules and PCB cards must not be inserted into or withdrawn from the
equipment whilst it is energized, since this may result in damage.
Fibre optic communication
Where fibre optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed
directly. Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or
signal level of the device.
Cleaning
The equipment may be cleaned using a lint-free cloth dampened with clean water,
when no connections are energized. Contact fingers of test plugs are normally
protected by petroleum jelly, which should not be removed.

5. DE-COMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL


De-commissioning
The supply input (auxiliary) for the equipment may include capacitors across the
supply or to earth. To avoid electric shock or energy hazards, after completely
isolating the supplies to the equipment (both poles of any dc supply), the
capacitors should be safely discharged via the external terminals prior to
de-commissioning.

Disposal
It is recommended that incineration and disposal to water courses be avoided.
The equipment should be disposed of in a safe manner. Any equipment
containing batteries should have them removed before disposal, taking
precautions to avoid short circuits. Particular regulations within the country of
operation may apply to the disposal of the equipment.
Safety Section DIP5K/EN SS/A22

DIP 5000 Page 7/12

6. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY


Unless otherwise stated in the equipment technical manual, the following data is applicable.
6.1 Protective fuse rating
The recommended maximum rating of the external protective fuse for equipment is 16A, high
rupture capacity (HRC) Red Spot type NIT, or TIA, or equivalent. The protective fuse should
be located as close to the unit as possible.

6.2 Protective class


IEC 60255-27: 2005 Class I (unless otherwise specified in the
EN 60255-27: 2005 equipment documentation). This equipment
requires a protective conductor (earth) connection
to ensure user safety.

6.3 Installation category


IEC 60255-27: 2005 Installation category II (Overvoltage Category II):
EN 60255-27: 2005 Distribution level, fixed installation.
Equipment in this category is qualification tested at
2,5 kV peak, 1.2/50 µs, 500 Ω, 0.5 J, between all
supply circuits and earth and also between
independent circuits.

6.4 Environment
The equipment is intended for indoor installation and use only. If it is required for use in an
outdoor environment then it must be mounted in a specific cabinet or housing which will
enable it to meet the requirements of IEC 60529 with the classification of degree of
protection IP54 (dust and splashing water protected).
Pollution Degree - Pollution Degree 2 Compliance is demonstrated by reference to safety
Altitude - Operation up to 2000m standards.
IEC 60255-27:2005
EN 60255-27: 2005
DIP5K/EN SS/A22 Safety Section

Page 8/12 DIP 5000

SPECIFIC SAFETY STATEMENTS FOR DIP5O00 TELEPROTECTION


EQUIPMENT

Personnel qualification: authorized and properly trained personnel only are admitted to carry out
installing, programming, commissioning, maintenance, troubleshooting, and operation of the
equipment.

Technical specifications: the equipment must be operated within the technical specifications. Failure
to do so may result in personal injuries or equipment damage.

Alteration: alteration of the equipment is not allowed.

Insertion and removal of plug-in modules: neither removal nor insertion of modules, except for
redundant power supply units, is permitted. Before inserting or removing modules, the power supply of
the equipment has to be switched OFF.

ESD protection: the modules in this equipment contain devices which can be damaged by
electrostatic discharges. Appropriate measures must be taken before unpacking modules or removing
them from equipment racks. Grounding straps for technical personnel and the provision of anti-static
workbenches are essential precautions to prevent ESD damage when handling or working on
modules. Modules may only be shipped either in their original packing or installed in equipment racks.

Mechanical installation: the equipment must be mounted in a cabinet.


Safety Section DIP5K/EN SS/A22

DIP 5000 Page 9/12

Cabinets which are not secured to the floor tip forwards when the hinged frame is opened. Do not
open the hinged frame without precautions.

Electrical installation: this is Class I equipment as defined in EN 60255-27. The equipment and
cubicle/cabinet shall be solidly bonded to the protective (earth) conductor for both safety and
electromagnetic compatibility reasons. The equipment must be protected by circuit breakers or fuses
with a maximum rating of 16 Amps.

All circuit breakers in the cabinet must be switch OFF before working on the equipment.

Do not connect or disconnect energized cables to or from the equipment.

The isolating terminals of the external cables must be kept open during installation, maintenance and
before storage, decommissioning, and disposal.

Ensure that all supply inputs have been isolated/switched off before installing the equipment.

When an analog DIP 5000 is connected to cables, pilot wires, or leased circuits, the equipment must
only be used in conjunction with barrier transformers withstanding a 15kVrms or 20kVrms test voltage
at 50Hz/60Hz for 1 mn, according to national regulations or electric utilities’ practice.
DIP5K/EN SS/A22 Safety Section

Page 10/12 DIP 5000

Fibre optic installation: Optical connectors: clean all optical connectors by an approved method
before making any optical connection; do not rotate the optical connector unnecessarily when making
an optical connection. When not connected, fit all optical plugs and couplings with protective caps.

Damage to optical fibres: when dressing fibres, take care not to exceed the minimum bend radius
(typically 35mm) and do not over tighten binders used for dressing as damage may result.

Back cover: hazardous voltages and/or hazardous energy levels behind the back cover.

Working on the equipment: do not work on the system or connect or disconnect cables during
periods of lightning.

Electrical strength test: do not repeat any electrical tests. Improper test methods can cause severe
damage to the equipment. Electric strength and earth continuity tests have been performed in the
factory.

EMC: this is class A equipment. In a domestic environment, this equipment may cause radio
interference. In this case, the user may be required to take appropriate measures.

Power supply for alarm: this shall be protected against overcurrents and short circuit conditions.
Safety Section DIP5K/EN SS/A22

DIP 5000 Page 11/12

Common interface UT148: hazardous voltages and/or hazardous energy levels on the module and
the cable. Do not touch the module and the cable leads.

Relay interface SRxxx: hazardous voltages and/or hazardous energy levels on the module and the
cable. Do not touch the module and the cable leads.

Laser / LED: take care using optical cards IR182/IR185, class I Laser/LED product.

Using HMI DIP 5000: the teleprotection link can be disturbed while using certain maintenance
functions of the DIP 5000 HMI (e.g. forcing commands).

During routine tests with the DIP 5000 in operation, “Reset device” in the menu should not be
activated, as this causes the DIP 5000 to be re-initialized and thus be blocked for approximately 5
seconds. During this time no commands can be transmitted.

Commissioning: do not close/establish any connections to protection devices until the DIP 5000 is
properly commissioned.
DIP5K/EN SS/A22 Safety Section

Page 12/12 DIP 5000

BLANK PAGE
Main Characteristics DIP5K/EN IT/A22

DIP 5000

MAIN CHARACTERISTICS
Main Characteristics DIP5K/EN IT/A22

DIP 5000 Page 1/38

CONTENTS

1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 7

2. DEFINITIONS 8

3. OVERVIEW 9

4. DIP 5000 GENERAL PRESENTATION AND FEATURES 10


4.1 Supported Protection schemes 11
4.2 Optional features 11
4.3 Self Testing 12
4.4 Ease of use 12
4.4.1 Customization 12
4.4.2 Supervision 12
4.4.3 Testing and Maintenance 13
4.4.4 Monitoring (optional) 13
4.5 Various Accessories 13

5. DIGITAL MODE 14
5.1 Digital Transmission Principle 14
5.2 Available Digital Interfaces 14
5.2.1 Digital Interfaces Supported 15
5.2.2 Opto-electrical Redundancy 16
5.3 Optimization of the Transmission Medium 16
5.4 Number of Commands 16
5.5 Applications 16
5.6 Link Check 16
5.7 Maintenance and Loopback 17

6. ANALOG MODE 18
6.1 Frequency Coding in the 0 - 4 kHz band Single Tone . 18
6.2 Frequency Coding in the 0 - 4 kHz band Dual Tone . 18
6.3 Analog Mode Specific Features 19
6.3.1 Transmission Medium (all versions) 19
6.3.2 Optimization of the Medium - Single Tone 19
6.3.3 Number of Commands - Single Tone 20
6.3.4 Link Test 21
6.3.5 Unblocking Function 21
6.3.6 Alive Output 21
6.3.7 External Alarm Input 21
6.3.8 DIP 5000 Connected to a Power Line Carrier (PLC) 22
DIP5K/EN IT/A22 Main Characteristics

Page 2/38 DIP 5000

6.4 Analog Mode Specific Features - Dual tone 23


6.5 Available interfaces 23

7. UNIT DESCRIPTION 24

8. MAIN CHARACTERISTICS 26
8.1 Mechanical Characteristics 26
8.2 Environmental Characteristics 27
8.3 Power Supply Electrical Characteristics 28
8.4 Operational Characteristics 29
8.5 Digital Transmission Characteristics 31
8.6 Voice Frequency Transmission Characteristics 32
8.6.1 General characteristics 32
8.6.2 Band sharing single tone 32
8.6.3 Band sharing dual tone 33

9. PERFORMANCE 34
9.1 Digital interfaces 34
9.1.1 Transfer time as a function of transmission speed (digital and IR 182 boards) 34
9.1.2 Transfer time as a function of transmission speed (IR 185 board) 34
9.1.3 Security 34
9.1.4 Dependability 35
9.2 Analog Interface Single Tone Version 35
9.2.1 Transmission time 35
9.2.2 Security (bandwidth 300-3400 Hz) 35
9.2.3 Dependability (bandwidth 300-3400 Hz) 35
9.3 Analog Interface Dual Tone 36
9.3.1 Transmission time 36
9.3.2 Security (bandwidth 300 1900 Hz) 36
9.3.3 Dependability (bandwidth 300 1900 HZ) 36
Main Characteristics DIP5K/EN IT/A22

DIP 5000 Page 3/38

LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE 1 - DIP 5000 ENVIRONMENT 10
FIGURE 2 - EXAMPLE OF NETWORK CONFIGURATION 13
FIGURE 3 - DIGITAL INTERFACES 15
FIGURE 4 - REDUNDANCY SCHEME 16
FIGURE 5 - LOOPBACK 17
FIGURE 6 - TRANSMISSION - VOICE FREQUENCY BAND ST 18
FIGURE 7 - TRANSMISSION - VOICE FREQUENCY BAND DUAL TONE 18
FIGURE 8 - LINK TEST - ANALOG MODE 21
FIGURE 9 - THE DIAGRAM SHOWS AN EXAMPLE OF THE AUTOMATIC POWER PROCESS22
FIGURE 10 - VOICE FREQUENCY INTERFACE 23
FIGURE 11 - DIP 5000 RACK 24

LIST OF TABLES
TABLE 1 - INPUT COMMAND FREQUENCY CODING 19
TABLE 2 - DIP 5000 BOARDS 25
TABLE 3 - MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS 26
TABLE 4 - ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS 27
TABLE 5 - POWER SUPPLY CHARACTERISTICS 28
TABLE 6 – OPERATIONALS CHARACTERISTICS 30
TABLE 7 – DIGITAL TRANSMISSION CHARACTERISTICS 31
TABLE 8 – VOICE FREQUENCY GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS 32
TABLE 9 - BAND SHARING SINGLE TONE 32
TABLE 10 - FREQUENCIES DUAL TONE 33
TABLE 11 – FREQUENCIES AND BANDWIDTH (DUAL TONE ) 33
TABLE 12: TRANSMISSION TIME MEASUREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL AND IR182 CARDS 34
TABLE 13 - TRANSMISSION TIME MEASUREMENTS FOR IR185 CARD INCLUDING MUX 34
TABLE 14 – TRANSMISSION TIME SINGLE TONE 35
TABLE 15 – TRANSMISSION TIME DUAL TONE 36
DIP5K/EN IT/A22 Main Characteristics

Page 4/38 DIP 5000

BLANK PAGE
Main Characteristics DIP5K/EN IT/A22

DIP 5000 Page 5/38

MODIFICATIONS PAGE

VERSION DATE COMMENTS


A11 10/17/2000 ORIGINAL ISSUE
B11 04/18/2001 ADDITION OF OPTICAL INTERFACE
C11 06/02/2004 AREVA- ADDITION OF ANALOG PART
D11 11/14/2007 NEW FEATURES, NEW STRUCTURE
E11 02/11/2008 MINOR CORRECTIONS
A22 08/14/2008 PACKAGE RELEASE 2.2

NOTE: From revision C, the numbering system of the document has changed
according to the AREVA standards, on the other hand the index of the
document has been incremented for a better follow-up.
DIP5K/EN IT/A22 Main Characteristics

Page 6/38 DIP 5000

BLANK PAGE
Main Characteristics DIP5K/EN IT/A22

DIP 5000 Page 7/38

1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER
SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY
SECTION DIP5K/EN SS/A11 OR LATER ISSUE, THE TECHNICAL DATA
SECTION AND THE EQUIMENT RATING LABEL.

THE FRONT PANEL MOUNTED MONITOR DOWNLOAD PORT IS AN


EXTRA-LOW VOLTAGE (ELV) CIRCUIT WHICH PROVIDES BASIC
INSULATION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK. WHEN THE RELAY IS
ENERGISED, THE TERMINALS OF THIS PORT SHOULD NOT BE
TOUCHED SINCE IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF A SINGLE FAULT
CONDITION THERE WOULD BE A VERY LOW PROBABILITY OF AN
ELECTRIC SHOCK. THIS PORT IS DESIGNED TO BE USED FOR
MAINTENANCE PURPOSES, THAT IS MONITORING AND SOFTWARE
DOWNLOADS; IT IS NOT INTENDED TO BE PERMANENTLY
CONNECTED.
DIP5K/EN IT/A22 Main Characteristics

Page 8/38 DIP 5000

2. DEFINITIONS
Summary of some of the terms and acronyms used in this manual

• Dependability - Ability of a Teleprotection link to issue a valid command in the


presence of interference and or noise. For convenience, the probability of missing a
command Pmc is usually measured, so dependability is therefore given by 1 - Pmc.

• Security - Ability of a system to prevent interference or noise from generating a


command state at the receiving end when no command has been transmitted. For
convenience, the probability of an unwanted command Puc is usually measured, so
security is then given by 1 - Puc.

• Nominal transmission time - The time elapsed between the moment of a change of
state at the transmitter input and the moment of the corresponding change of state at
the receiver output when there is no interference or noise. This time excludes
propagation time.

• Guard - The guard signal is a signal that is transmitted to monitor the integrity of the
teleprotection system and it effectively supervises the channel in terms of signal
quality. Other monitoring is also employed. When present, the guard signal inhibits
any command output of the teleprotection receiver.

• Command signal - The command signal is a signal transmitted to produce a change of


state at a remote location. The requirements for the command signal are dependent
upon the type of scheme being used.

• Permissive trip - Protection schemes where the received command initiates tripping
without qualification by local protection. Intertrip channels utilize similar principles to
permissive trip channels, however, security against unwanted operation and
dependability of correct operation are prime requirements. Speed of operation is
usually sacrificed to meet security and dependability requirements, particularly in
analog systems.

• Direct trip/Inter-trip - Protective schemes where the received command initiates


tripping without qualification. These are similar in operation to permissive trip with the
exception that security against unwanted operation and dependability of correct
operation are prime requirements. Speed of operation is usually sacrificed to meet
security and dependability requirements.

• Blocking - Protective schemes where the received command blocks the operation of
local protection. These channels use similar principles to permissive trip channels.
However, dependability of operation and speed are the prime requirements.

• VF - Voice Frequency.

• DCE - Data Communication Equipment

• DTE - Data Terminal Equipment

• LF (AF) - Low Frequency. Signals transmitted in the 0-4 kHz base band. Also called
Audio Frequency.

• FV - Guard Frequency ()

• FC - Command Frequency

• TMS – Teleprotection Monitoring System

• St - Single tone analog

• Dt - Dual tone analog


Main Characteristics DIP5K/EN IT/A22

DIP 5000 Page 9/38

3. OVERVIEW
The AREVA DIP 5000 is maintenance-free equipment, easy to commission, and offers a
high level of flexibility for installation.
The DIP 5000 can be supervised and managed through a telecom network.
The DIP 5000 Teleprotection unit is designed to work in hostile environmental conditions that
can be found in buildings housing very high voltage relay equipment.
To this end, it is fitted with protection devices against electromagnetic interference
(induced or radiated).
Although initially designed for power applications, DIP 5000 Teleprotection unit is also used
in all applications where the following criteria are essential:

• Very short transfer times;

• Optimum dependability and security;

• Immunity to interference caused by the electrical environment.


Furthermore DIP 5000 supports:

• Encoding of information to ensure both compatibility with the standard transmission


medium and immunity to any interference that it may encounter.

• Decoding and advanced processing of the signals received, enabling faithful return of
the information transmitted.
DIP5K/EN IT/A22 Main Characteristics

Page 10/38 DIP 5000

4. DIP 5000 GENERAL PRESENTATION AND FEATURES


The DIP 5000 consists of a full range of products designed to cover the whole range of
teleprotection needs.
Digital or Analog mode transmission on various media are supported:

• Digital Electric medium (V11, G703)

• Single mode optical medium (1310 nm, 1550 nm)

• Multimode optical medium (850 nm)

• Analog medium (single tone / coded dual tone).


It handles up to 8 commands in digital mode and up to 4 commands in analog modes. The
DIP 5000 is based on a system of optional cards allowing a wide range of combinations.

»Mux »Mux
Optical fibres
Optical fibres
OPGW
OPGW
SDH network
SDH network
Microwave
Microwave
…..
…..

Digital network
C37.94 V11 V11 C37.94
Optical fibres G703 G703 Optical fibres

Optical fibres

Protection Protection
relay Pilot cables
relay
Leased line
Pilot cables
Analogie
Leased Muxline
…..
…..

»PLC Analogue network »PLC

» HV Line

»
D0047ENc

FIGURE 1 - DIP 5000 ENVIRONMENT


The DIP 5000 includes the following features:

• Ability to transmit up to 8 independent commands (only 4 in analog mode)

• Possible input logical combination for automation applications

• Two contacts per command for input and output

• Large choice of communication interfaces

• Alarm and teleprotection status indication on front panel by LED, software

• Dual tone coded mode is available

• 2 RS 232 connectors for connection to a PC or a dial up modem (1 local and 1 for


remote access). IP and LAN connections are possible using the optional RS 232 IP
converter

• Large range of power supply voltages from 24 VDC to 250 VDC

• Possibility of power supply redundancy


Main Characteristics DIP5K/EN IT/A22

DIP 5000 Page 11/38

• Modular design allowing hardware modification by simple board exchange

• Backup capacity with DIGITAL mode

• Continuous monitoring of the hardware and the communication link

• Real-time measurement and display of the transfer time and BER when using the
Human Machine Interface software (Digital mode only)

• Local and remote DIP 5000 entirely programmable using HMI software running on PC
computer (remote only available in digital mode)

• Event and alarm logging of more than 1750 entries each

• 1 ms time-stamping for event recorder

• Firmware and software upgrade by download through PC.


4.1 Supported Protection schemes
In all cases, the performance of a Teleprotection link is the result of a compromise between
transfer time, dependability, and security. Depending on the protection scheme chosen, one
of these three criteria must be privileged. To achieve this, the DIP 5000 Digital teleprotection
unit has 3 application types and 3 additional reinforced application types when using coded
dual tone.
Analog mode:

• Permissive tripping (which promotes dependability),

• Blocking (which promotes transfer time),

• Direct tripping (which promotes security).


Coded dual tone:

• Permissive tripping,

• Blocking,

• Direct tripping.

• Reinforced blocking

• Reinforced permissive tripping

• Reinforced direct tripping


The reinforced schemes offer both increased dependability and security at a slightly lower
speed.
4.2 Optional features
The following features can be provided on analog and digital mode DIP 5000 teleprotection:

• IRIG-B interface for synchronizing event logging on both sides. The IRIG-B format is:
B12x interface (modulated), standard 200-04, input impedance 4.7kΩ at 1000Hz,
modulation ratio: 3:1 to 6:1, input signal peak to peak: 100mv to 10v.

• Auxiliary power supply, either the same or a different voltage, 2 separate connectors
to increase dependability and availability.

• Adding an I/O board module provides combinatorial logic on inputs and outputs.

• Filter card FI002 provides reinforced protection against capacitive discharges.

• TMS5000 Teleprotection Monitoring system software to manage networks of both


Analog and Digital Dip 5000 units.

• Optical-electrical interface cards redundancy (digital feature only).


DIP5K/EN IT/A22 Main Characteristics

Page 12/38 DIP 5000

4.3 Self Testing


The DIP 5000 Teleprotection unit has a number of automated processes that constantly
check its various functions (power supply monitoring, I/O board monitoring ...).
The transmission link, digital or analog, is constantly checked. Alarm conditions are issued
when the medium is no longer able to ensure good dependability and security levels.
Any operating fault results in the following actions that:

• Protect command outputs

• Turn on indicator lights

• Record usable information (log)

• Trigger alarm loops.


4.4 Ease of use
The DIP 5000 Digital Teleprotection unit has been designed to facilitate commissioning, use,
and maintenance of links. It is therefore fitted with an RS 232C port allowing connection to a
PC to perform all the commissioning and maintenance operations without any other
instrument.
4.4.1 Customization
Main accessible functions:

• Local and remote (digital mode) teleprotection identity and address definition

• Setting the time and date of local and remote (digital mode) teleprotection

• Definition of the alarm activation bit error rate or SNR (digital mode)

• Extension of transmission and output commands

• Types of protection scheme configurable for each command

• Many alarm customizations


4.4.2 Supervision
For all versions:

• Number of commands transmitted and received

• Alarm status

• Inhibition status

• Current locks and loopbacks

• Customization parameter reading

• Time-stamped lists of up to 1750 events and alarms


For digital version

• Current bit error rate


Main Characteristics DIP5K/EN IT/A22

DIP 5000 Page 13/38

4.4.3 Testing and Maintenance


For all versions

• Operating commands

• Line locking

• Output relay locking


For digital version only

• Remote loopback

• Transfer time measurement logging

• Opto-electrical redundancy

• Forcing command transmissions and outputs


For analog single /coded dual tone

• Forcing PLC commands


• Forcing tone transmissions one by one and outputs

• Link test time measurement logging

4.4.4 Monitoring (optional)


TMS5000 software can monitor up to 255 devices, using Ethernet/RS 232 serial converters,
which hide the use of an Ethernet network to send data to the RS 232 port of a DIP 5000
through the use of virtual COM ports on the host computer.

Converter COM 1
DIP5000a
I.P.
TMS5000 System 1 port

COM 2
DIP5000d
HMI Demon Optical
LAN
DIP5000d

I.P.
Converter COM 3
DIP5000d
8 ports
Electrical
DB
DIP5000d

COM 4
DIP5000a

D0486ENb

FIGURE 2 - EXAMPLE OF NETWORK CONFIGURATION


4.5 Various Accessories

• Electrical V11 to optical converter OCM 5000 (digital version).

• IP/LAN converter to access DIP 5000 using TCP/IP protocol.

• TMS 5000 Teleprotection management system to monitor a DIP 5000 network.


DIP5K/EN IT/A22 Main Characteristics

Page 14/38 DIP 5000

5. DIGITAL MODE
5.1 Digital Transmission Principle
The transmission principle used is that of constant transmission of a digital frame
corresponding to the standby state. Closing one or more contacts modifies this frame and
transmits a command message. The length of the messages depends on the Teleprotection
variant chosen. They are encoded by means of 4, 8 or 16 words selected in a code. The
code is calculated to provide maximum security and dependability.
5.2 Available Digital Interfaces
The architecture and principles used enable the DIP 5000 Digital/Analog Teleprotection unit
to adapt to various transmission media:

• Speed from 32 Kbps to 2048 Kbps

• G703, V11 Interfaces

• Optical Interface, single mode, and multimode fibre

• Interface for 4-wire voice frequency transmission support (Leased Line, Pilot cable,
PLC).
Main Characteristics DIP5K/EN IT/A22

DIP 5000 Page 15/38

5.2.1 Digital Interfaces Supported

V11/X24
T
DCE
R
LINE
DIP5000 S (Clock)
S'

G703.1 Codirectional
T
Tx DCE
LINE
Clock
R Clock
Rx
DIP5000

G703.6
T
Tx DCE
LINE
Clock
R Clock
Rx
DIP5000

OPTICAL FIBER
Data Optical Fiber R Data
Tx
x
Clock Clock
DIP5000 DIP5000
Data Optical Fiber Data
Rx Tx
Clock Clock

OPTICAL FIBER C3794


Optical Fiber
DCE
Tx

Clock LINE
Optical Fiber Clock
Rx
DIP5000

D0045ENb

FIGURE 3 - DIGITAL INTERFACES


NOTE: In the V11/X24 configuration, the teleprotection can provide the clock
(DCE mode). In each configuration, two DIP 5000 teleprotection units
can operate together without DCE equipment.
DIP5K/EN IT/A22 Main Characteristics

Page 16/38 DIP 5000

5.2.2 Opto-electrical Redundancy


The DIP 5000 can switch communication from the optical interface (IR182 or 185) to another
digital interface (IR173, IR179 or IR180) according to user defined criteria.

»Mux »Mux
Optical fibres
Optical fibres
OPGW
OPGW
SDH network
SDH network
Microwave
Microwave
…..
Alternate ….. Alternate
Path Path
V11 Digital network V11
G703 G703

Main path through


Optical fibres
D0484ENb

FIGURE 4 - REDUNDANCY SCHEME


5.3 Optimization of the Transmission Medium
Digitization of telecommunications networks for power distribution and transmission services
optimizes the transfer of teleprotection messages insofar as they are sent in the same way
as the other services for these systems.
On the other hand, with the principle adopted, the link constantly transmits a frame when
there are no commands, which enables both teleprotection units to talk and exchange
information via service words.
The DIP 5000 can use one optical medium for main path and electrical medium for backup
path.
5.4 Number of Commands
The architecture of the DIP 5000 Digital Teleprotection unit enables the transmission of 2, 4,
or 8 commands using standard boards. Regardless of the variant used, the various
commands are independent and can be transmitted simultaneously.
5.5 Applications
Customization for the protection scheme is carried out on each set of 2 commands (1-2), (3-
4), (5-6), (7-8). The application can be selected from blocking, permissive or direct tripping.
5.6 Link Check
The transmission medium is permanently checked using a part of the transmitted frame (call
service channel). This service channel allows the teleprotection units to exchange data about
their respective states and to decide whether or not if the link is able to carry out its
assignment. The local apparatus reflects the state of the remote by means of the remote
alarm feature. The transmission time of the link is also permanently checked through the
service channel by measuring on both sides the times for a particular message to come back
from the opposite side. The operator can check this transmission time using the HMI
application on a personal computer with any version of Windows 2000 and XP.
The operator can also check the Bit Error Rate on the link using the HMI application.
Main Characteristics DIP5K/EN IT/A22

DIP 5000 Page 17/38

5.7 Maintenance and Loopback


In order to control local and remote Teleprotection operation, the operator can switch the unit
to maintenance mode and carry out a local or remote loopback using the DIP 5000 human-
machine interface:

• the local loopback can be carried out while transmitting to the remote,

• the remote and local loopback are mutually exclusive,

• commands can be forced using the HMI while in local or remote mode.

Remote loop command

Tx

LOCAL REMOTE
LOOPBACK Rx LOOPBACK

Transmitter
blocked or not
LOCAL REMOTE

FIGURE 5 - LOOPBACK
This feature allows the checking of the entire transmission link.
DIP5K/EN IT/A22 Main Characteristics

Page 18/38 DIP 5000

6. ANALOG MODE
6.1 Frequency Coding in the 0 - 4 kHz band Analog Single Tone
As part of this principle, the standby state (all the contacts whose position is to be
transmitted are open) corresponds to the continuous transmission of a guard frequency FV.
If one or more contacts close, transmission of the guard frequency stops and one or more
command frequencies FC are transmitted (via closed contact or transmitted command).

Standby state
Guard Frequency

Transmission of
2 commands
FC1 FC2
D0048ENa

FIGURE 6 - TRANSMISSION - VOICE FREQUENCY BAND ST


6.2 Frequency Coding in the 0 - 4 kHz band Coded Dual Tone .
In dual tone mode, the Guard frequency is F8 and command frequencies are coded in a
combination of 2 frequencies between F1 and F7.

DF

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
D0485ENa

FIGURE 7 - TRANSMISSION - VOICE FREQUENCY BAND DUAL TONE


Main Characteristics DIP5K/EN IT/A22

DIP 5000 Page 19/38

The following table presents the commands frequency coding:

Input command Frequency coding


Cmd1 F1+F2
Cmd2 F2+F3
Cmd3 F3+F4
Cmd4 F5+F6
Cmd1+2 F1+F3
Cmd1+3 F3+F5
Cmd1+4 F1+F5
Cmd 2+3 F2+F4
Cmd 2+4 F2+F6
Cmd3+4 F4+F6
Cmd1+2+3+4 F4+F5
Cmd1+2+3 F1+F4
Cmd2+3+4 F2+F5
Cmd1+3+4 F1+F6
Cmd1+2+4 F3+F6
Test link F3+F7
Guard F8

TABLE 1 - INPUT COMMAND FREQUENCY CODING


6.3 Analog Mode Specific Features
6.3.1 Transmission Medium
The DIP 5000 teleprotection unit is designed to transmit low frequency signals on a 4-wire
analog transmission medium. Note that the link is always bi-directional.
The architecture and principles adopted are such that the DIP 5000 system can adapt to the
different bandwidth constraints of conventional transmission media, i.e.:

• 300 - 2400 Hz (cables),

• 300 - 3400 Hz (microwave, multiplexers, radio, etc.),

• 300 - 2000 and 300 - 3700 Hz (Power Line Carrier).


6.3.2 Optimization of the Medium - Single Tone
When the DIP 5000 unit is used with Power Line Carrier equipment (IEC Publication 495),
the operation of the transmission medium can be optimized:

• Bandwidth optimization
In the absence of a command, the link can transmit other signals (for example, telephony or
data). In this particular case, the guard frequency FV can be the telephone signalling
frequency of the telecommunication system and hence can be generated by the latter. When
a command is transmitted, the transmission of telephony, calling, and, as appropriate, higher
frequency signals is interrupted for the benefit of the command frequencies.
DIP5K/EN IT/A22 Main Characteristics

Page 20/38 DIP 5000

• Power optimization
A specific exploitation mode, called Enhanced Mode, allows the use of all the available
power of the PLC equipment to transmit the teleprotection commands.
In this scheme, the level of the transmitted command towards the PLC depends on the
number of simultaneous commands to transmit, in order to obtain a P.E.P. level, on the R.F.
medium, equivalent to the level of the maximum power of the PLC.
6.3.3 Number of Commands - Single Tone
The architecture of the DIP 5000 unit is such that standard boards can be used to provide 2
or 4 command versions.
Two variants are available:

• normal mode
In this mode, the commands are fully independent and can be transmitted simultaneously.
The output level is shared between the command signals. Due to the simultaneous
transmission aspect, the level of each command signal is limited so that the sum is equal or
less than the admissible transmitted level.

• enhanced mode
This mode, defined by a particular algorithm coding mode, forces the command output signal
to the max output available power. This solution is particularly suited to the PLC medium and
sensitive links where the optimized SNR is reached.
In the command state, the DIP 5000 transmits its command signal at the maximum output
reference. In the case of two simultaneous commands, the level of each signal is reduced in
order not to exceed the maximum output reference.
This arrangement is automatically set back to the initial setting (max reference) as soon as
the simultaneous condition is cancelled.
The DIP 5000 with its 4 commands is arranged in a 2+2 operating mode. The 4 commands
are shared into 2 groups combined with a priority rule.
Each group keeps to the automatic max reference concept. The 2+2 priority rule is designed
for optimized signal transmission.
Priority rule

Command Input Transmitted command Comment


active
1 1 Group A
2 2
1+2 1+2
3 3 Group B
4 4
3+4 3+4
1+3 1 Group A has priority
1+4 1 over Group B
2+3 2
2+4 2
1+2+3 1+2
2+3+4 2
1+2+3+4 1+2
Main Characteristics DIP5K/EN IT/A22

DIP 5000 Page 21/38

6.3.4 Link Test


The operator can verify the general operation of the link, even in service, by pressing a push
button or through the operator console. This procedure transmits a test message that is
returned by the other terminal system.
This procedure provides a very quick check on the transmission medium and the transmitter
and receiver parts of the units.
The procedure can also be initiated automatically by the system on a daily basis at a fixed
time selected by the operator, or on an hourly basis. This feature is programmed using the
HMI application.
If the procedure should fail after three successive attempts, the system enters an irreversible
alarm condition (illumination of fault lights and activation of alarm loops).
We can measure the link test time under event recorder.

Test T
T
CPU CPU
R Test R

FIGURE 8 - LINK TEST - ANALOG MODE


6.3.5 Unblocking Function
Initiation condition: a loss on the guard frequency level higher than the programmed
threshold and longer than the time selected causes a calibrated command of 200 ms to be
issued on the selected output.

• Delay time threshold: adjustable from 5 to 80 ms by 1 ms steps,

• Trip threshold: adjustable from 10 to 20 dB under the guard nominal level by 0.1 dB
steps.
6.3.6 Alive Output
The voice frequency interface module provides an output contact (solid state relay) which is
closed as long as the DIP 5000 teleprotection is powered. This feature allows the
communication equipment or the protection automation system to be aware of the powering-
off of the teleprotection unit when the guard frequency is emitted by the communication
equipment.
The circuit for this contact is located in the communication interface connector.
6.3.7 External Alarm Input
The voice frequency interface board has an opto-electronic input circuit that is activated by
voltage (48V nominal). This input can be configured by the HMI to trigger an alarm on the
teleprotection unit. This alarm can be minor or major, and is activated after a delay selected
by the user (from 0 to 2.5 seconds with 100 ms step).
This feature allows, for example, the DIP 5000 teleprotection to take into account the
powering-off or the absence of power, as well as a dedicated alarm issued by the
communication unit.
The circuit for this input is located in the communication interface connector.
DIP5K/EN IT/A22 Main Characteristics

Page 22/38 DIP 5000

6.3.8 DIP 5000 Connected to a Power Line Carrier (PLC)


6.3.8.1 Automatic Maximum Boost
When the DIP 5000 is used in enhanced mode together with PLC equipment, the command
signal is automatically boosted up to the maximum available transmission power (PLC user
signals are interrupted during command transmission).
Use of the 40W PLC power (+ 46dBm), or 80W (+ 49dBm) for commands in enhanced mode
ensures the best command transmission under adverse conditions (optimized Signal-to-
Noise Ratio).
6.3.8.2 Operation
The optimized 40W transmission power corresponds to the following data:

Input command active R.F output signal by command


One command (group A or +46 dBm PLC P.E.P.
Group B)
Two commands (within the +40 dBm PLC P.E.P. -6 dB
same group)

The optimized 80W transmission power corresponds to the following data:

Input command active R.F output signal by command


One command (group A or +49 dBm PLC P.E.P.
Group B)
Two commands (within the +43 dBm PLC P.E.P. -6 dB
same group)

Input commands
ON

R.F Output
(PLC)

Automatic Power Process


D0487ENa

FIGURE 9 - THE DIAGRAM SHOWS AN EXAMPLE OF THE AUTOMATIC POWER PROCESS


Main Characteristics DIP5K/EN IT/A22

DIP 5000 Page 23/38

6.4 Analog Mode Specific Features - Single/ Coded Dual tone


Teleprotection mode: ENCODED Teleprotection

• 8 frequency tones

• Dual tone command (F1 to F7)

• F8 as guard frequency (use of PLC signalling is not allowed)

• Dual tone Link test

• 4 command Teleprotection (6 application types)

• 9x1600Hz Bandwidths from 300Hz to 3600Hz


Noise alarm level and duration, measured by smoothing the decision filters, being part of
decision process, must be set.
Locking alarm duration, a blocking of the decision algorithm (impossibility of recognizing a
command under bad line conditions), must be set.
6.5 Available interfaces
The architecture and principles used enable the DIP 5000 Digital/Analog Teleprotection unit
to adapt to various transmission media:

• Speed from 32 Kbps to 2048 Kbps,

• Interface G703, V11…,

• Optical Interface, single mode and multimode fibre,

• Interface for 4 wires voice frequency transmission support (Leased Line, pilot cable,
PLC).

ANALOGUE
Tx
DIP5000 Rx DCE
DCE ALARM
LINE
BLE / BOOST
BLR
ALIVE

D0046ENc

FIGURE 10 - VOICE FREQUENCY INTERFACE


XXXThe voice frequency interface works in a part of the 4 kHz audio frequency band, the
signal from transmitter to the receiver is conveyed via a telecommunication circuit that can
be cable link, PLC link, leased line, point to point radio links, etc…
DIP5K/EN IT/A22 Main Characteristics

Page 24/38 DIP 5000

7. UNIT DESCRIPTION
The DIP 5000 Teleprotection unit is made up of a EUROPE type rack 19" wide and 3 units
high, in which the printed circuit boards holding the components (6-unit format, 220-mm
deep) are housed.
The modules are connected by a motherboard which also holds the sockets to which are
fitted the connectors to the power supply, the transmission medium and the operating
system.

37,7 mm

3
(3U)
57,1 mm 2 132,5 mm
4 5 6
1 300 mm
or
316 mm

37,7 mm

D0051XXb

FIGURE 11 - DIP 5000 RACK


Main Characteristics DIP5K/EN IT/A22

DIP 5000 Page 25/38

The different boards composing the DIP 5000 are:

Name Function Location


AM170 * Single supply rack
AM170D Double power supply rack
FB182 * Single supply Backside Mother board
FB182D Dual supply Backside Mother board
UT148*** CPU Board 1
UT148D CPU Board 1
SR114*** I/O Board 48V to 250V DC 2/3
SR114D I/O Board 48V to 250V DC 2/3
SR115 I/O board 24V to 127V DC 2/3
SR116 I/O board 48V to 127V DC 2/3
AL137 Power Supply 48V DC nominal input 5/6 *
AL139A Power Supply 110 to 127V DC nominal input 5/6 *
AL139B Power Supply 250V DC nominal input 5/6 *
AL140 Power Supply 24V DC nominal input 5/6 *
AL141 Power Supply 48 to 60V DC nominal input 5/6 *
IR173 G703-6 (2 Mbps) interface On CPU Board
IR179 V11 (32 kbps to 512 kbps) interface On CPU Board
IR180 G703-1 (64 kbps) codirectional interface On CPU Board
IR182-1310 Singlemode optical fibre interface (λ = 1310 nm, 4
9/125 µm, core/cladding), Fc/Pc connectors
IR182-1550 Singlemode optical fibre interface (λ = 1550 nm, 4
9/125 µm, core/cladding), Fc/Pc connectors
IR183 Voice Frequency interface On CPU Board
IR184 ** IRIG-B interface optional board On CPU Board
IR185 Short Haul Fibre interface, C37.94 standard, 50 or 4
62.5 µm Graded index, ST connector (generic term
correct connector = BFOC/2.5)
FI002 Filter against capacitive discharge 2
TABLE 2 - DIP 5000 BOARDS

* In order to increase dependability, two power supply modules can be used, with the same
or different input voltage.
** In addition to communication interface
*** France only
DIP5K/EN IT/A22 Main Characteristics

Page 26/38 DIP 5000

8. MAIN CHARACTERISTICS
8.1 Mechanical Characteristics

Dimensions
Height 132 mm (3U)
Width 483 mm (19")
Depth 307 mm or 323 mm
Mass 7.6 kg
Conductor cross-section section on medium AWG 20 to 22 (0.324 to 0.519 mm²)
connector
Allowable cable diameter on medium access 8.2 mm maximum
connector
Cable for plug in terminal (I/O commands) 0.08 < Section < 2.5 mm²
Protection index IP30

TABLE 3 - MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS


Main Characteristics DIP5K/EN IT/A22

DIP 5000 Page 27/38

8.2 Environmental Characteristics

Climatic aspect
Nominal operation range
Temperature -10°C to +55°C
Relative humidity 90% at 23 °C
Operating limits
Temperature -40°C to +70°C
Relative humidity 95% at 40 °C
Storage limits conditions
Temperature -40°C to +85°C
Relative humidity 100% at 23 °C with no condensation
Product Safety
Generic standard EN 60255-5 (2000)/EN60255-27(2005)
Teleprotection Standard IEC 60834-1 (1999)/EN 60834-1 (2000)
Insulation resistance > 30.104 MΩ/500 VDC
Dielectric tests at 50Hz 2.5 kV on I/O commands
1kV on communication link
Impulse xxxwithstand level ± 5 kV on I/O commands
Earth continuity < 22 mΩ
EMC Requirements
Compliance with IEC Recommendations
Teleprotection Standard IEC 60834-1 (1999)/EN 60834-1 (2000)
Generic immunity (industrial) IEC 61000-6-2 (2005)
Generic emission (industrial) IEC 61000-6-4 (2006)
Generic immunity (station and substation IEC/TS 61000-6-5 (2001)
environment)
EMC (Testing)
Electrostatic discharges IEC 61000-4-2(2001) Class 4/
IEC 60255-22-2 (1996)
Radiated electromagnetic field IEC 61000-4-3 (2006) Class 3
Fast transient bursts IEC 61000-4-4 (2004) Class 4/
IEC 60255-22-4 (2002) Class B
Surge immunity IEC 61000-4-5 (2005) Class 3/
IEC 60255-22-5 (2002)
Conducted electromagnetic field IEC 61000-4-6(2006) Class 3/
IEC 60255-22-6 (2001)
Magnetic field IEC 61000-4-8(2001) Class 5
Pulsed magnetic field IEC 61000-4-9(2001) Class 5
Voltage dips, short interruptions and voltage IEC 61000-4-29 (2000)
variations
Oscillatory waves IEC 61000-4-12(2006) Class 3/
IEC 60255-22-1 (2007)
xxxConducted common mode disturbances IEC 61000-4-16(2002) Class 4/
IEC 60255-22-7 (2003)
TABLE 4 - ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
DIP5K/EN IT/A22 Main Characteristics

Page 28/38 DIP 5000

8.3 Power Supply Electrical Characteristics

Nominal voltage 24 VDC 48 VDC 48/60 VDC 110/127VDC 220/250 VDC


Operating range (VDC) 18 to 30 36 to 60 36 to 72 80 to 160 160 to 300
Fuses 3.15 AT/250 V
Redundancy power supply 2 separate supply accesses
possibility
Nominal consumption 7.5 W
Maximum absorbed power < 15 W
Maximum current at power- < 15 A (50µs ≤ t ≤ 1.5 ms)
up
xxx < 8 A (1.5 ms ≤ t ≤ 500 ms)
Ripple frequency allowed < 1.5 V peak to peak
between 100 Hz and
600Hz
Variations that can be ± 20 V of maximum amplitude,
superimposed on the above
Maximum duration: 1 s
Fleeting power cut < 50 ms/500 ms
Re-injected noise < 3 mV psophometric
< 6 mV peak to peak

TABLE 5 - POWER SUPPLY CHARACTERISTICS


Main Characteristics DIP5K/EN IT/A22

DIP 5000 Page 29/38

8.4 Operational Characteristics

General
Number of commands transmitted 2 or 4 with one I/O board, up to 8 with a second
board
Particularity All commands are independent and can be used
simultaneously.
Command inputs
Physical input 4 per I/O board up to 8 with 2 boards
Mode By voltage 24 to 250 V DC
Decoupling Opto-electronic
Input Filter 1 to 100 ms selectable by HMI, 1 ms step
Minimum closure time Digital version: 1 ms
Analog version: from 1 ms to 5 ms (1 ms step)
selectable by HMI
Logical input combination Possibility of AND, OR, LOG between 2 inputs
Possible transmission extension
(minimum duration)
For digital transmission 0 up to 250 ms by 1 ms steps from HMI
For analog transmission 0 up to 500 ms by 1 ms steps from HMI
Command outputs
Mode By contacts (solid-state relay)
Number of contacts 4 working contacts, up to 8 with two I/O boards
Contacts working by pairs when logical input
combination is used
Maximum voltage 290 VDC
Maximum current 2 A (protected against over current 100A/30ms)
Cut-off power 120 W
Short circuit current 100A/30 ms
Contact closure time Equal to the duration of command signal received
Possible output extension (minimum
duration)
For digital output 0 up to 20 ms by 1 ms steps and 200 ms up to 3s by
10 ms steps from HMI
For analog output Coded Dual tone 0 up to 200 ms by 2 ms steps and 200 ms up to 3s
by 20 ms steps from HMI
For analog output Single tone 0 up to 500 ms by 1 ms steps
DIP5K/EN IT/A22 Main Characteristics

Page 30/38 DIP 5000

Auxiliary relays
Mode By contacts (solid-state relay)
Number of contacts 1 Working contact
At least 2 aux. contacts by command (1 TX & 1 RX)
Up to 4 aux. contacts by command (2 TX & 2 RX)
Same characteristics as command
outputs
Alarm Functions
Interface Indicator lights and relays
Number of contacts 2 x 2 neutral contacts (NC)
Maximum voltage 290 VDC
Maximum current 5 A (protected against over current 100A/30ms)
Cut-off power 100 W
Short circuit current 100A/30 ms
Delay on alarm relay command 0s/2.5s/5s/10s selectable from HMI

Operator assistance
Operations Indicator lights and alarm loops
Maintenance PC to handle all start-up and maintenance operations
History More than1750 time-stamped events and more
than1750 time-stamped alarms
Resolution = 1 ms between 2 events or alarms

TABLE 6 – OPERATIONALS CHARACTERISTICS


Main Characteristics DIP5K/EN IT/A22

DIP 5000 Page 31/38

8.5 Digital Transmission Characteristics

Digital medium G703.1/G703.6/V11/Optical


Transmission speed From 32 kbps to 2048 kbps
Connector SUB-D 15 pin, shielded
Impedance 120Ω or 75Ω with external G.703 75-120 adapter
Insulation By translator for G703
By optocouplers for V11
Optical characteristics Single mode IR182
Security (IEC 60825-1 amendment Class 1
2 - 2002)
Short distance link (up to 60 km) Laser diode 1310 nm for single mode fibres (9/125
µm core/cladding)
Optical power at 1310 nm Nominal -7 dBm Minimum – 8.5 dBm
Long distance link (up to 110 km) Laser diode 1550 nm for single mode fibres (9/125
µm core/cladding)
Optical power at 1550 nm Nominal - 3 dBm Minimum – 4.5 dBm
Receiver sensitivity -40 dBm
Acceptable chromatic dispersion Non significant parameter
Data rate 256 kbps (internal clock mode)
64 kbps (external clock mode)
Can work on short distances with
multimode fibre (1310 nm)
Optical characteristics Multimode IR185
IEEC C.37.94 compliant
Data Rate n x 64 kbps (1 • n • 8)
Optical Power at 820 nm Fibres Nominal -19 dBm Minimum -23 dBm
50µm
Optical Power at 820 nm Fibres Nominal -16 dBm Minimum -19 dBm
62µm
Receiver sensitivity - 30 dBm

TABLE 7 – DIGITAL TRANSMISSION CHARACTERISTICS


DIP5K/EN IT/A22 Main Characteristics

Page 32/38 DIP 5000

8.6 Voice Frequency Transmission Characteristics


8.6.1 General characteristics

Medium access
Line impedance 600 Ω or high impedance (selected by
jumper)
Return loss 20 dB minimum on 600 Ω
Galvanic insulation Translator
Sender
Precision of transmitted frequencies 1 Hz
Transmission level From –30 dBm to +6 dBm
Maximum overall output level (4 commands) +6 dBm
Preaccentuation Up to 14 dB between two signals
Spurious signals outside band < 50 dB of transmitted signal
Receiver
Permissible levels From –40 dBm to 0 dBm
Adjustment 1 for guard frequency and 1 for commands
Acceptable difference between guard and 0 to 14 dB
command frequency

TABLE 8 – VOICE FREQUENCY GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS


8.6.2 Band sharing single tone
The following table presents the frequency allocations in the single tone bandwidths.

2 commands
Channel bandwidth 300 - 3400 Hz 300 - 2400 Hz 300 - 2000 Hz 300 - 2000 Hz
Guard frequency band (Rx) 3500/3800 Hz 2400/2650 Hz 2000/2300 Hz 3600/3800 Hz
Guard frequency (Tx) 3600 Hz 2600 Hz 2240 Hz 3680 Hz
Command 1 frequency 900 Hz 400 Hz 480 Hz 480 Hz
Command 2 frequency 2100 Hz 1200 Hz 1120 Hz 1120 Hz
4 commands
Channel bandwidth 300 - 3400 Hz 300 - 2400 Hz 300 - 2000 Hz 300 - 2000 Hz
Guard frequency band (Rx) 3500/3800 Hz 2400/2650 Hz 2000/2300 Hz 3600/3800 Hz
Guard frequency (Tx) 3680 Hz 2600 Hz 2240 Hz 3680 Hz
Command 1 frequency 640 Hz 400 Hz 480 Hz 480 Hz
Command 2 frequency 1280 Hz 800 Hz 800 Hz 800 Hz
Command 3 frequency 1920 Hz 1200 Hz 1120 Hz 1120 Hz
Command 4 frequency 2560 Hz 1600 Hz 1440 Hz 1440 Hz

TABLE 9 - BAND SHARING SINGLE TONE


Main Characteristics DIP5K/EN IT/A22

DIP 5000 Page 33/38

8.6.3 Band sharing coded dual tone


The following tables present the bandwidths and the spectral distribution of frequencies used
in the coded dual tone .

Band F8 Bandwidth
1 1741 300-1900
2 1820 400-2000
3 2110 670-2260
4 2295 850-2450
5 2479 1040-2630
6 2664 1220-2810
7 2848 1400-3000
8 3033 1590-3180
9 3429 1990-3580

TABLE 10 - FREQUENCIES CODED DUAL TONE

Frequencies
(Hz) Band 1 Band 2 Band 3 Band 4 Band 5 Band 6 Band 7 Band 8 Band 9
F1 448 527 818 1002 1187 1371 1556 1741 2136
F2 633 712 1002 1187 1371 1556 1741 1925 2321
F3 818 897 1187 1371 1556 1741 1925 2110 2505
F4 1002 1081 1371 1556 1741 1925 2110 2294 2690
F5 1187 1266 1556 1741 1925 2110 2294 2479 2875
F6 1371 1451 1741 1925 2110 2295 2479 2664 3059
F7 1556 1635 1925 2110 2294 2479 2664 2848 3244
F8 1741 1820 2110 2294 2479 2664 2848 3033 3429
Link test F3+F7 F3+F7 F3+F7 F3+F7 F3+F7 F3+F7 F3+F7 F3+F7 F3+F7

TABLE 11 – FREQUENCIES AND BANDWIDTH (CODED DUAL TONE )


DIP5K/EN IT/A22 Main Characteristics

Page 34/38 DIP 5000

9. PERFORMANCE
9.1 Digital interfaces
9.1.1 Transfer time as a function of transmission speed (digital and IR 182 boards)

OPERATION
DATA
Blocking Permissive Tripping Direct Tripping
RATE
2 cmds 4 cmds 8 cmds 2 cmds 4 cmds 8 cmds 2 cmds 4 cmds 8 cmds
32 Kbps 4.5 ms 6.5 ms 10.5 ms 6 ms 8.5 ms 15 ms 7.5 ms 11.5 ms 19.5 ms
64 Kbps 3 ms 4 ms 6 ms 3.5 ms 5 ms 8 ms 4.5 ms 6.5 ms 10.5 ms
128 Kbps 2 ms 2.5 ms 3.5 ms 2 ms 3 ms 4.5 ms 2.5 ms 3.5 ms 5.5 ms
256 Kbps 1.5 ms 1.5 ms 2 ms 1.5 ms 2 ms 2.5 ms 2 ms 2.5 ms 3.5 ms
2048 Kbps 1 ms 1 ms 1 ms 1 ms 1 ms 1 ms 1.5 ms 1.5 ms 1.5 ms

TABLE 12: TRANSMISSION TIME MEASUREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL AND IR182 CARDS
NOTE: The times given correspond to a configuration with the input filter
disabled.
9.1.2 Transfer time as a function of transmission speed (IR 185 board)
The IR-185 board, short haul multimode fibres, is used to connect a DIP 5000 unit to any
transmission equipment (e.g Mux) with the IEEE C37.94 optical protocol.
Standard IEEE C37.94 runs at a maximum of 2.048Mbits/sec, with as many as twelve slots
of 64Kbits/sec each available for maximum data flow. The DIP 5000 has eight slots selected
with a rotary switch.

Rotary Clock configuration


T mean (ms) T min (ms) T max (ms)
switch KHz
1 64 7.19 6.53 7.86
2 128 4.74 4.35 5.10
3 192 3.68 3.45 3.93
4 256 3.35 3.12 3.64
5 320 3.12 2.92 3.38
6 284 2.89 2.69 3.12
7 448 2.71 2.52 2.90
8 512 2.66 2.44 2.84

TABLE 13 - TRANSMISSION TIME MEASUREMENTS FOR IR185 CARD WITH MUX


9.1.3 Security
The following table gives dependability and security values as a function of protection mode
with 4 commands and a speed of 64 kpbs.

Protection mode Security (Puc) BER = 0.5


(Worst case)
Blocking < 2E-7
Permissive 6E-14
Direct Tripping 1E-20
Main Characteristics DIP5K/EN IT/A22

DIP 5000 Page 35/38

9.1.4 Dependability

Protection mode Dependability (Pmc)


BER = 1E-3

Blocking 1E-30
Permissive 1E-35
Direct Tripping 1E-19

9.2 Analog Interface Single Tone Version


9.2.1 Transmission time
For each application the two times given are in milliseconds and respectively, with 6 dB
Boost - without 6 db Boost (in normal mode)

BANDWIDTH OPERATION

Command Guard Blocking Permissive Direct tripping


Channel frequency
2 cmds 4 cmds 2 cmds 4 cmds 2 cmds 4 cmds
300-3400 3600 Hz 7-7 7-8 8-9 9 - 10 11 - 12 14 - 15

300-2400 2540 Hz 10 - 10 11 - 12 13 - 13 13 - 14 18 - 18 19 - 20

300-2000 2240 Hz 10 - 10 11 - 12 13 - 13 14 - 15 18 - 18 19 - 20

300-2000 3680 Hz 10 - 10 11 - 12 13 - 13 14 - 15 18 - 18 19 - 20

TABLE 14 – TRANSMISSION TIME SINGLE TONE VERSION


NOTE: The times given correspond to a configuration with the input filter
disabled.
9.2.2 Security (bandwidth 300-3400 Hz)
The values given in the following table correspond to the worst SNR.

Protection mode 2 commands 4 commands


-4 -4

Blocking <6.10 <6.10


-6 -4

Permissive <6.10 <6.10


-6 -4

Direct Tripping <6.10 <6.10

9.2.3 Dependability (bandwidth 300-3400 Hz)


The values given in the following table correspond to a SNR of 6 dB.

Protection mode 2 commands 4 commands


-4 -4

Blocking <6.10 <6.10


-4 -4

Permissive <6.10 <6.10


-4 -4

Direct Tripping <6.10 <6.10


DIP5K/EN IT/A22 Main Characteristics

Page 36/38 DIP 5000

9.3 Analog Interface Coded Dual Tone


9.3.1 Transmission time

BANDWIDTH OPERATION
Blocking Permissive Direct tripping
Command channel 4 commands 4 commands 4 commands
300-1900 Hz 8 ms 9 ms 10 ms

TABLE 15 – TRANSMISSION TIME CODED DUAL TONE


9.3.2 Security (bandwidth 300 1900 Hz)
Security (for the worst SNR)

OPERATION
Blocking Permissive Direct tripping
-4 -6
<3.10 <6.10 <10-11

9.3.3 Dependability (bandwidth 300 1900 HZ)


Dependability (for SNR = 6 dB)

OPERATION
Blocking Permissive Direct tripping
-4 -4
<6.10 <8.10 <8.10-4

Permissive

1,00E+00
11
1,00E-01 13

15
1,00E-02
17

Pmc 19
1,00E-03
21

1,00E-04
23

1,00E-05

<1,00E-06

3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SNR
D0615ENb
Main Characteristics DIP5K/EN IT/A22

DIP 5000 Page 37/38

Blocking

1,00E+00

1,00E-01

1,00E-02 11ms
13ms
Pmc

1,00E-03 15ms
25ms

1,00E-04

1,00E-05

1,00E-06
0 2 4 6 8 10
SNR
D0616ENb

Direct tripping

1,00E+00

1,00E-01

1,00E-02 1,1T0

1,3To
Pmc

1,00E-03 1,5To

2,1To
1,00E-04 3,1To

37ms
1,00E-05

1,00E-06
3 5 7 9 11
SNR
D0617ENb
DIP5K/EN IT/A22 Main Characteristics

Page 38/38 DIP 5000

BLANK PAGE
Installation DIP5K/EN IN/A22

DIP 5000

INSTALLATION
Installation DIP5K/EN IN/A22

DIP 5000 Page 1/36

CONTENTS

1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 7

2. SHIPMENT 8
2.1 Packaging 8
2.2 Storage 8
2.3 Parts list 8

3. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 10

4. INSTALLATION 11
4.1 Description 11
4.2 Plug-in Board Rack Position 11
4.3 Board Modular implementation 11
4.3.1 Minimal Board Rack implementation 12
4.3.2 Complementary Board Rack implementation 12
4.3.3 Optional Boards 13

5. POWER SUPPLY BOARDS 14


5.1 Power Supply Boards VDC Range Values 14
5.2 Constraints on the V DC input values 14
5.3 Power supply and consumption 14

6. CONNECTION 15
6.1 Rear Connectors 15
6.2 Terminal block Wiring 16
6.2.1 Plug-in terminal block description 16
6.2.2 Input /Output Terminal Block Pin-Out 17
6.2.3 Recommendation 18
6.2.4 Input Logic Command allocation 18
6.2.5 Wiring Examples 20
6.3 Alarm and Output copy Terminal Block Wiring 20
6.3.1 Plug-in terminal blocks description 20
6.3.2 Alarm and Output copy terminal block Pin Out 21
6.3.3 Output Copy Allocation 21
6.4 Power supply wiring 23
6.4.1 Plug-in terminal blocks description 23
6.4.2 Power supply connector Pin Out with standard CORTEC subrack 23
6.4.3 Power supply connector Pin Out with dual power supply version 23
DIP5K/EN IN/A22 Installation

Page 2/36 DIP 5000

6.5 Access port for the line connection medium 23


6.5.1 Connector description 23
6.5.2 V11/X24 Interface Pin_Out - IR179 24
6.5.3 G703-1 Codirectional Interface (64kbps) Pin Out - IR180 25
6.5.4 G703-6 Interface (2 Mbps) Pin Out - IR173 26
6.5.5 Voice frequency interface (Analog mode) - IR183 27
6.6 Optical Fibre access port 27
6.7 HMI access port (PC connection) 28
6.8 IRIG-B interface port 28
6.9 FI002 Wiring 29

7. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 30

8. APPENDIX 31
8.1 Terminal block location 31
8.2 Terminal block location dual power supply version 32
8.3 2 commands version connections 33
8.4 4 commands - 1 I/O board version – connections 33
8.5 4 commands - 2 I/O boards version – connections 34
8.6 8 commands connections 34
8.7 Selecting type of configuration 35

LIST OF FIGURES

FIGURE 1 - DIP 5000 RACK 11


FIGURE 4 - POSITION OF PLUG-IN BOARDS 12
FIGURE 5 - IRXXX DAUGHTER BOARDS LOCATION ON CPU BOARD 13
FIGURE 6 - REAR CONNECTORS 15
FIGURE 7 - 10 POINTS WAGO CONNECTOR 16
FIGURE 8 - PLUG-IN TERMINAL BLOCK TOOL 17
FIGURE 9 - 11 POINTS WAGO CONNECTOR 20
FIGURE 10 - V11/X24 INTERFACE PIN OUT 24
FIGURE 11 - G703.1 INTERFACE PIN OUT 25
FIGURE 12 - G703.6 INTERFACE 2 MBIT/S 26
FIGURE 13 - ANALOG INTERFACE PIN OUT 27
FIGURE 14 - DESCRIPTION OF THE HMI CONNECTOR ON THE FRONT PANEL 28
Installation DIP5K/EN IN/A22

DIP 5000 Page 3/36

FIGURE 15 - DESCRIPTION OF THE HMI CONNECTOR ON THE REAR PANEL 28


FIGURE 16 - COMMANDS INPUTS AND FILTER WIRING 29
FIGURE 17 - LOCATION OF CONNECTIONS ON THE REAR SIDE 31
FIGURE 18 - REAR CONNECTIONS 32
FIGURE 19 - TWO COMMANDS VERSION CONNECTIONS 33
FIGURE 20 - FOUR COMMANDS VERSION CONNECTIONS - 1 I/O BOARD 33
FIGURE 21 - FOUR COMMANDS VERSION CONNECTIONS - 2 I/O BOARD 34
FIGURE 22 - EIGHT COMMANDS VERSION CONNECTIONS 34

LIST OF TABLES

TABLE 1 - UNIT PARTS LIST 8


TABLE 2 - AVAILABLE BOARDS 9
TABLE 3 – POWER SUPPLY BOARDS VDC RANGE VALUE 14
TABLE 4 - P10, P11, P12, AND P13 TERMINAL BLOCK CIRCUITS LOCATIONS 17
TABLE 5 - ALLOCATION OF COMMANDS 19
TABLE 6 - P14, P15, AND P16 TERMINAL BLOCKS CIRCUITS LOCATION 21
TABLE 7 - ALLOCATION OF OUTPUT COPY 22
TABLE 8 - P17 TERMINAL BLOCK PIN OUT 23
TABLE 9 - V11/X24 INTERFACE CONNECTION 24
TABLE 10 - G703-1 CODIRECTIONAL INTERFACE CONNECTION 25
TABLE 11 - G703-6 INTERFACE CONNECTION 26
TABLE 12 - VOICE FREQUENCY INTERFACE CONNECTION 27
TABLE 13 - COMMAND MANAGEMENT CONNECTORS 31
TABLE 14 - OTHER REAR PANEL CONNECTORS 31
TABLE 15 - COMMAND MANAGEMENT CONNECTORS 32
TABLE 16 - OTHER REAR PANEL CONNECTORS 32
DIP5K/EN IN/A22 Installation

Page 4/36 DIP 5000

BLANK PAGE
Installation DIP5K/EN IN/A22

DIP 5000 Page 5/36

MODIFICATIONS PAGE

VERSION DATE COMMENTS


A11 10/19/2000 ORIGINAL ISSUE
B11 04/18/2001 ADDITION OF OPTICAL INTERFACE
C11 10/04/2001 ADDITION OF GROUNDING RECOMMENDATION
D11 06/02/2004 AREVA – ADDITION OF ANALOG PART
E11 11/14/2007 NEW STRUCTURE. NEW WRITING
F11 02/11/2008 MINOR CORRECTIONS
A22 08/14/2008 PACKAGE RELEASE 2.2

NOTE: From the revision C, the numbering system of the document has
changed according to the AREVA standards, on the other hand the
index of the document has been incremented for a better follow-up.
DIP5K/EN IN/A22 Installation

Page 6/36 DIP 5000

BLANK PAGE
Installation DIP5K/EN IN/A22

DIP 5000 Page 7/36

1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE UNIT, THE USER
SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY
SECTION DIP5K/EN SS/A11 OR LATER ISSUE, THE TECHNICAL DATA
SECTION AND THE RATING ON THE EQUIMENT RATING LABEL.

THE FRONT PANEL MOUNTED MONITOR DOWNLOAD PORT IS AN


EXTRA-LOW VOLTAGE (ELV) CIRCUIT WHICH PROVIDES BASIC
INSULATION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK. WHEN THE RELAY IS
ENERGISED, THE TERMINALS OF THIS PORT SHOULD NOT BE
TOUCHED SINCE IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF A SINGLE FAULT
CONDITION THERE WOULD BE A VERY LOW PROBABILITY OF AN
ELECTRIC SHOCK. THIS PORT IS DESIGNED TO BE USED FOR
MAINTENANCE PURPOSES, THAT IS MONITORING AND SOFTWARE
DOWNLOADS; IT IS NOT INTENDED TO BE PERMANENTLY
CONNECTED.
DIP5K/EN IN/A22 Installation

Page 8/36 DIP 5000

2. SHIPMENT
2.1 Packaging
DIP 5000 packaging includes:

• The DIP 5000

• A set of connectors, including small tools (x5) to insert a cable on wago connectors

• Factory test reports


The DIP 5000 Digital teleprotection unit comprises a rack to support plug-in cards. This rack
is designed to fit in standard 19-inch frames with attachment on the front panel. The units are
packaged and placed in a standard box suitable for transport.
Each box of equipment is marked externally with the unit serial number to avoid opening
when a number of units are shipped together.
The total equipment weight is 7.6 kg
2.2 Storage
If the unit is not installed within a few weeks after leaving the factory, it should be removed
from its packaging before storing it, preferably in a warehouse. Units intended for a long-term
storage (several months) should be installed and energized.
The temperature limits for transport and storage are as follows:
-40°C to +85°C.
2.3 Parts list
The following table shows the various unit components according to the variant adopted:

UNIT COMPONENTS
2 or 4 Commands Variant (3) 8 Commands Variant
3U rack AM170/AM170D 1
UT 148 CPU Board 1
Terminal blocks 9
Line connection 1
(15 pin female socket)
PC connection 1
(9 pin female socket)
ALxxx PSU card (1) 1 or 2 (2)
SRxxx card (1) 1 or 2 (3) 2
IRxxx digital interface board (1) 1 (DIP 5000 Digital version)
IR182/185 optical interface board 1 (DIP 5000 Optical Fibre version)
IR183 Voice Frequency interface 1 (DIP 5000 Analog version)
IR184 IRIG_B interface board 1 (optional)
FI002 filter board 1 for 2 or 4 commands variant only (optional)

TABLE 1 - UNIT PARTS LIST


(1) See list of available boards table 2 below.
(2) 2 boards if using an auxiliary power supply for redundancy.
(3) Depending on contact scheme chosen.
Installation DIP5K/EN IN/A22

DIP 5000 Page 9/36

Board name and category Function Comment


Power Supply boards
AL137 48V DC power supply 36V to 60V
AL139A 110V / 127V DC power supply 80V to 160V input
AL139B 220V / 250V DC power supply 160V to 300V input
AL140 24V DC power supply 18V to 30V input
AL141 48V / 60V DC power supply 36V to 72V input
I/O boards
SR114 48V to 250V nominal I/O * Command input from 30V to 300V
SR115 24V to 60V nominal I/O Command input from 18V to 72V
SR116 48V to 127V nominal I/O Command input from 36V to 152V
Communication interface
IR173 G703-6 (E1) Digital mode (256 kbps)
IR179 V11 / X24 Digital mode (32 kbps to 256 kbps)
IR180 G703-1 codirectional Digital mode (64 kbps)
IR182-1310 Single mode Optical Fibre Optical fibre mode
(1310 nm)
IR182-1550 Single mode Optical Fibre Optical fibre mode
(1550 nm)
IR185 Short haul (Multimode) Optical Optical fibre mode C37.94
Fibre (820 nm)
IR183 Voice frequency Interface Analog mode
Optional functions
IR184 IRIG-B Synchronization Interface IRIG-B 12x format
Standard 200-04
Input impedance 4,7kΩ at 1000Hz
Modulation ratio: 3:1 to 6:1
Input signal, peak to peak to peak:
100mV to 10V
FI002 Filter against discharge capacity 2 or 4 commands only

TABLE 2 - AVAILABLE BOARDS

* For 220 VDC and higher voltages refer also to application note document n° PTC–DIP5K-TS-E-
005.pdf.
DIP5K/EN IN/A22 Installation

Page 10/36 DIP 5000

3. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
Operating temperature limits: -40°C to + 70°C
Maximum relative humidity at 23°C: 90 %
This unit is to be installed in rooms sheltered from the rain.
Installation DIP5K/EN IN/A22

DIP 5000 Page 11/36

4. INSTALLATION
4.1 Description
Rack dimensions comply with the standard EUROPE 19 inches type, which are 3 units high
in compliance with standard DIN 41494.
The rack is designed to be installed in frames or cabinets. The only fastening and support
points on these racks are situated on the front panel of the frame, on perforated brackets.
4.2 Plug-in Board Rack Position
The UT 148 and I/O boards, which are 220 mm long and 6U wide, are plugged in and locked
horizontally on the left part of the rack.

• Card UT148 must be located in slot 1.

• One SRxxx card (SR114, SR115, SR116) for commands 1 to 4 must be located in
slot 3

37,7 mm

3
(3U)
57,1 mm 2 4 5 6 132,5 mm

1 300 mm
or
316 mm
37,7 mm

Optical Interface
optional

Hinged flap 1 or 2 power supply card(s)


AL13x according to option chosen
D0052ENc

FIGURE 1 - DIP 5000 RACK

• An SRxxx card for commands 5 to 8, if present, must be in slot 2.

• If present, filter against discharge capacity card FI002 must be in slot 2.

• The Power Supply boards are plugged in and locked vertically in slots 5 and 6 after the
unit has been installed in the rack and the connecting cables fed through.

• The optical interface board, if needed, is installed in the slot 4.


The other interface boards are plugged on the CPU board (daughter boards).
4.3 Board Modular implementation
The DIP 5000 is a modular concept declined in different versions, ANALOG, DIGITAL, 2
commands, 4 or 8 commands etc…
Optional boards are also supported.
Board implementation in the rack consists of a basic implementation with mandatory boards
with complementary boards and optional boards, depending on the chosen version.
DIP5K/EN IN/A22 Installation

Page 12/36 DIP 5000

4.3.1 Minimal Board Rack implementation


The minimal board implementation consists of:

• 1 UT148 CPU board in slot 1,

• 1 I/O board (SR114, SR115 or SR116) in slot 3,

• 1 Power Supply board in slot 5.


The following figure shows the placement of boards in the rack:

Mandatory I/O Board

Main PSU

Aux PSU
IR182
2 commands variant
UT 148 Board
IRxxx interface

Mandatory I/O Board


Main PSU

Aux PSU
IR182

FI002 optional
4 commands variant
UT 148 Board
IRxxx interface

Mandatory I/O Board


Main PSU

Aux PSU
IR182

Mandatory I/O Board 8 commands variant


(Digital Mode Only)
UT 148 Board
IRxxx interface

D0494ENa

FIGURE 2 - POSITION OF PLUG-IN BOARDS


4.3.2 Complementary Board Rack implementation
Depending on the desired configuration, the following boards may be added:

• 1 I/O board in slot 2 for the 8 command version (Digital only) or 1 FI002 for filtering.

• 1 communication interface board selected among:

− Digital interface (V11, G703-1or G703-6) installed as a daughter board on the


CPU,

− Copper wire interface (4 wires) installed as a daughter board on the CPU,

− Optical fibre interface board (IR182 or IR185) installed in slot 6.


Installation DIP5K/EN IN/A22

DIP 5000 Page 13/36

4.3.3 Optional Boards


The following optional boards can be added:

• 1 auxiliary Power Supply board in slot 4

• 1 IRIG_B interface (IR184) installed as a daughter board on the CPU

• 1 I/O board in slot 2 can be added in the 4 command version to extend the number of
outputs or to provide combinatorial logic on inputs.

IR xxx
V7 communication interface board
V5
V3
V2

IR184
V4
Optional IRIG-B interface board
V6

V1
MAX MAX
3000 U13 3000 U14
V8

V9
EEPROM
FLASH

Timer
U8
DSP
2189 U2
S1 M

S2 3,3V

– D0053ENa

FIGURE 3 - IRXXX DAUGHTER BOARDS LOCATION ON CPU BOARD


DIP5K/EN IN/A22 Installation

Page 14/36 DIP 5000

5. POWER SUPPLY BOARDS


TO POWER ON, SWITCH ON THE POWER SUPPLY CARD USING THE SWITCH
LOCATED ON THE FRONT OF THE ALxx (FOR LOCATION REFER TO APPENDIX OF
COMMISSIONING MANUAL)

5.1 Power Supply Boards VDC Range Values


The DIP 5000 Digital Teleprotection unit is powered by a DC voltage supply.
Power supply boards are offered in different versions to cover a large range of nominal DC
input values.
The following table shows the nominal voltage VDC and the VDC range corresponding to
each power supply board:

BOARD Nominal Voltage Min Voltage Max Voltage


V DC V DC V DC
AL137 48 36 60
AL139A 110 – 127 80 160
AL139B 220 – 250 160 300
AL140 24 18 30
AL141 48 – 60 36 72

TABLE 3 – POWER SUPPLY BOARDS VDC RANGE VALUE


Power supply modules are protected by fuse rated 3.15 AT/250 V.

The input DC voltage must comply with the supported DC range


value of the DC power supply board.

5.2 Constraints on the V DC input values


The applied V DC input signal must comply with the following rules:
xxxAlternative frequency component greater than or equal to 100 Hz: 0.12Un peak to peak.
Input voltage value fluctuation:

⇒ ± 20 V max. amplitude

⇒ 10 ms max. duration

⇒ 100 V/ms max. slope


5.3 Power supply and consumption
The DIP 5000 Digital Teleprotection unit must be powered by a power supply board
compatible with the V DC input values respecting constraints described above. This may or
may not be referenced to the frame mechanical earth.
In case of power supply redundancy, it is possible to have two different sources with different
voltage level (i.e. 48 Vdc and 125 Vdc or any other combination).
Current consumption of q fully-equipped unit at a nominal voltage of 48 V is 350mA
maximum, i.e. 17 W.
Consumption in the idle state (without commands) is 7W.
Installation DIP5K/EN IN/A22

DIP 5000 Page 15/36

6. CONNECTION
To comply with safety requirements and EMC specifications, the protective (earth) conductor
terminal on the rear of the DIP 5000 unit shall be connected to a ground bar via a flat braid
made of tinned copper with a cross section of at least 12 mm X 1 mm. This braid must be
reliably connected to one of the two M5 threaded studs located on the back of the DIP 5000
unit.

The safety of the unit is dependent on it’s being solidly


bonded to the protective (earth) conductor.
Immunity to electromagnetic perturbations is directly related to the
characteristics of the earthing connection. Any deviation can
severely influence reliability and availability.
6.1 Rear Connectors
There are two types of rear panels, one with one single power supply connector and one
with dual power supply connectors.
The external sockets and connection points of the DIP 5000 Digital Teleprotection unit are
located on the rear panel.

P14 P11
P16 Tx 1 1
1

Rx P10
P15
P17 Optical Fiber 1
P12
- BAT 1
- BAT Access P20
+BAT P19
+BAT P13
1

P18

D0058ENa

P14 P11
P16 Tx 1 1
1

Rx P10
P15
AUX MAIN P12
Optical Fiber 1
1
- BAT
Access P20
- BAT
+BAT P19
+BAT P13
1

P18

D0492ENb

FIGURE 4 - REAR CONNECTORS


DIP5K/EN IN/A22 Installation

Page 16/36 DIP 5000

They are an integral part of the motherboard and include:

• P10 Terminal block reserved for command inputs 1 to 4.

• P11 Terminal block reserved for command output contacts 1 to 4.

• P12 Terminal block reserved for command inputs 5 to 8, or 1 to 4 with optional FI002.

• P13 Terminal block reserved for command output contacts 5 to 8.

• P14 Terminal block for copying command transmissions and receptions.

• P15 Terminal block for copying command transmissions and receptions.

• P16 Major and minor alarm loop distribution terminal block.

• P17 Power supply terminal block

• Main & Aux Power Supply terminal block.

• P18 15-pin female socket connector for access to the communication line (copper
wire).

• P19 9-pin female socket connector for RS 232C link with the interface PC for
maintenance/operation or access to the supervision network (TMN).

• P20 BNC connector for connection to an external IRIG-B clock signal.

• FC/PC connector for optical fibre connection, only if the unit is fitted with the IR182
option.
6.2 Terminal block Wiring
The I/O commands to and from the protection relay are wired on terminal blocks P10, P11,
P12 and P13, located at the rear of the unit. The connector references and Pin 1 position are
labelled on the rear panel (see Appendix - Figure 15).
All the input and output connexions of these blocks are isolated.
6.2.1 Plug-in terminal block description
Terminal blocks are equipped with an index slot to prevent reversed connection.
The Input Output wires, whose cross-section must be in the range 0.08 - 2.5mm², are
connected to these terminal blocks by means of 10 self-locking connection points.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
D0055XXa

FIGURE 5 - 10 POINTS WAGO CONNECTOR


Installation DIP5K/EN IN/A22

DIP 5000 Page 17/36

The terminal blocks must be wired as follows:

⇒ Strip each wire to a length of 9 mm,

⇒ Using the tool supplied (lever)) (see Figure 6), press on 1,

⇒ Insert the wire in the dedicated housing,

⇒ Release the lever.

1
Lever

D0054ENa

FIGURE 6 - PLUG-IN TERMINAL BLOCK TOOL


6.2.2 Input /Output Terminal Block Pin-Out
The following table gives Input/Output PIN OUT on terminal blocks P10, P11, P12 and P13.
In this table, the following symbols have been used to mark the pins:
IN A command is activated by applying voltage to these terminals.
+ designates the point to be connected to the positive terminal of the application
– designates the point to be connected to the negative terminal of the application
OUT T and C respectively designate the MAKE and COMMON points of the available
contacts.

ACCESS TERMINAL BLOCK TERMINAL BLOCK TERMINAL BLOCK TERMINAL BLOCK


POINTS P10 P11 P12 P13
1 O⇒ External loop External loop External loop External loop
2 O⇒ Terminal presence Terminal presence Terminal presence Terminal presence
3 O⇒ – IN1 C OUT1 – IN5 C OUT5
4 O⇒ + T + T
5 O⇒ – IN2 C OUT2 – IN6 C OUT6
6 O⇒ + T + T
7 O⇒ – IN3 C OUT3 – IN7 C OUT7
8 O⇒ + T + T
9 O⇒ – IN4 C OUT4 – IN8 C OUT8
10 O⇒ + T + T

TABLE 4 - P10, P11, P12, AND P13 TERMINAL BLOCK CIRCUITS LOCATIONS
Pins 1 and 2 must be strapped on connectors P10, P11, P12 and P13 (see Figure 5). This
configuration enables the terminal block presence to be checked. If the terminal block is
removed, the strap is no longer detected and an alarm is set. The strap must be located on
the terminal block connector and must not be removed.
DIP5K/EN IN/A22 Installation

Page 18/36 DIP 5000

6.2.3 Recommendation
All the relays connected to the output contacts should have a free-wheeling diode.xxx
6.2.4 Input Logic Command allocation
Depending on the DIP 5000 hardware configuration, a combinatorial logic operator can be
applied to inputs and then allocated to commands sent to another DIP.
Input logic allows a logical operator to be affected to board input and to be allocated to a
command.
Permitted combinations are
OR: logical OR of two inputs
AND: Logical AND of two inputs
LOG: logical function ()
A command can thus be activated by the result of the logical OR, AND or LOG applied to
two inputs coming from different sources even with different voltage levels. This feature is
accessible when the number of available inputs is higher than the number of commands as
follows:

⇒ 2 commands version with one I/O board

⇒ 4 commands version with two I/O boards


Furthermore, in these variants, the command output is activated on two independent relays.
The allocation of a command to inputs and outputs depends on the configuration (see table 5
below). Where several choices are possible for the same command, the configuration is
performed using the HMI (see HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE CHAPTER § Configuring
Input\Output Parameters).
Installation DIP5K/EN IN/A22

DIP 5000 Page 19/36

(1) (1)
TERMINAL COMMAND 2 COMMANDS VERSION 4 COMMANDS VERSION 4 COMMANDS VERSION 8 COMMANDS VERSION
BLOCK ALLOCATION 1 I/O BOARD 1 I/O BOARD 2 I/O BOARDS 2 I/O BOARDS
DIGITAL ONLY

COMMAND 1 IN1 IN1 IN1 IN1


Acquisition
IN2 IN2

IN1 or IN2 IN1 or IN2


IN1 and IN2 IN1 and IN2
(2) (2)
LOG (IN1, IN2) LOG (IN1, IN2)

COMMAND 2 IN3 IN2 IN3 IN2


Acquisition
IN4 IN4

IN3 or IN4 IN3 or IN4

IN3 and IN4 IN3 and IN4


(2) (2)
LOG (IN3, IN4) LOG (IN3, IN4)
P10
COMMAND 3 IN3 IN5 IN3
Acquisition
IN6

IN5 or IN6
IN5 and IN6
(2)
LOG (IN5, IN6)

COMMAND 4 IN4 IN7 IN4


Acquisition
IN8

IN7 or IN8

IN7 and IN8


(2)
LOG (IN7, IN8)

COMMAND 5 IN5
Acquisition
COMMAND 6 IN6
Acquisition
P12
COMMAND 7 IN7
Acquisition

COMMAND 8 IN8
Acquisition

COMMAND 1 OUT1 / OUT2 OUT1 OUT1 / OUT2 OUT1


Output

COMMAND 2 OUT3 / OUT4 OUT2 OUT3 / OUT4 OUT2


Output
P11
COMMAND 3 OUT3 OUT5 / OUT6 OUT3
Output

COMMAND 4 OUT4 OUT7 / OUT8 OUT4


Output

COMMAND 5 OUT5
Output

COMMAND 6 OUT6
Output
P13
COMMAND 7 OUT7
Output

COMMAND 8 OUT8
Output

TABLE 5 - ALLOCATION OF COMMANDS


(1)
Standard I/O, without combination
(2)
Only in digital mode
DIP5K/EN IN/A22 Installation

Page 20/36 DIP 5000

6.2.5 Wiring Examples


For wiring Examples in different contexts (2, 4, 8 commands, one or two I/O boards) see
Figure 17 to Figure 20.
6.3 Alarm and Output copy Terminal Block Wiring
The command output copies are wired on terminal blocks P14, P15 and the alarm contacts
output on terminal block P16 at the rear side of the unit. The connector reference and Pin 1
position are labelled on the rear panel (see Appendix - Figure 15).
The output copies are distributed as 4 groups fully isolated from each other. Each group is
composed of 4 normally-open contacts and 1 common.
The alarm outputs are distributed as 4 normally-closed contacts fully isolated from each
other, 2 contacts for the major alarm and 2 contacts for the minor alarm.
6.3.1 Plug-in terminal blocks description
The conductors, whose cross-section must be in the range 0.08 - 2.5mm², are connected to
the terminal blocks by means of 11 self-locking connection points.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
D0056XXa

FIGURE 7 - 11 POINTS WAGO CONNECTOR


Installation DIP5K/EN IN/A22

DIP 5000 Page 21/36

6.3.2 Alarm and Output copy terminal block Pin Out


The following table gives the PIN OUT of the command output copies and the alarm contacts
output on terminal blocks P14, P5, and P16.
In the table below, the following abbreviations have been used to mark the pin:
COPYTi stands for normally-open output copy contact i.
COPYC stands for output copy common contact
R, T, C designate respectively the normally-closed, normally open, and common points
of the available contacts.

PINS TERMINAL BLOCK P14 TERMINAL BLOCK P15 TERMINAL BLOCK P16

1 T COPYT1 T COPYT9 C
Minor Alarm 1 Output
2 T COPYT2 T COPYT10 R

3 T COPYT3 T COPYT11 Not used

4 T COPYT4 T COPYT12 C
Minor Alarm 2 Output
5* C COPYC 1 to 4 C COPYC 9 to 12 R

6 Not used Not used Not used

7 T COPYT5 T COPYT13 C
Major Alarm 1 Output
8 T COPYT6 T COPYT14 R

9 T COPYT7 T COPYT15 Not used

10 T COPYT8 T COPYT16 C
Major Alarm 2 Output
11** C COPYC 5 to 8 C COPYC 13 to 16 R

TABLE 6 - P14, P15, AND P16 TERMINAL BLOCKS CIRCUITS LOCATION


6.3.3 Output Copy Allocation
The output copy relays are used to give information on the current state of the transmitter
and the receiver as follows:
Tx State for command number n: the contact(s) is(are) closed while the command n is being
transmitted, open when in guard state or while other commands are transmitted.
Rx state for command number n: the contact(s) is(are) closed while the command n is being
received, open when in guard state or while other commands are being received.

* Pin 5 is common for contacts 1 to 4 on terminal blocks 14 & 15.


** Pin 11 is common for contacts 7 to 10 on terminal blocks 14 & 15.
DIP5K/EN IN/A22 Installation

Page 22/36 DIP 5000

Allocation of the Output copy relays depends on the configuration (see table below)

COMMANDS 2 COMMANDS VERSION 4 COMMANDS VERSION 4 COMMANDS VERSION 8 COMMANDS VERSION


2 I/O BOARDS
ALLOCATION 1 I/O BOARD 1 I/O BOARD 2 I/O BOARDS (DIGITAL ONLY)

COMMAND 1 COPYT1 COPYT1


COPYT1 COPYT1
Acquisition COPY COPYT5 COPYT5
P14 P14
COMMAND 2 COPYT2 COPYT2
COPYT2 COPYT2
Acquisition COPY COPYT6 COPYT6
P14 P14
COMMAND 3 COPYT9
COPYT3 COPYT3
Acquisition COPY COPYT13
P15
COMMAND 4 COPYT10
COPYT4 COPYT4
Acquisition COPY COPYT14

COMMAND 5
COPYT9
Acquisition COPY

COMMAND 6
COPYT10
Acquisition COPY
P15
COMMAND 7
COPYT11
Acquisition COPY

COMMAND 8
COPYT12
Acquisition COPY

COMMAND 1 Output COPYT3 COPYT3


COPYT5 COPYT5
COPY COPYT7 COPYT7
P14 P14
COMMAND 2 Output COPYT4 COPYT4
COPYT6 COPYT6
COPY COPYT8 COPYT8
P14 P14
COMMAND 3 Output COPYT11
COPYT7 COPYT7
COPY COPYT15
P15
COMMAND 4 Output COPYT12
COPYT8 COPYT8
COPY COPYT16

COMMAND 5 Output
COPYT13
COPY

COMMAND 6 Output
COPYT14
COPY
P15
COMMAND 7 Output
COPYT15
COPY

COMMAND 8 Output
COPYT16
COPY

TABLE 7 - ALLOCATION OF OUTPUT COPY


Installation DIP5K/EN IN/A22

DIP 5000 Page 23/36

6.4 Power supply wiring


The power supply connector is located on terminal blocks Main & Aux at the rear side of the
unit. The connection points are labelled on the rear panel (see Appendix - Figure 15).
The connector provides 2 points for each polarity allowing the shorting of +BAT or -BAT to
the functional earth with a simple wire strap (otherwise, the polarities are floating).
6.4.1 Plug-in terminal blocks description
The wires, whose cross-section must be in the 0.08 to 2.5 mm² range, are connected to the
terminal block by means of a 7-pin WAGO connector with self-locking connection points.
6.4.2 Power supply connector Pin Out with standard CORTEC subrack

PIN MARKING POLARITY


1 -BAT
Power supply negative polarity
2 -BAT
3 +BAT
Power supply positive polarity
4 +BAT
5 Not Connected
6
Functional earth
7

TABLE 8 - P17 TERMINAL BLOCK PIN OUT


6.4.3 Power supply connector Pin Out with dual power supply version

PIN MARKING POLARITY


1 -BAT Power supply negative polarity
2 +BAT Power supply positive polarity
3 Not Connected

4 Functional Earth

TABLE 9 - MAIN & AUX TERMINAL BLOCK CONNECTIONS


6.5 Access port for the line connection medium
This chapter applies to all versions of the DIP 5000 except for the optical fibre variant. In this
case, see optical fibre connections in chapter 6.6.
6.5.1 Connector description
The port line connection medium port (Connector P18) is located on the motherboard of the
unit (see Appendix - Figure 15). It is a 15-pin female connector SUB-D type.
The connections must be wired using a 15-pin male SUB-D connector supplied with the unit.
It includes the locking screws and the cover for a good shielding connection.
To comply with insulation restrictions, non-allocated terminals must not be connected.
The multi-strand conductor section is as follows:
To be soldered: AWG 20 to 22 (0.324 to 0.519 mm²)
Allowable cable diameter: 8.2 mm maximum.
Cable-clamp reducers for maximum diameters of 4.1 mm, 5.5 mm and 6.8 mm are provided.
The cable shielding must be connected to the metal cover.
DIP5K/EN IN/A22 Installation

Page 24/36 DIP 5000

For digital teleprotection links, immunity to electromagnetic


disturbance is directly related to the proper connection of the cable
shield to the functional earth on both sides of the connection.
6.5.2 V11/X24 Interface Pin_Out - IR179

V11/X24 Interface
(ISO 4903)

1
9 T(B)
2 T(A)
10
3 R(B)
11
R(A)
4
12
5 S(B)
13
S(A)
6 S'(B)
14
7 S'(A)
15
8

S' : transmitter clock circuit


for non-standard use
D0607ENa

FIGURE 8 - V11/X24 INTERFACE PIN OUT

Pin Name direction Signal Pin Name Signal Designation


Designation
1 nc
2 T(A) out Transmit (A) 9 T(B) Transmit (B)
3 nc 10
4 R(A) in Receive (A) 11 R(B) Receive (B)
5 nc 12
6 S(A) in Signal timing (A) 13 S(B) Signal timing (B)
7 S'(A) out DCE mode 14 S'(B) DCE Mode timing (B)
Timing (A)
8 nc 15

TABLE 9 - V11/X24 INTERFACE CONNECTION


The S signal is a non-standard feature. Actually, the DIP 5000 is to be considered as a DTE.
The S' timing clock is provided so that one can make a direct link between two DIP 5000’s
for test purposes. Use of the S' signal is controlled through the HMI.
Installation DIP5K/EN IN/A22

DIP 5000 Page 25/36

6.5.3 G703-1 Codirectional Interface (64kbps) Pin Out - IR180

G703.1 Interface
codirectional

1
9 T(B)
2 T(A)
10
3 R(B)
11
R(A)
4
12
5
13
6
14
7
15
8

D0608ENa

FIGURE 9 - G703.1 INTERFACE PIN OUT

Pin Name direction Signal Pin Name Signal Designation


Designation
1 nc
2 T(A) out Transmit (A) 9 T(B) Transmit (B)
3 nc 10
4 R(A) in Receive (A) 11 R(B) Receive (B)
5 nc 12
6 nc 13
7 nc 14
8 nc 15

TABLE 10 - G703-1 CODIRECTIONAL INTERFACE CONNECTION


DIP5K/EN IN/A22 Installation

Page 26/36 DIP 5000

6.5.4 G703-6 Interface (2 Mbps) Pin Out - IR173

G703.6 Interface
2Mbit/s

1
9
2 Tx +
10
Tx -
3
11
4 Rx +
12
5 Rx -
13
6
14
7
15
8

D0609ENa

FIGURE 10 - G703.6 INTERFACE 2 MBIT/S

Pin Name direction Signal Pin Name Signal Designation


Designation
1 nc
2 nc 9
3 Tx + out Transmit (A) 10 Tx - Transmit (B)
4 nc 11
5 Rx + in Receive (A) 12 Rx - Receive (B)
6 nc 13
7 nc 14
8 nc 15

TABLE 11 - G703-6 INTERFACE CONNECTION


Installation DIP5K/EN IN/A22

DIP 5000 Page 27/36

6.5.5 Voice frequency interface (Analog mode) - IR183

Analog Interface

1
9 Tx(B)
2 Tx(A)
10 TBB(B)
3 TBB(A)
11 Rx(B)
4 Rx(A)
12 RB(B)
5 RB(A)
13 EA(B)
6 EA(A)
14 AL(B)
7 AL(A)
15
8

D0610ENa

FIGURE 11 - ANALOG INTERFACE PIN OUT

Pin Name direction Pin Name Circuit designation and description


1
2 Tx(A) out 9 Tx(B) Voice frequency signal out (transmit)
3 TBB(A) out 10 TBB(B) Tx Blocking / Boost command circuit (solid-
state relay)
4 Rx(A) in 11 Rx(B) Voice frequency signal in (receive)
5 RB(A) out 12 RB(B) Rx Blocking command circuit (solid-state
relay)
6 EA(+) in 13 EA(-) External Alarm input (opto-isolated)
7 AL(A) out 14 AL(B) Live output circuit (solid-state relay)
8 nc 15

TABLE 12 - VOICE FREQUENCY INTERFACE CONNECTION


6.6 Optical Fibre access port
In the case of an optical fibre configuration, the optical interface board, installed in the
reserved location of the rack, must be affixed to the back panel with its two attachment
screws.
Two optical boards version are supported: IR182 and IR185.
The optical interface connectors, accessible from the back of the rack (see Figure 15), are a
part of the optical board:

• 2 FC/PC connectors for IR182,

• ST connectors for IR185.

EMC protection
When not used, the rack connector must be covered with an EMC protection
plate.

OPTICAL BOARD REMOVAL


DO NOT TRY TO REMOVE THE OPTICAL BOARDS WITHOUT REMOVING
THE TWO BACK PANEL ATTACHMENT SCREWS.
DIP5K/EN IN/A22 Installation

Page 28/36 DIP 5000

6.7 HMI access port (PC connection)


The DIP 5000 is equipped with two RS 232 serial ports, one located on the front panel, the
second on the back of the unit (see Appendix- Figure 13).
The front panel mounted monitor/download port is an Extra-Low Voltage (ELV) circuit
which provides basic insulation against electric shock. When the relay is energised,
the terminals of this port should not be touched since in the unlikely event of a single
fault condition there would be a very low probability of an electric shock. This port is
designed to be used for maintenance purposes, that is monitoring and software
downloads; it is not intended to be permanently connected.
The connectors are 9-pin SUB-D female connectors.
These ports allow a PC to be connected to the unit using a RS 232C cable. When both ports
are connected the one the on front panel has priority.

0V Rx
DTR Tx

5 4 3 2 1

9 8 7 6

DSR
D0618ENa

FIGURE 12 - DESCRIPTION OF THE HMI CONNECTOR ON THE FRONT PANEL


When using the back panel RS 232 motherboard connector, a DTE-DCE type adapter must
be plugged in. This port supports the RTS/CTS hardware protocol, and remote connection
through a supervision network (TMS5000).

0V Tx
DTR Rx

5 4 3 2 1

9 8 7 6

CTS DSR
RTS
D0619ENa

FIGURE 13 - DESCRIPTION OF THE HMI CONNECTOR ON THE REAR PANEL


CAP
When not used, the connectors must be covered with the cap provided.

6.8 IRIG-B interface port


If an IRIG_B interface optional board is installed, this port is used for connection to an
external clock source supporting an IRIG-B synchronization interface (IRIG-B mode with
analog 1 kHz modulation).
The connector, located on the unit’s rear, is a standard female BNC connector (see P20 in
Appendix - Figure 15). It is accessible with a male connector of a standard BNC coaxial
cable.
CAPS
When not used, the connector must be covered with the BNC cap provided
with the unit.
Installation DIP5K/EN IN/A22

DIP 5000 Page 29/36

6.9 FI002 Wiring


To assure enhanced protection against capacitive discharge at the inputs, a FI002 board can
be installed.
The commands input must be connected to the P13 connector. The P10 and P12 connectors
must be interconnected (see the following figure).

1 10

P11

Command Outputs access

P10

P12

FI002 filter wiring

P13

+ + + +
Cmd 1
Cmd 2

Cmd 3

Command inputs Cmd 4

D0489ENa

FIGURE 14 - COMMANDS INPUTS AND FILTER WIRING


DIP5K/EN IN/A22 Installation

Page 30/36 DIP 5000

7. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Installation of the unit includes the following steps:
1. Install casing (rack, cabinet, or box).
2. Insert cables for subsystems and operation (power supply, earthing, transmission
medium, and protection equipment).
3. Mount rack in casing. Fasten in place using the screws on the front panel.
4. Connect rack to earth circuit.
5. Before installing the cards in the racks, make sure apparatus is switched off (plugs
removed or switch open).
6. Install cards in rack.
NOTE: The optical interface card must be mounted and tied to the rack before
mounting the rack in the frame.
Installation DIP5K/EN IN/A22

DIP 5000 Page 31/36

8. APPENDIX
8.1 Terminal block location

P14 P11
P16 Tx 1 1
1

Rx P10
P15
P17 Optical Fiber 1
P12
- BAT 1
- BAT Access P20
+BAT P19
+BAT P13
1

P18

D0058ENa

FIGURE 15 - LOCATION OF CONNECTIONS ON THE REAR SIDE

Command input and output terminals


P10 Command inputs
P11 Command outputs
P12 Command inputs Connection terminal blocks for protection and
command management systems.
P13 Command outputs (§ 6.2 and § 6.3)
P14 Command copy contacts
P15 Command copy contacts

TABLE 13 - COMMAND MANAGEMENT CONNECTORS

Ancillary terminal blocks


P16 Connection terminals to the alarm management systems (§ 6.3)
P17 Power supply connection terminals (§ 6.4)
P18 Line connection port (§ 6.5)
P19 Supervision network connection port (§ 6.7)
P20 External clock synchronization connection port (§ 6.8)

TABLE 14 - OTHER REAR PANEL CONNECTORS


DIP5K/EN IN/A22 Installation

Page 32/36 DIP 5000

8.2 Terminal block location dual power supply version

P14 P11
P16 Tx 1 1
1

Rx P10
P15
AUX MAIN P12
Optical Fiber 1
1
- BAT
Access P20
- BAT
+BAT P19
+BAT P13
1

P18

D0492ENb

FIGURE 16 - REAR CONNECTIONS

Command input and output terminals


P10 Command inputs
P11 Command outputs
P12 Command inputs Connection terminal blocks for protection and
command management systems.
P13 Command outputs (§ 6.2and § 6.3)
P14 Command output Copies
P15 Command output Copies

TABLE 15 - COMMAND MANAGEMENT CONNECTORS

Ancillary terminal blocks


P16 Connection terminals to the alarm management systems (§ 6.3)
MAIN Main Power supply connection terminals (§ 6.4)
AUX Secondary power supply connection terminals
P18 Line connection ports (§ 6.5)
P19 Supervision network connection ports (§ 6.7)
P20 External clock synchronization connection port (§ 6.8)

TABLE 16 - OTHER REAR PANEL CONNECTORS


Installation DIP5K/EN IN/A22

DIP 5000 Page 33/36

8.3 2 commands version connections

Command 1 Acquisition Copy

Command 2 Aquisition Copy

Command 1 Output Copy


Command 1 Command 2
Command 2 Output Copy Restitution Restitution
OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4

{
P14 P11

Group 1 Group 2

Group 1 Copy Common

Group 2 Copy Common - + - + - + - +


P10

{
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4
Command 1 Command 2
Acquisition Acquisition
D0059ENa

FIGURE 17 - TWO COMMANDS VERSION CONNECTIONS


8.4 4 commands - 1 I/O board version – connections

Command 1 Acquisition Copy


Command 2 Acquisition Copy
Command 3 Acquisition Copy
Command 4 Acquisition Copy
Command 1 Output Copy
Command 2 Output Copy
Command 1 Command 2 Command 3 Command 4
Command 3 Output Copy Restitution Restitution Restitution Restitution
Command 4 Output Copy
OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4
{

{
P14 P11
Common of Command
Acquisition Copy
Common of Command
Output Copy

P10 - + - + - + - +
{

{
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4
Command 1 Command 2 Command 3 Command 4
Acquisition Acquisition Acquisition Acquisition
D0060ENa

FIGURE 18 - FOUR COMMANDS VERSION CONNECTIONS - 1 I/O BOARD


DIP5K/EN IN/A22 Installation

Page 34/36 DIP 5000

8.5 4 commands - 2 I/O boards version – connections

Command 1 Acquisition Copy

Command 2 Acquisition Copy

Command 1 Output Copy


Command 1 Command 2
Command 2 Output Copy Restitution Restitution
OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4

{
P14 P11

Group 1 Group 2
Command 1 Command 2
Group 1 Copy Common
Acquisition Acquisition
Group 2 Copy Common
Group 3 Copy Common IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

{
Group 4 Copy Common
Group 3 Group 4 P10 - + - + - + - +

P15
P12 - + - + - + - +

{
Command 4 Output Copy IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8
Command 3 Command 4
Command 3 Output Copy Acquisition Acquisition

Command 4 Acquisition Copy

Command 3 Acquisition Copy


P13

{
OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8
Command 3 Command 4
Restitution Restitution
D0061ENa

FIGURE 19 - FOUR COMMANDS VERSION CONNECTIONS - 2 I/O BOARD


8.6 8 commands connections

Command 1 Acquisition Copy


Command 2 Acquisition Copy
Command 3 Acquisition Copy
Command 4 Acquisition Copy
Command 1 Output Copy
Command 2 Output Copy
Command 1 Command 2 Command 3 Command 4
Command 3 Output Copy
Restitution Restitution Restitution Restitution
Command 4 Output Copy
OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4
{

P14 P11

Group 1 Group 2
Command 1 Command 2 Command 3 Command 4
Group 1 Copy Common Acquisition Acquisition Acquisition Acquisition
Group 2 Copy Common
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4
Group 4 Copy Common
{

Group 3 Copy Common


Group 3 Group 4 P10 - + - + - + - +

P15
P12 - + - + - + - +
{

IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8


Command 8 Output Copy Command 5 Command 6 Command 7 Command 8
Command 7 Output Copy Acquisition Acquisition Acquisition Acquisition
Command 6 Output Copy
Command 5 Output Copy
Command 8 Acquisition Copy
Command 7 Acquisition Copy P13
Command 6 Acquisition Copy
Command 5 Acquisition Copy
{

OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8


Command 5 Command 6 Command 7 Command 8
Restitution Restitution Restitution Restitution
D0062ENa

FIGURE 20 - EIGHT COMMANDS VERSION CONNECTIONS


Installation DIP5K/EN IN/A22

DIP 5000 Page 35/36

8.7 Selecting type of configuration

ACQUISITION
Input Selection

Input 1
SIMPLE MODE
MMI Choice
Input 2

See Terminal Block P10

ACQUISITION

OR Function
Input 1+ Input 2
COMBINED MODE

Input 1 . Input 2 AND Function

LOG Function

Function Selection

MMI Choice

D0063ENb

*Digital mode only


DIP5K/EN IN/A22 Installation

Page 36/36 DIP 5000

BLANK PAGE
Commissioning DIP5K/EN CM/A22

DIP 5000

COMMISSIONING
Commissioning DIP5K/EN CM/A22

DIP 5000 Page 1/42

CONTENTS

1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 7

2. FOREWORD 8
2.1 Step by Step procedure 8
2.1.1 Reminder of Installation procedure final status 8

3. CHECKING PREREQUISITES 9

4. CONFIGURING HARDWARE 10
4.1 Initial Status 10
4.2 Configuring Input/Output board jumpers 10
4.3 Configuring the IR185 Optical Communication interface (if used) 11
4.4 Final Status 11

5. POWERING UP 12
5.1 Powering up initial step 12
5.2 Prerequisite 12
5.3 Powering up procedure 12
5.4 Powering up step final status 12

6. CONFIGURING SOFTWARE 13
6.1 Introduction 13
6.2 Prerequisite 13
6.3 Initial status 13
6.4 Configuring DIP 5000 DIGITAL 13
6.4.1 Creating User Password(s) 13
6.4.2 Configuring General Parameters 14
6.4.3 Configuring Input/Ouput Parameters 14
6.4.4 Configuring Application Parameters 15
6.4.5 Configuring Alarms Parameters 16
6.4.6 Entering Comments 17
6.4.7 Configuring Backup Interface 17
6.4.8 Saving the Configuration 17
6.5 Configuring DIP 5000 Analog Single tone 17
6.5.1 Creating User Password 18
6.5.2 Configuring General Parameters 18
6.5.3 Configuring Sender Parameters 19
6.5.4 Configuring Receiver Parameters 20
6.5.5 Configuring Input/Output Parameters 22
6.5.6 Alarm Parameters Single Tone 23
DIP5K/EN CM/A22 Commissioning

Page 2/42 DIP 5000

6.5.7 Saving the Configuration 23


6.6 Configuring DIP 5000 Analog Dual Tone 23
6.6.1 Creating password 24
6.6.2 Configuring General Parameters Dual Tone 24
6.6.3 Configuring Sender Parameters Dual Tone 25
6.6.4 Configuring Receiver Parameters Dual Tone 26
6.6.5 Configuring Input/Output Parameters Dual Tone 28
6.6.6 Configuring Alarm Parameters Dual Tone 29
6.6.7 Saving the Configuration 29
6.7 Final Configuration Step Status 29

7. TESTING AND FAULT ISOLATION 30


7.1 Initial Status 30
7.2 Checking Procedure 30
7.3 Final Status 31

8. OPERATIONAL CHECKS 32
8.1 Initial Status 32
8.2 Procedure 32
8.3 Standalone Checks 33
8.3.1 Forcing alarms 33
8.3.2 Maintenance Forcing commands 33
8.3.3 PLC forcing commands 33
8.4 Final status 33
8.5 In line Checks 33
8.6 Final Status 33

9. APPENDIX A 34
9.1 UT148 card layout 34
9.2 SR11x card layout and jumper settings 35
9.3 AL137 card layout 36
9.4 AL139 card layout 36
9.5 IR183 card layout 37
9.6 IR184 card layout 38
9.7 FI002 card layout and jumpers settings 39
9.7.1 FI002 board layout 39
9.8 IR-185 BOARD 40
Commissioning DIP5K/EN CM/A22

DIP 5000 Page 3/42

LIST OF FIGURES

FIGURE 1 - COMMISSIONING PROCEDURE 8


FIGURE 2 - SR11X BOARD JUMPERS 10
FIGURE 3 - POWERING UP PROCEDURE 12
FIGURE 4 - TESTING AND FAULT ISOLATION 31
FIGURE 5 - FINAL CHECKS AND CONFIGURATION 32

LIST OF TABLES

TABLE 1 - INPUT OUTPUT BOARD JUMPER CONFIGURATION 10


TABLE 2 - SR11X JUMPERS 10
TABLE 3 - IR 185 ROTARY SWITCH SETTINGS 11
TABLE 4 - GENERAL PARAMETERS SHEET DIGITAL 14
TABLE 5 - INPUT/OUTPUT PARAMETER SHEET DIGITAL 15
TABLE 6 - APPLICATION PARAMETERS SHEET DIGITAL 16
TABLE 7 - ALARM PARAMETERS SHEET DIGITAL 16
TABLE 8 - COMMENTS PARAMETER SHEET DIGITAL 17
TABLE 9 - BACKUP INTERFACE PARAMETER SHEET DIGITAL 17
TABLE 10 - GENERAL PARAMETER SHEET ANALOG SINGLE TONE 18
TABLE 11 - SENDER PARAMETER SHEET ANALOG SINGLE TONE 20
TABLE 12 - RECEIVER PARAMETER SHEET ANALOG SINGLE TONE 21
TABLE 13 - INPUT/OUTPUT PARAMETER SHEET ANALOG SINGLE TONE 22
TABLE 14 - ALARM PARAMETER SHEET ANALOG SINGLE TONE 23
TABLE 15 - GENERAL PARAMETER ANALOG DUAL TONE 24
TABLE 16 - SENDER PARAMETERS ANALOG DUAL TONE 26
TABLE 17 - RECEIVER PARAMETER ANALOG DUAL TONE 27
TABLE 18 - INPUT/OUPUT PARAMETER DUAL TONE SHEET 28
TABLE 19 - ALARM PARAMETERS ANALOG DUAL TONE 29
DIP5K/EN CM/A22 Commissioning

Page 4/42 DIP 5000

BLANK PAGE
Commissioning DIP5K/EN CM/A22

DIP 5000 Page 5/42

MODIFICATIONS PAGE

VERSION DATE COMMENTS


A11 12/28/2000 ORIGINAL ISSUE
B11 04/23/2001 ADDITION OF OPTICAL INTERFACE
C11 08/23/2004 AREVA LOGO AND ADDITION OF ANALOGUE
VERSION
D11 11/14/2007 NEW FEATURES, NEW STRUCTURE. TASK
ORIENTED WRITING
E11 02/29/2008 MINOR CORRECTION
A22 08/14/2008 PACKAGE RELEASE 2.2
DIP5K/EN CM/A22 Commissioning

Page 6/42 DIP 5000

BLANK PAGE
Commissioning DIP5K/EN CM/A22

DIP 5000 Page 7/42

1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER
SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY
SECTION DIP5K/EN SS/A11 OR LATER ISSUE, THE TECHNICAL DATA
SECTION AND THE RATING ON THE EQUIMENT RATING LABEL.

THE FRONT PANEL MOUNTED MONITOR DOWNLOAD PORT IS AN


EXTRA-LOW VOLTAGE (ELV) CIRCUIT WHICH PROVIDES BASIC
INSULATION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK. WHEN THE RELAY IS
ENERGISED, THE TERMINALS OF THIS PORT SHOULD NOT BE
TOUCHED SINCE IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF A SINGLE FAULT
CONDITION THERE WOULD BE A VERY LOW PROBABILITY OF AN
ELECTRIC SHOCK. THIS PORT IS DESIGNED TO BE USED FOR
MAINTENANCE PURPOSES, THAT IS MONITORING AND SOFTWARE
DOWNLOADS, IT IS NOT INTENDED TO BE PERMANENTLY
CONNECTED.
DIP5K/EN CM/A22 Commissioning

Page 8/42 DIP 5000

2. FOREWORD
DIP 5000 teleprotection commissioning is performed following the Step by Step
commissioning procedure described in the following paragraphs.
Rigorously following these procedures will prevent malfunctions and damage to the
equipment.
Proceeding in this manner guarantees optimal link configuration, and better performance in
the minimum time in compliance with security rules.
Commissioning procedures and checks requires the user to be familiar with Human-Machine
Interface software use, refer to the Human-Machine Interface Chapter for complementary
information.
Only a PC supporting the Human Machine Interface software is needed to perform
commissioning, no other measuring device or multimeter is required.
2.1 Step by Step procedure
2.1.1 Reminder of Installation procedure final status
The initial step of the commissioning procedure corresponds to the final status of the
Installation procedure:

• The DIP 5000 is earth connected,

• Boards are installed,

• Power supply, transmission medium cables connected.


Commissioning a DIP 5000 is performed following steps:

Start

Checking Prerequisite

Configuring Hardware

Powering up

Configuring Software

Testing and fault


isolation

Operational Checks

End
D0611ENa

FIGURE 1 - COMMISSIONING PROCEDURE


Commissioning DIP5K/EN CM/A22

DIP 5000 Page 9/42

3. CHECKING PREREQUISITES
Before Commissioning the following points MUST be checked:

• Installation is complete,

• Installed DIP 5000 must be earth grounded (see § Connection in Installation chapter),

• DIP 5000 input DC power supply value,

• Terminal block Power Supply connection (see § Power supply wiring in Installation
Chapter),

• Compliance of the power supply board with the available DC input voltage (see
§ Power Supply Boards VDC range values in Installation Chapter),

• Command input polarity applied to the P10 and P12 connectors.

• Pins 1 and 2 of connectors P10, P11, P12, and P13 must be connected with a jumper
(See § Terminal Block Input/Output Wiring in Installation Chapter), otherwise an alarm
is set.

• Prerequisite about qualification: Only authorized and trained technicians can carry out
installing, programming, commissioning, maintenance, testing, and repair.

• Be careful:

Warning labels: precaution and indications of hazardous voltages and hazardous energy
level must be strictly observed.
DIP5K/EN CM/A22 Commissioning

Page 10/42 DIP 5000

4. CONFIGURING HARDWARE
4.1 Initial Status
Prerequisites have been checked.
No changes should be made to the link positions unless the supply input voltage
has been isolated.
4.2 Configuring Input/Output board jumpers
In this step you have to work on Boards. Security reminder:

ESD protection: the modules in this equipment contain devices which can be damaged by
electrostatic discharges. Appropriate measures must be taken before unpacking modules or
withdrawing them from equipment racks. Essential precautions to prevent ESD damage
when handling or working on modules are grounding straps for technical personnel and the
provision of anti-static workbenches. Modules may only be shipped either in their original
packing or installed in equipment racks.
Input/output boards SR11x are equipped with jumpers S2 S3 S4 S5.
S5

S4

S3

S2
3
2
1

3
2
1

3
2
1

3
2
1

D0127XXa

FIGURE 2 - SR11X BOARD JUMPERS

Jumpers on Input/output boards SR11x must be configured according to the DC value of the
input command.
The following table gives the correspondence between input commands and Input/Output
SR 11x board location in the rack for a two board installation.

S2 S3 S4 S5
SR11x Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4
Top position in the rack
SR11x Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8
Bottom position in the rack

TABLE 1 - INPUT OUTPUT BOARD JUMPER CONFIGURATION


Using the following table, configure each jumper in compliance with the input command DC
value applied to it (each jumper being associated with an input command):

Position SR114 SR115 SR116


1-2 220V –250V 48V-60V 110V-127V
2-3 48V -127V 24V 48V-60V

TABLE 2 - SR11X JUMPERS

Refer to SR11x layout (see Appendix A).


Commissioning DIP5K/EN CM/A22

DIP 5000 Page 11/42

4.3 Configuring the IR185 Optical Communication interface (if used)


Security Reminder

Laser/LED: take care using optical cards IR182/IR185, class I Laser/LED product.
The IR185 Optical Communication interface has a rotary switch to be set in compliance with
the DIP 5000 frequency clocks.
Select rotary switch position using the following table

Rotary switch position DIP 5000 frequency


0 Optical power measurement
1 64 Khz
2 128 Khz
3 192 Khz
4 256 Khz
5 320 Khz
6 384 Khz
7 448 Khz
8 512 Khz
9 Not used

TABLE 3 - IR 185 ROTARY SWITCH SETTINGS


4.4 Final Status
Input/output board’s hardware configuration is compatible with input signal command DC
value.
If used, the IR 185 Optical Communication interface is configured and ready to be used.
DIP5K/EN CM/A22 Commissioning

Page 12/42 DIP 5000

5. POWERING UP
5.1 Powering up initial step

• Prerequisites have been checked,

• Hardware configuration is performed.


5.2 Prerequisite
This procedure requires knowledge about information on switch location and LEDs’ status
indicators.

• For more information about boards’ Switch and LEDs location see Appendix A.

• For more information about LEDs’ status indicators see § Maintenance in the
Maintenance chapter.
5.3 Powering up procedure
Power up the DIP 5000 applying the following procedure:

Start

Switch ON
(AL13x/AL14x cards)

Check LED status:


Are the AL13x/AL14x
power LED green ?

? No

Yes

Check LED status:


Are the "STATUS"
indicator lights on
the UT148 green ?

? No

Yes
Repair
(see § Testing
and Fault
Isolation)

End

D0612ENa

FIGURE 3 - POWERING UP PROCEDURE

Once the DIP 5000 is powered, check the LEDs’ correct status, they must be green.

• In case a LED indicates a fault, see the § Testing and fault isolation in Maintenance
chapter.
5.4 Powering up step final status
At the end of the Powering up step the DIP 5000 is powered up and ready to receive the
configuration files.
Commissioning DIP5K/EN CM/A22

DIP 5000 Page 13/42

6. CONFIGURING SOFTWARE
6.1 Introduction
DIP 5000 DIGITAL, DIP 5000 ANALOG Single tone, DIP 5000 ANALOG Dual Tone software
configurations are independently described in the following paragraphs
Depending of your DIP 5000 version DIGITAL or ANALOG, refer to the appropriate
paragraphs below.
6.2 Prerequisite
The DIP 5000 software configuration requires a PC equipped with an H version compatible
with your DIP 5000 firmware.
Configuring requires the user to be familiar with the use of the Human Machine interface
Software.
6.3 Initial status
DIP 5000 is powered on.
Security Reminder

Using HMI DIP 5000: teleprotection link gets disturbed while using certain functions offered
by the HMI DIP 5000 for maintenance (e.g. forcing commands).
6.4 Configuring DIP 5000 DIGITAL
For more details about DIP 5000 DIGITAL configuration procedures,refer to the HUMAN
MACHINE INTERFACE DIP 5000 DIGITAL CHAPTER. To each procedure step there is a
corresponding paragraph in the HMI chapter.
The configuration procedure is the following:

• Creating User password(s),

• Configuring General parameters,

• Configuring Input/Output parameters,

• Configuring Application parameters,

• Configuring Alarm parameters,

• Entering Comment Parameters,

• Configuring backup interface (optional),

• Saving the configuration.


6.4.1 Creating User Password(s)
Access to the DIP 5000 configuration parameters is password protected according to
different levels. The level granted to a user is password dependent. You must first create
user passwords and the associated levels.
To create user password see the § DIP 5000 Security Password Management/ Creating
User Password in the HMI DIP 5000 DIGITAL CHAPTER.
DIP5K/EN CM/A22 Commissioning

Page 14/42 DIP 5000

6.4.2 Configuring General Parameters


See § Configuring General Parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE DIP 5000
DIGITAL CHAPTER for more details (parameter description and value range).
Configure parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:
Greyed lines correspond to minimum mandatory parameter configuration.

Parameter/HMI § Configuring General Parameter Value


parameters
Configuration ˆ 2 Commands ˆ 4 Commands
ˆ 8 Commands
IRIG-B ˆ On ˆ Off
HMI Speed ˆ 19200 bit/s ˆ 4800 bit/s
ˆ 2400 bit/s ˆ 1200 bit/s
ˆ 600 bit/s
Logical address 0 to 127

TABLE 4 - GENERAL PARAMETERS SHEET DIGITAL


6.4.3 Configuring Input/Ouput Parameters
See § Configuring Input/Output Parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE DIP
5000 DIGITAL CHAPTER for more details.
Configure parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:

Parameter/HMI § Parameter Value


Configuring Input/Output
Input/output ˆ 1 board ˆ 2 boards
Input Filter and logic/Input
Filter Command 1 ..../...../...../.... 1 to 100 ms
Input Filter and logic/Input
Filter Command 2 ..../...../...../.... 1 to 100 ms
Input Filter and logic/Input
Filter Command 3 ..../...../...../.... 1 to 100 ms
Input Filter and logic/Input
Filter Command 4 ..../...../...../.... 1 to 100 ms
Input Filter and logic/Input
Filter Command 5 ..../...../...../.... 1 to 100 ms
Input Filter and logic/Input
Filter Command 6 ..../...../...../.... 1 to 100 ms
Input Filter and logic/Input
Filter Command 7 ..../...../...../.... 1 to 100 ms
Input Filter and logic/Input
Filter Command 8 ..../...../...../.... 1 to 100 ms
Input Filter and logic/Reverse
Logic Command 1 ˆ1
Input Filter and logic/Reverse
Logic Command 1 ˆ2
Input Filter and logic/Reverse
Logic Command 1 ˆ3
Commissioning DIP5K/EN CM/A22

DIP 5000 Page 15/42

Parameter/HMI § Parameter Value


Configuring Input/Output
Input Filter and logic/Reverse
Logic Command 1 ˆ4
Input Filter and logic/Reverse
Logic Command 1 ˆ5
Input Filter and logic/Reverse
Logic Command 1 ˆ6
Input Filter and logic/Reverse
Logic Command 1 ˆ7
Input Filter and logic/Reverse
Logic Command 1 ˆ8
Input logic Command 1 ˆ E1
ˆ E2
ˆ E1 or E2
ˆ E1 and E2
Input logic Command 2 ˆ E3
ˆ E4
ˆ E3 or E4
ˆ E3 and E4
Input logic Command 3 ˆ E5
ˆ E6
ˆ E5 or E6
ˆ E5 and E6
Input logic Command 4 ˆ E7
ˆ E8
ˆ E7 or E8
ˆ E7 and E8

TABLE 5 - INPUT/OUTPUT PARAMETER SHEET DIGITAL


6.4.4 Configuring Application Parameters
See § Configuring Application parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE DIP 5000
DIGITAL CHAPTER for more details.
Configure parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:

Parameter/HMI § Configuring Parameter Value


Application Parameters
Holding Delay Transmission ˆ 1 ..../...../...../.... 20 to 250 ms
Holding Delay Transmission ˆ 2 ..../...../...../.... 20 to 250 ms
Holding Delay Transmission ˆ 3 ..../...../...../.... 20 to 250 ms
Holding Delay Transmission ˆ 4 ..../...../...../.... 20 to 250 ms
Holding Delay Transmission ˆ 5 ..../...../...../.... 20 to 250 ms
Holding Delay Transmission ˆ 6 ..../...../...../.... 20 to 250 ms
Holding Delay Transmission ˆ 7 ..../...../...../.... 20 to 250 ms
DIP5K/EN CM/A22 Commissioning

Page 16/42 DIP 5000

Parameter/HMI § Configuring Parameter Value


Application Parameters
Holding Delay Transmission ˆ 8 ..../...../...../.... 20 to 250 ms
Holding Delay Command Outputs ˆ 1 ..../...../...../.... 1 to 3000 ms
Holding Delay Command Outputs ˆ 2 ..../...../...../.... 1 to 3000 ms
Holding Delay Command Outputs ˆ 3 ..../...../...../.... 1 to 3000 ms
Holding Delay Command Outputs ˆ 4 ..../...../...../.... 1 to 3000 ms
Holding Delay Command Outputs ˆ 5 ..../...../...../.... 1 to 3000 ms
Holding Delay Command Outputs ˆ 6 ..../...../...../.... 1 to 3000 ms
Holding Delay Command Outputs ˆ 7 ..../...../...../.... 1 to 3000 ms
Holding Delay Command Outputs ˆ 8 ..../...../...../.... 1 to 3000 ms
Teleprotection Scheme Cmd 1/2 ˆ Permissive ˆ Blocking ˆ Direct Tripping
Teleprotection Scheme Cmd 3/4 ˆ Permissive ˆ Blocking ˆ Direct Tripping
Teleprotection Scheme Cmd 5/6 ˆ Permissive ˆ Blocking ˆ Direct Tripping
Teleprotection Scheme Cmd 7/8 ˆ Permissive ˆ Blocking ˆ Direct Tripping

TABLE 6 - APPLICATION PARAMETERS SHEET DIGITAL


6.4.5 Configuring Alarms Parameters
See § Configuring the Alarms parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE DIP 5000
DIGITAL CHAPTER for more details.
Configure parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:

Parameter/HMI § Configuring Alarm Parameter Value


Parameters
Bit Error Rate Threshold Minor ˆ 1. 00E –6 ˆ 1. 00E 5 ˆ1.00E-4 ˆ 1.00 E-3
Bit Error Rate Threshold Major ˆ 1. 00E –1 ˆ 1. 00E –2 ˆ1.00E-3
Alarm Time Overrunning input ˆ On ˆ Minor ˆ Major
...../...../...../..... 1 to 30 s
Alarm Transmission Time ˆ On ˆ Minor ˆ Major
...../...../...../..... 1 to 20 s
Relay Command Delay Major Alarm 1 ˆ 0 sec ˆ 2.5 sec ˆ 5 se ˆ 10 sec
Relay Command Delay Major Alarm 2 ˆ 0 sec ˆ 2.5 sec ˆ 5 sec ˆ 10 sec
Relay Command Delay Minor Alarm 1 ˆ 0 sec ˆ 2.5 sec ˆ 5 sec ˆ 10 sec
Relay Command Delay Minor Alarm 2 ˆ 0 sec ˆ 2.5 sec ˆ 5 sec ˆ 10 sec

TABLE 7 - ALARM PARAMETERS SHEET DIGITAL


Commissioning DIP5K/EN CM/A22

DIP 5000 Page 17/42

6.4.6 Entering Comments


See § Entering comment in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE DIP 5000 DIGITAL
CHAPTER for more details.
Configure parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:

Parameter/HMI § Entering Parameter Value


Comment
Name of the local station ..../...../...../...
Name of the remote en station ..../...../...../...
Comments user ..../...../...../...

TABLE 8 - COMMENTS PARAMETER SHEET DIGITAL


6.4.7 Configuring Backup Interface
In case of installed backup interface, backup interface parameters must be configured.
See § Configuring backup interface in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE DIP 5000
DIGITAL CHAPTER for more details.
Configure parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:

Parameter/HMI Parameter Value Default value


§ Configuring backup
interface
Backup Interface ˆ IR180 G703-1 64 kbps
ˆ IR179 V11/X24 32 to 256 kbps
ˆ IR173 G703.6 2048 Kpbps
Backup Interface/ Clock ˆ Received ˆ Internal Internal
source
Time Delay Before ...../...../...../.... 5 to 100 ms 5 ms
Switching

TABLE 9 - BACKUP INTERFACE PARAMETER SHEET DIGITAL


6.4.8 Saving the Configuration
Save your configuration (see § Operating the Configuration Window in the HUMAN
MACHINE INTERFACE DIP 5000 Digital chapter).
6.5 Configuring DIP 5000 Analog Single tone
For DIP 5000 Analog Single tone configuration procedures refer to the HUMAN MACHINE
INTERFACE DIP 5000 ANALOG SINGLE TONE. Each procedure step has a corresponding
paragraph in the HMI chapter.
The configuration procedure is the following:

• Creating User password,

• Configuring General parameters,

• Configuring Sender parameters,

• Configuring Receiver parameters,

• Configuring Input/Output parameters,

• Configuring Alarm parameters,

• Saving the configuration.


DIP5K/EN CM/A22 Commissioning

Page 18/42 DIP 5000

6.5.1 Creating User Password


Access to the DIP 5000 configuration parameters is password protected according to
different levels. The level granted to a user is password dependent.
To create user passwords see the § DIP 5000 Security Password Management/Creating
User passwords in the HMI DIP 5000 ANALOG CHAPTER.
6.5.2 Configuring General Parameters
See § Configuring General Parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE DIP 5000
ANALOG SINGLE TONE CHAPTER for more details.
Configure parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:
Greyed lines correspond to minimum mandatory parameter configuration.

Parameter/HMI § Configuring General Parameter Value


parameters
Commands Number/§ Configuring ˆ 2 Commands ˆ 4 Commands
Commands number
IRIG-B ˆ On ˆ Off
Version Choice/§ Configuring Version ˆ Normal
ˆ Enhanced
HMI Speed/§ Configuring HMI Speed ˆ 19200 bit/s ˆ 4800 bit/s
ˆ 2400 bit/s ˆ 1200 bit/s
ˆ 600 bit/s
Comments/orce Station .../...../...../...
§ Entering Comments
Comments/Destination Station .../...../...../...
§ Entering Comments
Comments/Comments ../...../...../...
Daily or hourly test/§ Configuring Link Test ˆ Off
Test Time: HH and/or MN/§ Configuring ˆ Daily ˆ Hourly
Link Test
Logical address/§ Configuring logical 0 to 255
address

TABLE 10 - GENERAL PARAMETER SHEET ANALOG SINGLE TONE


Commissioning DIP5K/EN CM/A22

DIP 5000 Page 19/42

6.5.3 Configuring Sender Parameters


See § Configuring Sender Parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE DIP 5000
ANALOG SINGLE TONE CHAPTER.
Configure parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:

Parameter Name/HMI § Configuring Parameter Value


Sender Parameters
Sender LF Band Bandwidth ˆ 300-2000 Hz
ˆ 300-2400 Hz
§ Configuring Sender LF Band
ˆ 300-3400 Hz
Sender LF Band Guard ˆ 2240/3680 Hz
ˆ 2600 Hz
§ Configuring Sender LF Band
ˆ 3680 Hz
Guard source ˆ Internal
ˆ External
§ Configuring Guard source
Command 1 Input Valid Delay/ ...../...../...../..... 0 to 5ms
§ Configuring Command transmission
Parameters
Command 2 Input Valid ...../...../...../..... 0 to 5ms
Delay/§ Configuring Command
transmission Parameters
Command 3 Input Valid ...../...../...../..... 0 to 5ms
Delay/§ Configuring Command
transmission Parameters
Command 4 Input Valid ...../...../...../..... 0 to 5ms
Delay/§ Configuring Command
transmission Parameters
Command 1 Holding ...../...../...../.....0 to 500 ms
Delay/§ Configuring Command
transmission Parameters
Command 2 Holding ...../...../...../..... 0 to 500 ms
Delay/§ Configuring Command
transmission Parameters
Command 3 Holding ...../...../...../..... 0 to 500 ms
Delay/§ Configuring Command
transmission Parameters
Command 4 Holding ...../...../...../..... 0 to 500 ms
Delay/§ Configuring Command
transmission Parameters
Command 1 Protection Scheme ˆ Permissive ˆ Blocking ˆ Direct
type/§ Configuring Command
transmission Parameters
Command 2 Protection Scheme ˆ Permissive ˆ Blocking ˆ Direct
type/§ Configuring Command
transmission Parameters
Command 3 Protection Scheme ˆ Permissive ˆ Blocking ˆ Direct
type/§ Configuring Command
transmission Parameters
Command 4 Protection Scheme ˆ Permissive ˆ Blocking ˆ Direct
type/§ Configuring Command
transmission Parameters
DIP5K/EN CM/A22 Commissioning

Page 20/42 DIP 5000

Parameter Name/HMI § Configuring Parameter Value


Sender Parameters
Guard Transmission level/ ..../...../...../..... -30 to +6dBm dBm
§ Configuring Sender transmission
level
Frequency 1 Transmission ..../...../...../..... -30 to +6dBm dBm
level/§ Configuring Sender
transmission level
Frequency 2 Transmission ..../...../...../..... -30 to +6dBm dBm
level/§ Configuring Sender
transmission level
Frequency 1 Transmission ..../...../...../..... -30 to +6dBm dBm
level/Configuring Sender transmission
level
Frequency 2 Transmission ..../...../...../..... -30 to +6dBm dBm
level/Configuring Sender transmission
level

TABLE 11 - SENDER PARAMETER SHEET ANALOG SINGLE TONE


6.5.4 Configuring Receiver Parameters
See § Configuring Receiver Parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE DIP 5000
ANALOG SINGLE TONE CHAPTER.
Configure parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:

Parameter Name/HMI § Configuring Parameter values


Receiver Parameters
LF Band Bandwidth/§ Configuring LF band ˆ 300-2000 Hz
ˆ 300-2400 Hz
ˆ 300-3400 Hz
LF Band Guard/§ Configuring LF band ˆ 2100/2300 Hz
ˆ 2400/2600 Hz
ˆ 3500/3800 or 2100/2300 Hz
Receiver Input level Guard ..../...../...../.....- 40 to 0 dBm
Signal/§ Configuring Receiver Input level
Receiver Input level Command vs Guard ..../...../...../..... 0 to -6 dBm normal version
§ Configuring Receiver Input level ..../...../...../..... 0 to -16 dBm enhanced version
Command 1 Holding Delay/§ Configuring ..../...../...../..... 0 to 3000 ms
Receiver Holding Delay
Command 2 Holding Delay/§ Configuring ..../...../...../..... 0 to 3000 ms
Receiver Holding Delay
Command 3 Holding Delay/§ Configuring ..../...../...../..... 0 to 3000 ms
Receiver Holding Delay
Command 4 Holding Delay/§ Configuring ..../...../...../..... 0 to 3000 ms
Receiver Holding Delay
Command 1 Relay State on ˆ Idle State ˆ Former State
AI/§ Configuring Relay State on AI
Command 2 Relay State on ˆ Idle State ˆ Former State
AI/§ Configuring Relay State on AI
Command 3 Relay State on ˆ Idle State ˆ Former State
AI/§ Configuring Relay State on AI
Commissioning DIP5K/EN CM/A22

DIP 5000 Page 21/42

Parameter Name/HMI § Configuring Parameter values


Receiver Parameters
Command 4 Relay State on ˆ Idle State ˆ Former State
AI/§ Configuring Relay State on AI
Command 1 Protection Scheme/ ˆ Permissive ˆ Blocking ˆ Direct
§ Configuring protection schemes
Command 2 Protection ˆ Permissive ˆ Blocking ˆ Direct
Scheme/§ Configuring protection schemes

Command 3 Protection ˆ Permissive ˆ Blocking ˆ Direct


Scheme/§ Configuring protection schemes

Command 4 Protection ˆ Permissive ˆ Blocking ˆ Direct


Scheme/§ Configuring protection schemes

Command 1 Unblocking/§ Configuring ˆ Unblocking


Unblocking Parameters
Command 2 Unblocking/§ Configuring ˆ Unblocking
Unblocking Parameters
Command 3 Unblocking/ § Configuring ˆ Unblocking
Unblocking Parameters
Command 4 Unblocking/ § Configuring ˆ Unblocking
Unblocking Parameters
Unblocking Threshold ..../...../...../..... -20 to -10 dB
§ Configuring Unblocking Parameters
Unlocking Delay ..../...../...../..... 5 to 80 ms
§ Configuring Unblocking Parameters

TABLE 12 - RECEIVER PARAMETER SHEET ANALOG SINGLE TONE


DIP5K/EN CM/A22 Commissioning

Page 22/42 DIP 5000

6.5.5 Configuring Input/Output Parameters


See § Configuring Input/Output Parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE DIP
5000 ANALOG SINGLE TONE CHAPTER for more details.
Configure parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:

Parameter/HMI § Configuring Parameter Value


Input/Output
Configuring I/O boards ˆ 1 board ˆ 2 boards
Command 1 Input Filter ..../...../...../..... 0 to 3 ms
Delay/§ Configuring Input Filter Delay
Command 2 Input Filter Delay/ . ..../...../...../..... 0 to 3 ms
Command 3 Input Filter ..../...../...../..... 0 to 3 ms
Delay/§ Configuring Input Filter Delay
Command 4 Input Filter ..../...../...../..... 0 to 3 ms
Delay/§ Configuring Input Filter Delay
Command 1 Combinatorial Logic on ˆ IN1 ˆ IN2 ˆ IN1 or IN2
Inputs/§ Configuring Combinatorial Logic
on Inputs
ˆ IN1 and IN2
Command 2 Combinatorial Logic on ˆ IN3 ˆ IN4 ˆ IN3 or IN4
Inputs/§ Configuring Combinatorial Logic
on Inputs
ˆ IN3 and IN4
Command 3 Combinatorial Logic on ˆ IN5 ˆ IN6 ˆ IN5 or IN6
Inputs/§ Configuring Combinatorial Logic
on Inputs
ˆ IN5 and IN6
Command 4 Combinatorial Logic on ˆ IN7 ˆ IN8 ˆ IN7 or IN8
Inputs/§ Configuring Combinatorial Logic
on Inputs
ˆ IN7 and IN8

TABLE 13 - INPUT/OUTPUT PARAMETER SHEET ANALOG SINGLE TONE


Commissioning DIP5K/EN CM/A22

DIP 5000 Page 23/42

6.5.6 Alarm Parameters Single Tone


See § Configuring Alarm Parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE DIP 5000
ANALOG SINGLE TONE CHAPTER for more details.
Configure parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:

Parameter Name/HMI § Configuring Parameter Value


Alarms Parmameters
Alarm on external Input/§ Configuring ˆ Alarm ˆ Minor ˆ Major
Alarm on external input
..../...../...../..... 0 to 2.5 ms
Loss of Signal Alarm Threshold ..../...../...../..... -16 to 6 dBr
§ Configuring Loss of Signal Alarm
Loss of Signal Alarm Delay ..../...../...../..... 1 to 10 seconds
§ Configuring Loss of Signal Alarm
Input Command Duration Alarm ˆ Alarm ˆ Minor ˆ Major
§ Configuring Input Command Duration
..../...../...../..... 0, 5 to 10 seconds
Alarm
Alarm Outputs Delay Major Alarm 1 Relay ˆ 0 seconds ˆ 2.5 seconds ˆ 5 seconds
§ Configuring Alarm Output Delay
ˆ 10 seconds
Alarm Outputs Delay Major Alarm 2 Relay ˆ 0 seconds ˆ 2.5 seconds ˆ 5 seconds
§ Configuring Alarm Output Delay
ˆ 10 seconds
Alarm Outputs Delay Minor Alarm 1 Relay ˆ 0 seconds ˆ 2.5 seconds ˆ 5 seconds
§ Configuring Alarm Output Delay
ˆ 10 seconds
Alarm Outputs Delay Minor Alarm 2 Relay ˆ 0 seconds ˆ 2.5 seconds ˆ 5 seconds
§ Configuring Alarm Output Delay
ˆ 10 seconds

TABLE 14 - ALARM PARAMETER SHEET ANALOG SINGLE TONE


6.5.7 Saving the Configuration
Save your configuration (see § Configuration File Menu the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE
DIP 5000 Analog Single Tone chapter).
6.6 Configuring DIP 5000 Analog Dual Tone
For DIP 5000 Analog Dual tone configuration procedures refer to the HUMAN MACHINE
INTERFACE DIP 5000 ANALOG DUAL TONE.
The configuration procedure is the following:

• Creating password,

• Configuring General parameters,

• Configuring Sender parameters,

• Configuring Receiver parameters,

• Configuring Input/Output parameters,

• Configuring Alarm parameters,

• Saving the configuration.


DIP5K/EN CM/A22 Commissioning

Page 24/42 DIP 5000

6.6.1 Creating password


Access to the DIP 5000 configuration parameters is password protected according to
different levels. The level granted to a user is password dependent. You must first create
user passwords and associated levels.
To create user passwords see the § DIP 5000 Security Password Management in the HMI
DIP 5000 ANALOG CHAPTER.
6.6.2 Configuring General Parameters Dual Tone
See § Configuring General Parameters in HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE DIP 5000
ANALOG DUAL TONE CHAPTER for more details.
Configure parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:

Parameter/HMI § Configuring General Parameter Value


parameters
IRIG-B ˆ On ˆ Off
HMI Speed/§ Configuring HMI Speed ˆ 19200 bit/s ˆ 9600 bit/s
ˆ 4800 bit/s ˆ 2400 bit/s
ˆ 1200 bit/s ˆ 600 bit/s
Comments/Source Station .../...../...../...
§ Entering Comments
Comments/Destination Station .../...../...../...
§ Entering Comments
Comments/Comments ../...../...../...
Daily or hourly test/§ Configuring Link Test ˆ Off
Test Time: HH and/or MN/§ Configuring ˆ Daily ˆ Hourly
Link Test
Limit event and alarms to 255 entries ˆ
Logical address/§ Configuring logical 0 to 255
address

TABLE 15 - GENERAL PARAMETER ANALOG DUAL TONE


Commissioning DIP5K/EN CM/A22

DIP 5000 Page 25/42

6.6.3 Configuring Sender Parameters Dual Tone


See § Configuring Sender Parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE DIP 5000
ANALOG DUAL TONE CHAPTER for more details.
Configure parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:

Parameter Name/HMI § Configuring Parameter Value


Sender Parameters
Sender LF Band Bandwidth ˆ 300-1900 Hz
ˆ 400-2000 Hz
§ Configuring Sender LF Band
ˆ 670-2260 Hz
ˆ 850 2450 Hz
ˆ 1040-2630 Hz
ˆ 1220-2810 Hz
ˆ 1400 -3000 Hz
ˆ 1590-3180 Hz
ˆ 2000-3600 Hz
Command 1 Input Valid ..... 0 to 5ms
Delay/§ Configuring Command
transmission Parameters
Command 2 Input Valid ..... 0 to 5ms
Delay/§ Configuring Command
transmission Parameters
Command 3 Input Valid ..... 0 to 5ms
Delay/§ Configuring Command
transmission Parameters
Command 4 Input Valid ...... 0 to 5ms
Delay/§ Configuring Command
transmission Parameters
Command 1 Holding Delay/§ Configuring .... 20 to 500 ms
Command transmission Parameters
Command 2 Holding Delay/§ Configuring ..... 20 to 500 ms
Command transmission Parameters
Command 3 Holding Delay/§ Configuring .... 20 to 500 ms
Command transmission Parameters
Command 4 Holding Delay/§ Configuring ..... 20 to 500 ms
Command transmission Parameters
Command 1 Protection Scheme ˆ Permissive ˆ Blocking ˆ Direct
type/§ Configuring Command
ˆ Enhanced Blocking
transmission Parameters
ˆ Enhanced Permissive
ˆ Enhanced Direct
Command 2 Protection Scheme ˆ Permissive ˆ Blocking ˆ Direct
type/§ Configuring Command
ˆ Enhanced Blocking
transmission Parameters
ˆ Enhanced Permissive
ˆ Enhanced Direct
Command 3 Protection Scheme ˆ Permissive ˆ Blocking ˆ Direct
type/§ Configuring Command
ˆ Enhanced Blocking
transmission Parameters
ˆ Enhanced Permissive
ˆ Enhanced Direct
DIP5K/EN CM/A22 Commissioning

Page 26/42 DIP 5000

Parameter Name/HMI § Configuring Parameter Value


Sender Parameters
Command 4 Protection Scheme ˆ Permissive ˆ Blocking ˆ Direct
type/§ Configuring Command
ˆ Enhanced Blocking
transmission Parameters
ˆ Enhanced Permissive
ˆ Enhanced Direct
Guard Transmission level/§ Configuring ..../...../...../.... . -30 to +6dBm (-20)dBm
Sender transmission level
Frequency 1 Transmission ..../...../...../..... -30 to +6dBm (-20) dBm
level/§ Configuring Sender transmission
level
Frequency 2 Transmission ..../...../...../..... -30 to +6dBm (-20) dBm
level/§ Configuring Sender transmission
level
Frequency 3 Transmission ..../...../...../..... -30 to +6dBm (-20) dBm
level/§ Configuring Sender transmission
level
Frequency 4 Transmission ..../...../...../..... -30 to +6dBm (-20) dBm
level/§ Configuring Sender transmission
level
Frequency 5 Transmission ..../...../...../..... -30 to +6dBm (-20) dBm
level/§ Configuring Sender transmission
level
Frequency 6 Transmission ..../...../...../..... -30 to +6dBm (-20) dBm
level/§ Configuring Sender transmission
level
Frequency 7 Transmission ..../...../...../..... -30 to +6dBm (-20) dBm
level/§ Configuring Sender transmission
level

TABLE 16 - SENDER PARAMETERS ANALOG DUAL TONE


6.6.4 Configuring Receiver Parameters Dual Tone
See § Configuring Receiver Parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE DIP 5000
ANALOG DUAL TONE CHAPTER for more details.
Configure parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:

Parameter Name/HMI § Configuring Parameter value


Receiver Parameters
LF Band Bandwidth/§ Configuring LF band ˆ 300-1900 Hz
ˆ 400-2000 Hz
ˆ 670-2260 Hz
ˆ 850-2450 Hz
ˆ 1040-2630 Hz
ˆ 1220-2810Hz
ˆ 1400- 3000Hz
ˆ 1590-3180 Hz
ˆ 2000-3600 Hz
Receiver Input level Guard ...../...../...../....- 40 to 0 dBm
Signal/§ Configuring Receiver Input level
Receiver Input level Command vs .../...../...../….. -6 to +6 dBm
Guard/§ Configuring Receiver Input level
Commissioning DIP5K/EN CM/A22

DIP 5000 Page 27/42

Parameter Name/HMI § Configuring Parameter value


Receiver Parameters
Command 1 Holding Delay/§ Configuring .../...../...../….. 0 to 3000 ms
Receiver Holding Delay
Command 2 Holding Delay/§ Configuring .../...../...../….. 0 to 3000 ms
Receiver Holding Delay
Command 3 Holding Delay/§ Configuring .../...../...../….. 0 to 3000 ms
Receiver Holding Delay
Command 4 Holding Delay/§ Configuring .../...../...../….. 0 to 3000 ms
Receiver Holding Delay
Command 1 Relay State on ˆ Idle State ˆ Former State
AI/§ Configuring Relay State on AI
Command 2 Relay State on ˆ Idle State ˆ Former State
AI/§ Configuring Relay State on AI
Command 3 Relay State on ˆ Idle State ˆ Former State
AI/§ Configuring Relay State on AI
Command 4 Relay State on ˆ Idle State ˆ Former State
AI/§ Configuring Relay State on AI
Command 1 Protection ˆ Permissive ˆ Blocking ˆ Direct
Scheme/§ Configuring protection schemes
ˆ Enhanced Blocking
ˆ Enhanced Permissive
ˆ Enhanced Direct
Command 1 Protection ˆ Permissive ˆ Blocking ˆ Direct
Scheme/§ Configuring protection schemes
ˆ Enhanced Blocking
ˆ Enhanced Permissive
ˆ Enhanced Direct
Command 1 Protection ˆ Permissive ˆ Blocking ˆ Direct
Scheme/§ Configuring protection schemes
ˆ Enhanced Blocking
ˆ Enhanced Permissive
ˆ Enhanced Direct
Command 1 Protection ˆ Permissive ˆ Blocking ˆ Direct
Scheme/§ Configuring protection schemes
ˆ Enhanced Blocking
ˆ Enhanced Permissive
ˆ Enhanced Direct
Command 1 Unblocking/§ Configuring ˆ Unblocking
Unblocking Parameters
Command 2 Unblocking/§ Configuring ˆ Unblocking
Unblocking Parameters
Command 3 Unblocking/§ Configuring ˆ Unblocking
Unblocking Parameters
Command 4 Unblocking/§ Configuring ˆ Unblocking
Unblocking Parameters
Unblocking Threshold/§ Configuring .../...../...../…..-20 to -10 dB
Unblocking Parameters
Unlocking Delay/§ Configuring Unblocking .../...../...../….. 5 to 80 ms
Parameters

TABLE 17 - RECEIVER PARAMETER ANALOG DUAL TONE


DIP5K/EN CM/A22 Commissioning

Page 28/42 DIP 5000

6.6.5 Configuring Input/Output Parameters Dual Tone


See § Configuring Input/Output Parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE DIP
5000 ANALOG DUAL TONE CHAPTER for more details.
Configure parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:

Parameter/HMI Parameter Value


§ Configuring Input/Output
Input/output ˆ 1 board ˆ 2 boards
Input Filter and logic/Input .
Filter Command 1
..../...../...../.... 0 to 100 ms (1 recommended)
Input Filter and logic/Input
Filter Command 2
..../...../...../.... 0 to 100 ms (1 recommended)
Input Filter and logic/Input
Filter Command 3
...../...../...../... 0 to 100 ms (1 recommended)
Input Filter and logic/Input
Filter Command 4
..../...../...../.... 0 to 100 ms (1 recommended)
Input Filter and logic/Input .
Filter Command 5
..../...../...../.... 0 to 100 ms (1 recommended)
Input Filter and logic/Input
Filter Command 6
..../...../...../.... 0 to 100 ms (1 recommended)
Input Filter and logic/Input
Filter Command 7
...../...../...../... 0 to 100 ms (1 recommended)
Input Filter and logic/Input
Filter Command 8
..../...../...../.... 0 to 100 ms (1 recommended)
Input logic Command 1 ˆ IN1 ˆ IN2 ˆ IN1 or IN2
ˆ IN1 and IN2
Input logic Command 2 ˆ IN3 ˆ IN4 ˆ IN3 or IN4
ˆ IN3 and IN4
Input logic Command 3 ˆ IN5 ˆ IN6 ˆ IN5 or IN6
ˆ IN5 and IN6
Input logic Command 4 ˆ IN7 ˆ IN8 ˆ IN7 or IN8
ˆ IN7 and IN8

TABLE 18 - INPUT/OUPUT PARAMETER DUAL TONE SHEET


Commissioning DIP5K/EN CM/A22

DIP 5000 Page 29/42

6.6.6 Configuring Alarm Parameters Dual Tone


See § Alarm Parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE DIP 5000 ANALOG DUAL
TONE CHAPTER for more details.
Configure parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:

Parameter/HMI § Configuring Alarm Parameter Value


Parameters
Alarm on external Input/§ Configuring Alarm ˆ Alarm ˆ Minor ˆ Major
on external input
..../...../...../. 0 to 2.5 ms
Loss of Signal Alarm ..../...../...../. -16 to 6 dBr
Threshold/§ Configuring Loss of Signal
Alarm
Loss of Signal Alarm Delay/§ Configuring .../...../...../. 1 to 10 seconds
Loss of Signal Alarm
Input Command Duration ˆ Alarm ˆ Minor ˆ Major
Alarm/§ Configuring Input Command
../...../...../. 0, 5 to 10 s
Duration Alarm
Alarm Outputs Delay Major Alarm 1 ˆ0s ˆ 2.5 s ˆ5s
Relay/§ Configuring Alarm Output Delay
ˆ 10 s
Alarm Outputs Delay Major Alarm 2 Relay ˆ0s ˆ 2.5 s ˆ5s
§ Configuring Alarm Output Delay ˆ 10 s
Alarm Outputs Delay Minor Alarm 1 Relay ˆ0s ˆ 2.5 s ˆ5s
§ Configuring Alarm Output Delay ˆ 10 s
Alarm Outputs Delay Minor Alarm 2 Relay ˆ0s ˆ 2.5 s ˆ5s
§ Configuring Alarm Output Delay ˆ 10 s
Alarm on link test failure/§ Configuring on ˆ Minor ˆ Major
Link test failure
Noise Alarm Threshold/§ Configuring Noise ... -6 to +12 dBr
alarm
Noise Alarm Delay/§ Configuring Noise ... 1 to 10 s
alarm
Locking Alarm ˆ Locking Alarm
./...../...../ 0.2 to 9.9 s

TABLE 19 - ALARM PARAMETERS ANALOG DUAL TONE


6.6.7 Saving the Configuration
Save your configuration (see § Configuration File Menu in the HUMAN MACHINE
INTERFACE DIP 5000 Analog dual Tone chapter).
6.7 Final Configuration Step Status
At the end of the configuration step:

• Passwords are created,

• Configuration file is saved and ready to be sent to the DIP 5000.


DIP5K/EN CM/A22 Commissioning

Page 30/42 DIP 5000

7. TESTING AND FAULT ISOLATION


The aim of this step is to check:

• the compliance of the saved configuration file with the hardware,

• the operational state of the DIP 5000.


7.1 Initial Status
The configuration file is saved and ready to be sent to the DIP 5000.
7.2 Checking Procedure

• Send the configuration file to the DIP 5000, the DIP 5000 resets.
For HMI DIGITAL see § Sending a configuration file in the Human Machine Interface DIP
5000 Digital chapter.
For HMI ANALOG see § Sending a configuration file in the Human Machine Interface DIP
5000 Analog chapter.

• Check the correct status of LEDs after the reset and that there are no alarms.
In case of alarm status of LEDs

• Read alarms
For HMI DIGITAL see § Reading Alarms in the Human Machine Interface DIP 5000 Digital
chapter.
For HMI ANALOG see § Reading Alarms in the Human Machine Interface DIP 5000 Analog
chapter.
Once the alarm is identified, apply the corresponding resolution procedure of the §TESTING
AND FAULT ISOLATION in the MAINTENANCE CHAPTER.
Commissioning DIP5K/EN CM/A22

DIP 5000 Page 31/42

7.3 Final Status


At the end of this step the DIP 5000 is configured and in a pre-operational status.

Start

Send the
configuration

Checks alarms
status OK
after reset ?

? No

Yes

Check hardware
alarms status OK ?

? No

Yes Read alarms


note the nature of
the displayed fault.

Repair
see § Testing and
Fault Isolation

End

D0613ENa

FIGURE 4 - TESTING AND FAULT ISOLATION


DIP5K/EN CM/A22 Commissioning

Page 32/42 DIP 5000

8. OPERATIONAL CHECKS
8.1 Initial Status
The DIP 5000 is in pre-operational state, medium not connected.
8.2 Procedure
This procedure involves:

− Checking the user connections (rear sockets) and the “Terminal Block Presence” 1-2
jumpers

− Setting the date time on the equipment.

− Saving the configuration file,

− Clear Event and Alarm log,

− Standalone Checks

− In-line Checks

Start

Ch e ck t h e "u se r "
c on n e ctio n s (r e a r
so ck e ts)

S e t th e tim e o n th e
e q uip m e n t
< Da te / Wr ite / Lo ca l>
Me n u

Sa ve t h e co n fig u r a tio n
in a b a ck - u p file < Re a d / Loc a l> Me n u < File > Me n u
< Co n fig ur a t ion > < File / Sa ve >
Co m m a n d

Cle a r Eve n t a n d Ala r m


lo g

St a nd a lo n e c h e ck s

In line ch e ck s

End

D0614ENa

FIGURE 5 - FINAL CHECKS AND CONFIGURATION


Commissioning DIP5K/EN CM/A22

DIP 5000 Page 33/42

8.3 Standalone Checks


8.3.1 Forcing alarms
Forcing alarms allows checking the Leds Alarm operational state.
To force alarm:
For HMI DIGITAL, see § Forcing alarm in § Human Machine Interface DIP 5000 Digital
chapter.
For HMI ANALOG, see § Forcing alarm in § Human Machine Interface DIP 5000 Analog
chapter.
8.3.2 Maintenance Forcing commands
With the DIP 5000 not connected to the medium, apply Maintenance Forcing commands and
check their results.
For HMI DIGITAL, see § Maintenance in § Human Machine Interface DIP 5000 Digital
chapter.
For HMI ANALOG, see § DIP Maintenance Menu in § Human Machine Interface DIP 5000
Analog chapter.
8.3.3 PLC forcing commands
Only in the case of PLC presence, use PLC forcing commands and check their results. See
§ PLC command forcing in DIP ANALOG Human Machine Interface CHAPTER.
8.4 Final status
Operational status of DIP 5000 is checked in standalone mode.
8.5 In line Checks
Refer to the document FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST PROCEDURE ref DTLC-DIP 5000-
E-FAT-01.
8.6 Final Status
The DIP 5000 is fully operational.
DIP5K/EN CM/A22 Commissioning

Page 34/42 DIP 5000

9. APPENDIX A
9.1 UT148 card layout

UT148

P 10

P2

P9 IR 1xx P 11
V7 communication interface card
V5
V3
V2
P8
P5 Optionnal IR184
P7 IRIG-B place P6
V4
V6
P 12
V1 P4 MAX MAX
3000 U13 3000 U14
V8

V9
P1
E E P R OM
FLAS H

Timer
U8
DS P
U2
S1 2189M

S2 P3 3,3V

D0131ENc

Indicator light status in normal operation:

V1 Steady green
V8 Fast flashing green
V7 Off
Commissioning DIP5K/EN CM/A22

DIP 5000 Page 35/42

9.2 SR11x card layout and jumper settings

SR11x

K4

K3

K2

K1 P1
V5 3
2 S5
1
V6
3
V7 2 S4
1
V8 3
2 S3
1
3
2 S2
1
P3
K12

MAX K11
7000 U4
V1 K10
V2
K9
V3 S1
V4 K8
P2
K7

K6

K5

D0132XXa

Jumper position
The jumper S2 to S5 allows to select the tension value range in function of the level of the
input command.

Position SR114 SR115 SR116


1-2 220V –250V 48V-127V 110V-127V
2-3 48V -127V 24V 48V-60V
DIP5K/EN CM/A22 Commissioning

Page 36/42 DIP 5000

9.3 AL137 card layout

AL137/AL 140

Power
K2

Fuse
MAJ. AL.
A1
MIN. AL. K3

Power switch S1 P1
K1

K4
+5V

0V Factory setting

D0133ENb

9.4 AL139 card layout

AL139
Fuse

Power
MAJ. AL. K3

MIN. AL. CONV.1


K4

Power switch P1
K1
INT.1
C20
+5V 0V K2
POT.1

Factory setting

D0134ENb
Commissioning DIP5K/EN CM/A22

DIP 5000 Page 37/42

9.5 IR183 card layout

IR183

P9-P10 = Tx test points S5 1-2 = 600• , 2-3 = high impedance


P11-P12 = Rx test points S6 1-2 = 600• , 2-3 = high impedance
DIP5K/EN CM/A22 Commissioning

Page 38/42 DIP 5000

9.6 IR184 card layout


Commissioning DIP5K/EN CM/A22

DIP 5000 Page 39/42

9.7 FI002 card layout and jumpers settings


Each filter is programmed through 3 jumpers J1x, J2x, and J3x. Each jumper is labelled on
the board. The positions of the jumpers are given in the figure below.

Command 4 Filter J1A

J2A

J3A P1

Command 3 Filter J1B

J2B

J3B

Command 2 Filter J1C

J2C

J3C

Command 1 Filter J1D

J2D

J3D

D0495ENa

9.7.1 FI002 board layout


Each filter must be set up for the input command nominal voltage following the table below

Input command voltage J1 J2 J3


48 V (System C) Closed Open Open
110 - 127 V (System A-1) Open Closed Closed
220 V (System A-2) Open Closed Open
DIP5K/EN CM/A22 Commissioning

Page 40/42 DIP 5000

9.8 IR-185 BOARD

RED LED fpga not loaded

Rotary switch

Test jumper
Power jumper

Tx LED Tx

Rx LED Rx

SPI connector
JTAG connector
GREEN LED power on

D0496ENa

Optical power measurement:


The optical output is a square wave at 1.024MHz. Notice that communication with another
unit is not allowed in this mode.
Slots:
Standard IEEE C37.94 runs at a maximum of 2.048Mbits/sec, with as many as twelve slots
of 64Kbits/sec each available for maximum data flow. The DIP 5000 has eight slots selected
with a rotary switch.
Test jumper:
1-2 Test mode
2-3 Normal mode (default)
Test mode:
Test mode is used at the factory for board testing without DIP 5000 connection.
Commissioning DIP5K/EN CM/A22

DIP 5000 Page 41/42

LEDs
The board is equipped with 2 LEDs (diameter 5 mm) on the front side.
The upper led D1 is labelled TX on the front side, the other one D2 is labelled RX

STATE D1 D2 Comment
NORMAL Steady Green Steady Green Normal operation
LOS - Steady Red Loss of signal on RX input
AIS - steady* Receiving AIS (all ones)
Yellow
LOF - blinking Red Loss of Frame (1 ms red when a frame
is bad)
YEL Steady* - Yellow bit received (state 1)
Yellow
TXAL Steady Red - No signal to transmit signal from UT148
RSET Steady Red Steady Red During reset or FPGA programming

Interface to ALXXX
The IR185 module is powered by the ALxxx module with a single voltage: 5V DC. This
voltage crosses the mother board, so it needs filtering at the input of the board.
Take care about powering the optical interface components, as the receiver and transmitter
parts may be disconnected (no return current from TX part on RX ground).
DIP5K/EN CM/A22 Commissioning

Page 42/42 DIP 5000

BLANK PAGE
Maintenance DIP5K/EN MT/A22

DIP 5000

MAINTENANCE
Maintenance DIP5K/EN MT/A22

DIP 5000 Page 1/42

CONTENTS

1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 5

2. OVERVIEW 6

3. MONITORING 7
3.1 Monitoring LEDs 7
3.2 Messages 9
3.3 LEDs Relay Information 9
3.4 Push-buttons 9

4. HMI MAINTENANCE FEATURES 10


4.1 Snapshot Window 10
4.2 Maintenance Test Commands 10
4.3 Reading Alarms Snapshot DIP 5000 HMI DIGITAL 10
4.4 Reading Alarms Event DIP5000 DIGITAL 11
4.5 Reading Alarms DIP 5000 HMI ANALOG 11
4.6 Reading Alarms Event DIP5000 ANALOG 12

5. TESTING AND FAULT ISOLATION 13


5.1 Checks before Repair 13
5.2 Fault Isolation procedure 13
5.3 Troubleshooting Procedures 13
5.4 Warning and error messages 34

6. FAULT CLASSIFICATION 37

7. FIRMWARE DIP5000 UPGRADE 39


7.1 Overview 39
7.2 Prerequisite 39
7.3 Installing the files on the PC 39
7.4 Transferring update files 40
7.5 Connecting the DIP5000 41
DIP5K/EN MT/A22 Maintenance

Page 2/42 DIP 5000

LIST OF FIGURES

FIGURE 1 - INDICATION LEDS AND PUSH BUTTONS 7


FIGURE 2 - POWER UP ALARMS 15
FIGURE 3 - POWER UP ALARM - COMMUNICATION INTERFACE FAULT 16
FIGURE 4 - POWER UP ALARMS - SR11X COHERENCE FAULT 17
FIGURE 5 - POWER UP ALARM – IRIG-B COHERENCE FAULT 18
FIGURE 6 - POWER UP ALARM - CONFIGURATION CHECKSUM FAULT 19
FIGURE 7 - POWER-UP ALARMS-LOCAL LOOPBACK TEST FAULT 20
FIGURE 8 - HARDWARE STATUS 21
FIGURE 9 - HARDWARE STATUS - SR11X MODULE TEST FAULT 22
FIGURE 10 - HARDWARE STATUS - TERMINAL BLOCK PRESENCE FAULT 23
FIGURE 11 - HARDWARE STATUS - AL13X OR AL14X POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE
FAULT 24
FIGURE 12 - HARDWARE STATUS - TIMER BATTERY VOLTAGE FAULT 25
FIGURE 13 - HARDWARE STATUS - ALARM ON LINK TEST 26
FIGURE 14 - COMMUNICATION ALARMS - DIGITAL VERSION 27
FIGURE 15 - COMMUNICATION ALARM DIGITAL - BIT ERROR RATE ALARM 28
FIGURE 16 - COMMUNICATION ALARMS DIGITAL – SYNCHRO LOSS 29
FIGURE 17 - REMOTE ALARMS 30
FIGURE 18 - COMMUNICATION ALARM DIGITAL - COMMUNICATION INTERFACE
ALARM 30
FIGURE 19 - COMMUNICATION ALARM DIGITAL - TRANSMISSION TIME ALARM 31
FIGURE 20 - COMMUNICATION ALARM DIGITAL - TX COMMAND DURATION ALARM 31
FIGURE 21 - COMMUNICATION ALARMS ANALOG VERSION 32
FIGURE 22 - COMMUNICATION ALARMS ANALOG – MISSING GUARD LOW LEVEL
ALARM NOISE ALARM DT - LOCKING ALARM DT 33
FIGURE 23 - COMMUNICATION ALARM ANALOG - EXTERNAL ALARM 34
FIGURE 24 - MISCELLANEOUS MESSAGES 35
FIGURE 25 - MISCELLANEOUS MESSAGES CONTINUED 36
Maintenance DIP5K/EN MT/A22

DIP 5000 Page 3/42

MODIFICATIONS PAGE

VERSION DATE COMMENTS


A11 12/28/2000 ORIGINAL ISSUE
B11 04/24/2001 ADDITION OF OPTICAL INTERFACE
C11 11/05/2004 AREVA LOGO AND ADDITION OF ANALOG VERSION
D11 11/14/2007 NEW STRUCTURE. NEW WRITING. FIRMWARE
UPGRADE PARAGRAPH ADDED, TESTING AND FAULT
ISOLATION PROCEDURE CREATED.
E11 02/29/2008 MINOR CORRECTION
A22 08/14/2008 PACKAGE RELEASE 2.2
DIP5K/EN MT/A22 Maintenance

Page 4/42 DIP 5000

BLANK PAGE
Maintenance DIP5K/EN MT/A22

DIP 5000 Page 5/42

1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER
SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY
SECTION DIP5K/EN SS/A11 OR LATER ISSUE, THE TECHNICAL DATA
SECTION AND THE RATING ON THE EQUIMENT RATING LABEL.

THE FRONT PANEL MOUNTED MONITOR DOWNLOAD PORT IS AN


EXTRA-LOW VOLTAGE (ELV) CIRCUIT WHICH PROVIDES BASIC
INSULATION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK. WHEN THE RELAY IS
ENERGISED, THE TERMINALS OF THIS PORT SHOULD NOT BE
TOUCHED SINCE IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF A SINGLE FAULT
CONDITION THERE WOULD BE A VERY LOW PROBABILITY OF AN
ELECTRIC SHOCK. THIS PORT IS DESIGNED TO BE USED FOR
MAINTENANCE PURPOSES, THAT IS MONITORING AND SOFTWARE
DOWNLOADS; IT IS NOT INTENDED TO BE PERMANENTLY
CONNECTED.
DIP5K/EN MT/A22 Maintenance

Page 6/42 DIP 5000

2. OVERVIEW
This section includes two parts:

• Testing and repair: in this part a fault classification is given, maintenance tools
described, and repair procedures given.

• Firmware upgrade procedure.


Maintenance DIP5K/EN MT/A22

DIP 5000 Page 7/42

3. MONITORING
The monitoring resources available with the DIP5000 equipment are the following:

• Monitoring information by LEDs and relays,

• Notification messages,
3.1 Monitoring LEDs
LEDs, located on the DIP 5000 front face display supervision information (see TABLE 1 –
LEDS INDICATION).
System operation is monitored by these LEDS and four alarm relays (two dedicated to major
alarm and two to minor alarm).
Alarm requiring a maintenance action are notified by the status of these LEDs and relays.

Maintenance Link CPU


Loc Rem

MTN LCK LOOP SYNC REM AL STATUS BAT

V7 V5 V3 V2 V4 V6 V1 V8 V9 S1 S2

D0135XXa

MAIN POWER AUX. POWER


Opt. Link

TX MAJOR ALARM

RX MINOR ALARM

Optical interface
Power supplies indicator lights
indicator lights D0136ENa

FIGURE 1 - INDICATION LEDS AND PUSH BUTTONS


The following tables gives information notified by the LEDs.
V2, V4, and V6 LEDs information depend on the version ANALOG or DIGITAL,
corresponding lines are shown in gray in the table.
DIP5K/EN MT/A22 Maintenance

Page 8/42 DIP 5000

Main Auxiliary IR182


Indicator
Description UT148 Power Power Activity Colour Observation
light
Supply Supply IR185
Power supply x x Voltage present Green Steady
voltage presence Voltage absent Off
Major Alarm x Normal Off
Alarm Red Steady
GENERAL

Minor Alarm x Normal Off


Alarm Red Steady
Local loopback x Normal V3 Off
Loopback Amber Steady
Battery Fault x Normal V9 Off
Fault Red Steady
Remote loopback x Normal V2 Off
Remote looped Amber Steady
equipment
DIGITAL

Receiver x Synchronised V4 Green Steady


synchronisation Not Synchronised Off
Remote Alarm x Normal V6 Off
Remote alarm Red Steady
Tx Alarm x Normal TX Green Steady
Optical Interface Lack of timing Red Fast
Tx Alarm x Transmission TX Amber Slow
OPTICAL

Optical Interface Inhibition


Rx Alarm x Normal RX Green Steady
Optical Interface Lack of timing Red Fast
Rx Alarm x Lack of Received RX Amber Slow
Optical Interface signal
x Signal V4 Green Steady
Missing Off
Guard/Low Level
Rx Level/Guard
ANALOG

x Signal V6 Off
Missing Red Steady
Guard/Low Level
Transmission of Amber Steady
Link Test Message Test V2 during 2sec
Link test fault Amber Steady

TABLE 1 – LEDS INDICATION


Maintenance DIP5K/EN MT/A22

DIP 5000 Page 9/42

UT148 indicator
UT148 indicator light UT148 indicator light
Teleprotection Status light
V1 (STATUS) V8 (STATUS)
V7 (MTN)
NORMAL OPERATION Steady Green Fast-flashing Green Off
Normal operation after a cold Steady Green Fast-flashing Amber Off
start
Initialisation in progress Steady Green Fast-flashing Red Off
Alarm on power-up test Fast-flashing Red Fast-flashing Red Off
Configuration Write in the Slow-flashing Red Slow-flashing Red Off
Flash EPROM
Storage status Quick switch from Green Quick switch from Green
(Isolated Timer Battery) to Amber then Red to Amber then Red
MAINTENANCE STEADY GREEN FAST-FLASHING GREEN OR STEADY AMBER
FAST-FLASHING AMBER
Remote loopback of STEADY GREEN FAST-FLASHING GREEN OR FAST-FLASHING
equipment FAST-FLASHING AMBER AMBER
Pending code transfer for SLOW-FLASHING YELLOW SLOW-FLASHING YELLOW FAST-FLASHING
Flash memory AMBER
CODE TRANSFER IN PROGRESS Green when timing the Green when timing the Fast-flashing
“0”s of transmitted data “1”s of transmitted data Amber
Writing the code in the Flash SLOW-FLASHING RED SLOW-FLASHING RED Fast-flashing
memory Amber

TABLE 2 –"STATUS" AND "MAINTENANCE" LEDS INDICATION


3.2 Messages
Notification messages are displayed to warn the user of errors and unwanted command risks
or give the user instructions to solve a fault (for more information see § 5.4).
3.3 LEDs Relay Information
The "MAJOR ALARM" and "MINOR ALARM" LEDs (see Figure 1) information is associated
with the state of the relay’s alarm.
Each alarm is associated with two independent normally open contact relays, whose time-
delay closure (0s, 2.5s, 5s or 10s) can be configured with the HMI (refer to the «Human
Machine Interface» chapter).
3.4 Push-buttons
Push-buttons S1 and S2 are accessible when the door is open (see Figure 1).
Push-button S1 resets the DIP5000.
Push-button S2:

• Is reserved in the digital version.

• Is used to launch a link test in the analog version.


DIP5K/EN MT/A22 Maintenance

Page 10/42 DIP 5000

4. HMI MAINTENANCE FEATURES


The front panel mounted monitor/download port is an Extra-Low Voltage (ELV) circuit
which provides basic insulation against electric shock. When the relay is energised,
the terminals of this port should not be touched since in the unlikely event of a single
fault condition there would be a very low probability of an electric shock. This port is
designed to be used for maintenance purposes, that is monitoring and software
downloads; it is not intended to be permanently connected.
4.1 Snapshot Window
The Human Machine Interface Software allows supervision of alarms via a Snapshot window
and alarm log file to be read. Alarm events are saved in a file, accessible to the user via the
History menu.
Supervised alarms depend on the DIP5000 type, DIGITAL or ANALOG.
DIP5000 DIGITAL and DIP5000 ANALOG alarms windows and files are described
independently in the following paragraphs. Depending on your DIP 5000 version refer to the
appropriate paragraphs.
4.2 Maintenance Test Commands
Maintenance commands, used to analyse malfunctions and to launch tests, are available
through the HMI:

• Locking to lock/unlock line and relay,

• Loop to launch a loop between transmitter and receiver,

• Forcing commands, used to check the features availability,

• Interface forcing (only DIP5000 DIGITAL),

• Reset.
For more information on using these MAINTENANCE functions see the § Maintenance Menu
in the HMI DIP5000 chapter corresponding to your version DIGITAL or ANALOG.
4.3 Reading Alarms Snapshot DIP 5000 HMI DIGITAL
See § Reading the alarm snapshots in the HMI DIP5000 DIGITAL chapter.
The supervised alarms are the following:
"Power Up” Alarms

• Flash Eprom Control

• DSP internal RAM Control

• External RAM control

• Configuration CRC

• Communication Interface

• Missing SR board

• Missing IRIG-B Loop test failed

• Loop test failed


Maintenance DIP5K/EN MT/A22

DIP 5000 Page 11/42

"Hardware Status" Alarms

• Test SR n°1 fault


• Connector block n°1 fault
• Test SR n°2 fault
• Connector block n°2 fault
• Main power fault
• Auxiliary power fault
• Battery voltage fault
• Time Overrun command
“Communications” Alarms

• Bit Error Rate/MAJAlA


• Bit Error Rate/MINAL
• Synchro loss
• Remote Major

• Remote Minor

• Transmission time
For more information refer to the HMI DIP 5000 DIGITAL CHAPTER.
4.4 Reading Alarm Event DIP5000 DIGITAL
See the § Reading Alarm List in HMI DIP 5000 DIGITAL CHAPTER
4.5 Reading Alarm DIP 5000 HMI ANALOG
See § Reading the alarm snapshots in the HMI DIP5000 ANALOG chapter.
The supervised alarms are the following:
"Power Up” Alarms”

• Flash Memory test failed


• Internal DSP RAM test failed
• External DSP RAM test failed
• Setup Database CRC error
• Communication interface error
• Missing I/O Main power board
• Missing IRIG-B
• Loop test failed
"Hardware Status" Alarms

• I/O board n°1 Test failed


• Connector block n°1 missing
• I/O board n°2 Test failed
• Connector block n°2 missing
• Main power fault
• Auxiliary power fault
• Battery voltage fault
• Link Test alarm
DIP5K/EN MT/A22 Maintenance

Page 12/42 DIP 5000

"Communication" Alarms

• Low level alarm


• Locking
• External alarm
• Noise
• Tx command duration alarm
4.6 Reading Alarms Event DIP5000 ANALOG
See the § Reading Alarm List in HMI DIP 5000 ANALOG CHAPTER
Maintenance DIP5K/EN MT/A22

DIP 5000 Page 13/42

5. TESTING AND FAULT ISOLATION


This chapter contains:

• Checks before Repair,

• Fault isolation procedure,

• Troubleshooting procedures associated with alarm cause.


5.1 Checks before Repair
In of the event of a malfunction, check the following points, before applying the Fault
Isolation procedure:

• Power supply voltage is properly applied to the DIP 5000 (if the power supply LED is
not lit),

• Wiring,

• External connection and circuit to which the DIP5000 is connected (protection side,
transmission medium, power supply, external alarm),

• Motherboard aspect.
If communication between the HMI PC and the DIP5000 cannot be established, check the
cable connection on the DIP5000 side and PC side. Open the front panel of the DIP and
check the internal connection between the RS 232 connector and the UT 148 board.
5.2 Fault Isolation Procedure
Most of the faults are notified to the user by the LEDs status (see § 3.1).
If a LED status notifies an alarm:
1. Determine the alarm cause using the table TABLE 1 – LEDS INDICATION,
2. Connect the PC and launch the HMI,
3. Read the alarm snapshot and notification messages,
4. Apply the repair procedure associated with the alarm (see the next paragraph
Troubleshooting procedure).
Note: In the event of board replacement, apply the commissioning procedure (see
COMMISSIONING chapter).
In the event of a complex fault that cannot be resolved with a repair procedure (several
simultaneous faults or breakdowns with multiple implications), use the maintenance
commands and test tools (see § 4.2) to analyse or deal with the fault (the reset command
can be useful).
5.3 Troubleshooting Procedures
How to use this paragraph:
In the event of an alarm notification, refer to the associated figures:

• Figures 2 to 7 – Power Up Alarms (Digital and Analog)

• Figures 8 to 13 – Hardware Status (Digital and Analog)

• Figures 14 to 21 – Communication Alarms – Digital Version

• Figures 22 to 24 – Communication alarms – Analog Version


DIP5K/EN MT/A22 Maintenance

Page 14/42 DIP 5000

PRECAUTION

Insertion of modules and pcb cards


Modules and PCB cards must not be inserted into or withdrawn from the
equipment while it is energized, since this may result in damage.

In case of board replacement, check the hardware configuration of the spare


board which MUST BE THE SAME.

Remove the back panel fastening screws of the IR 182/185 modules, before
carrying any work on the optical interface board

The IR 182/185 fastening screws must be inserted before connecting the


optical fibre
Maintenance DIP5K/EN MT/A22

DIP 5000 Page 15/42

Power up Alarms

Power up Alarms All these faults are major


irreversible faults

MAIN POWER

MAJOR ALARM

MINOR ALARM

Fault:
Flash EPROM
Replace the UT148 module
DSP RAM
Timer RAM

MTN LCK LOOP SYNC REM AL STATUS BAT

Communication interface
fault see Repair Sheet 1

SR11x coherence fault see Repair Sheet 2

IRIG-B coherence fault see Repair Sheet 3

Configuration checksum
fault see Repair Sheet 4

MTN LCK LOOP SYNC REM AL STATUS BAT

Local loopback test fault see Repair Sheet 5


D0137ENc

FIGURE 2 - POWER UP ALARMS


DIP5K/EN MT/A22 Maintenance

Page 16/42 DIP 5000

The processor does not


Communication interface
recognise the
fault communication interface
card

Check that the IRxxx card is present

Is the card No
Put the IRxxx card in position
present ?

Yes

Check the interface card


coherence / configuration

No Change the configuration or


Config OK ?
change the IRxxx module

Yes

UT148 card or IRxxx card


Failure on one of the modules
fault

Replace the UT148 card and


IRxxx card
D0138ENa

FIGURE 3 - POWER UP ALARM - COMMUNICATION INTERFACE FAULT


Maintenance DIP5K/EN MT/A22

DIP 5000 Page 17/42

Th e c o n fig u ra tio n d o e s n o t
SR11x coherence fault m a tc h th e n u m b e r o f c a rd s
p re s e n t.

C hec k that the nu m ber of S R 11x


defined in the c onfigu ration m atc hes
the nom ber of c ards pres ent.

No Change the configuration or ins tall


Coherence OK ?
2nd S R 11x card

Yes

UT 148 card or S R 11x card fault or


Failure on one of the modules
FB 182 motherboard fault

Change the faulty module

D0139ENc

FIGURE 4 - POWER UP ALARMS - SR11X COHERENCE FAULT


DIP5K/EN MT/A22 Maintenance

Page 18/42 DIP 5000

Le processor does not


IRIG-B coherence fault recognise the IRIG-B
interface card

Check that the IRIG-B


interface card is present

Is the card No
Put the IRIG-B card in position
present ?

Yes

Check the IRIG-B card


coherence / configuration

No Change the configuration or


Config OK ?
change the IRIG-B card

Yes

UT148 card
Failure on one of the modules or
IRIG-B card fault

Change the UT148 card


and IRIG-B card
D0140ENa

FIGURE 5 - POWER UP ALARM – IRIG-B COHERENCE FAULT


Maintenance DIP5K/EN MT/A22

DIP 5000 Page 19/42

Configuration checksum The configuration saved in


fault Flash Eprom is corrupted

Reload the configuration


from the HMI

Has the fault Yes END


disappeared ?

No

Failure on the UT148 module UT148 card component fault

Change the UT148 module


D0141ENa

FIGURE 6 - POWER UP ALARM - CONFIGURATION CHECKSUM FAULT


DIP5K/EN MT/A22 Maintenance

Page 20/42 DIP 5000

The test on the local loopback


Local loopback test fault
communication interface card
has failed

Fault located on the IRxx


communication interface card
or on the UT148 card

Change the IRxxx card

Has the fault Yes


disappeared ? END

No

Failure on the UT148 module

Change the UT148 module


D0142ENa

FIGURE 7 - POWER-UP ALARMS-LOCAL LOOPBACK TEST FAULT


Maintenance DIP5K/EN MT/A22

DIP 5000 Page 21/42

Hardware Alarms

Hardware alarms

MAIN POWER

MAJOR ALARM
SR11x test fault
see Repair Sheet 6 MINOR ALARM

Operating terminal block


presence see Repair Sheet 7

AL13x / AL14x
power supply voltage see Repair Sheet 8

MAIN POWER

MAJOR ALARM

MINOR ALARM

Battery voltage see Repair Sheet 9

MTN LCK LOOP SYNC REM AL STATUS BAT

Link Test see Repair Sheet 10


(Analog Version Only)
MAIN POWER
Major Alarm
MAJOR ALARM

MINOR ALARM

D0143ENc

FIGURE 8 - HARDWARE STATUS


DIP5K/EN MT/A22 Maintenance

Page 22/42 DIP 5000

SR11x module test fault

Make a note of the Card N˚ 1 : top position


Card N˚ 2 : bottom position
faulty card number (4-command and 8-command option)

R ead the version of the


Read / Local / Version
S R 11x programmable logic

N˚ 1 Card N˚ ? N˚ 2

E P LD S R 11x(1) =ZZ341x-yy E P LD S R 11x(2) =ZZ341x-yy


(x: vers ion and yy: revis ion) (x: vers ion and yy: revis ion)

Correct firmware No Correct firmware No


version ? version ?

E P LD of S R 11x card N˚ 1 E P LD of S R 11x card N˚ 2


Yes not programmed Yes not programmed

R eplace S R 11x card N˚ 1 R eplace S R 11x card N˚ 2


(top) (bottom)

D0144ENc

FIGURE 9 - HARDWARE STATUS - SR11X MODULE TEST FAULT


Maintenance DIP5K/EN MT/A22

DIP 5000 Page 23/42

Terminal block
presence fault

Are terminal blocks


No P lug in terminal blocks
P10 to P13 on the rear
panel present ? P 10 to P 13

Y es

Are the presence


" bridges" in place on terminal No
See Installation manual
blocks
P10 to P13 ?

Install the terminal block


Y es presence "bridges" on
connectors P 10 to P 13

UT 148 card
F ailure on one of the modules or S R 11x card fault
or F B motherboard fault

Change the faulty module

D0145ENc

FIGURE 10 - HARDWARE STATUS - TERMINAL BLOCK PRESENCE FAULT


DIP5K/EN MT/A22 Maintenance

Page 24/42 DIP 5000

Only when power supply


AL 13x / AL 14x redundancy:
power supply fault One of the two modules
AL13x / AL 14x is not working.

Make a note of the Card N˚ 1 : left position


faulty card number Card N˚ 2 : right position

Is the
"P OW E R " indicator light Yes R eplace the faulty
on the faulty card AL 13x / AL 14x module
lit ?

No

Is the faulty card Yes


powered up ? P ower up the card
(s witch ON/OF F )

No

Check the fuse

No R eplace the fuse


Fus e OK ?
on the faulty card

Yes

R eplace the faulty AL 13x / AL 14x module fault


AL 13x / AL 14x module

D0146ENc

FIGURE 11 - HARDWARE STATUS - AL13X OR AL14X POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE FAULT


Maintenance DIP5K/EN MT/A22

DIP 5000 Page 25/42

Timer battery
voltage fault

Check
that the "Power Cap"
is present on the timer

Is the No
See Installation manual
"Power Cap" present ?

Yes Install the "Power Cap"


on the timer

Replace the
See appended procedure
timer "Power Cap"
D0147ENa

FIGURE 12 - HARDWARE STATUS - TIMER BATTERY VOLTAGE FAULT


DIP5K/EN MT/A22 Maintenance

Page 26/42 DIP 5000

Link Test fault

OR

Fault located on IR183/UT148 Problem with the


cards of local or remote DIP transmission medium or
the threshold is not suited
to the flow

Change the IR183 card on local


DIP and restart link test
Check the
transmission medium

has the fault Yes


disappeared ?
END

No

Change the UT148 card on local


DIP and restart link test

has the fault Yes


disappeared ? END

No

Change the UT148 and/or IR183


card on remote DIP
D0148ENb

FIGURE 13 - HARDWARE STATUS - ALARM ON LINK TEST

NOTE: Before carrying out a diagnosis, use the HMI to reset the local
equipment, then read the alarms again.
Maintenance DIP5K/EN MT/A22

DIP 5000 Page 27/42

Communication Alarms DIP5000 Digital

Communication Alarms
(Digital version)

Bit Error Rate Alarm


see Repair Sheet 11

Synchro Loss Alarm see Repair Sheet 12

MTN LCK LOOP SYNC REM AL STATUS BAT

Major or Minor
Remote Alarm see Repair Sheet 13

Communication Interface see Repair Sheet 14


Alarm

Transmission Time Alarm see Repair Sheet 15

Tx Command duration see Repair Sheet 16


Alarm
MAIN POWER

MAJOR ALARM
Major/Minor Alarm
Programmable by HMI MINOR ALARM

D0149ENc

FIGURE 14 - COMMUNICATION ALARMS - DIGITAL VERSION


DIP5K/EN MT/A22 Maintenance

Page 28/42 DIP 5000

Bit Error Rate/MAJOR AL. Bit Error Rate/ MINOR AL.

Problem in the transmission


medium or the connection

Check the quality of the


transmission medium

Check the connections between


DIP5000 and the DCE
D0150ENa

FIGURE 15 - COMMUNICATION ALARM DIGITAL - BIT ERROR RATE ALARM


Maintenance DIP5K/EN MT/A22

DIP 5000 Page 29/42

Synchro Loss

Check that the both equipments


configuration of the link are in
compliance, as well as the link.

No
Command number
OK ?

Yes

Card number No
OK ?

Yes

Logical Address No
OK ?

Yes

Clock Config. No
OK ?

Yes

Fault located on
Change the configuration
IRxxx or UT148

Change the IRxxx module

Has the fault Yes


disappeared ?

No

Change the UT148 module

END END
D0151ENa

FIGURE 16 - COMMUNICATION ALARMS DIGITAL – SYNCHRO LOSS


DIP5K/EN MT/A22 Maintenance

Page 30/42 DIP 5000

Major remote Alarm Minor remote Alarm

Menu : <Read>
Make a note of the nature of fault <Remote>
on the remote equipment <Alarms Snapshot>

Repair the remote equipment

END
D0152ENa

FIGURE 17 - REMOTE ALARMS

Communication interface Alarm

Yes Check the signal from


Lack of received signal ?
the DCE

No

Yes
Lack of timing ?

Lack of timing,
HDB3 code violation, with
only with V11 interface and
G703.6 (2Mbps) interface
G703.1 contradirectional interface
No

UT148 card or IRxxx


card fault
Check the signal and clock
from the DCE
Change the UT148 card
and IRxxx card
D0153ENa

FIGURE 18 - COMMUNICATION ALARM DIGITAL - COMMUNICATION INTERFACE ALARM


Maintenance DIP5K/EN MT/A22

DIP 5000 Page 31/42

Transmission Time Alarm

Problem with the transmission


medium or the threshold is not
suited to the flow

Increase the detection


Check the
threshold for OR transmission medium
the transmission time alarm
D0154ENa

FIGURE 19 - COMMUNICATION ALARM DIGITAL - TRANSMISSION TIME ALARM

Tx Command duration
alarm fault

Local reading of
Input / Output status

Is at least No R eplace the


1 input active ? UT 148 module

Yes

Check the Input wiring

Is voltage present on Yes


at least 1 input ?

No

R eplace the S R 11x module


for the active input

D0155ENb

FIGURE 20 - COMMUNICATION ALARM DIGITAL - TX COMMAND DURATION ALARM

NOTE: Before carrying out a diagnosis, use the HMI to reset the local
equipment, then read the alarms again.
DIP5K/EN MT/A22 Maintenance

Page 32/42 DIP 5000

Communication Alarms DIP 5000 Analog

Communication Alarms
(Analog version)

MTN LCK LOOP SYNC REM AL STATUS BAT

Missing Guard or Low Level


Alarm see Repair Sheet 17

External Alarm see Repair Sheet 18

MAIN POWER

MAJOR ALARM
Major/Minor Alarm
Programmable by HMI
MINOR ALARM

Tx Command duration see Repair Sheet 16


Alarm
MAIN POWER

MAJOR ALARM
Major/Minor Alarm
Programmable by HMI
MINOR ALARM

Noise Alarm (DT) see Repair Sheet 17


MAIN POWER

MAJOR ALARM
Reversible Major Alarm
MINOR ALARM

Locking Alarm (DT) see Repair Sheet 17

MAIN POWER

Reversible Major Alarm MAJOR ALARM

MINOR ALARM

D0156ENc

FIGURE 21 - COMMUNICATION ALARMS ANALOG VERSION


Maintenance DIP5K/EN MT/A22

DIP 5000 Page 33/42

Missing guard or Low Level Missing guard or Low Level


Alarm Noise Alarm (DT) Locking Alarm (DT)

Check that the both equipments


configuration of the link are in
compliance, as well as the link.

Command number No
OK ?

Y es

Card number No
OK ?

Y es

F ault located on
Change the configuration
IR 183 or UT 148

Change the IR 183


module

Y es
Has the fault disappeared ?

No

Change the UT 148 module

E ND E ND

D0157ENb

FIGURE 22 - COMMUNICATION ALARMS ANALOG – MISSING GUARD LOW LEVEL ALARM NOISE
ALARM DT - LOCKING ALARM DT
DIP5K/EN MT/A22 Maintenance

Page 34/42 DIP 5000

External Alarm

Check input IN(A/B) on the line


communication port

Has the fault Yes


END
disappeared ?

No

Replace the IR183 module

Has the fault Yes


END
disappeared ?

No

Replace the UT148 module


D0158ENa

FIGURE 23 - COMMUNICATION ALARM ANALOG - EXTERNAL ALARM

5.4 Warning and error messages


These messages are displayed in a window to warn the user of errors and unwanted
command risks or give the user instructions to solve a fault.
Maintenance DIP5K/EN MT/A22

DIP 5000 Page 35/42

Miscellaneous messages
or warning

The DIP5000 is busy processing a


Teleprotection not ready
priority event
(local or remote)
(e.g. a command output)

An error has occurred in the communication


Checksum error on the V24 link.
Repeat the operation.

Too many transmission Fault in the V24 dialog. Restart the HMI or
errors manually reset the teleprotection.

The PC <--> Teleprotection connecting lead


PC disconnection
has been disconnected or damaged.

The equipment has not responded in the


Transmission time-delay
required time.
exceeded
Establish a new connection.

An error has occured during the data


Database checksum fault transfer.
Repeat the operation.

Continued
D0159ENa

FIGURE 24 - MISCELLANEOUS MESSAGES


DIP5K/EN MT/A22 Maintenance

Page 36/42 DIP 5000

Miscellaneous messages
or warning
(continued)

The action started risks causing


Command will be
an unwanted command on the
transmitted on line.
remote equipment.

OR

Switch the remote Unplug the output


Switch the local equipment
equipment to connectors from the remote
to "Line Locking" mode.
"Relays Locking" mode. equipment.

The action started risks causing


Local commands
an unwanted command on the
will be activated.
local equipment.

OR

Switch the local Unplug the output


equipment to connectors from the local
"Relays Locking" mode. equipment.

Local commands Risk associated with the


will be activated. remote equipment looping.

END
D0160ENa

FIGURE 25 - MISCELLANEOUS MESSAGES CONTINUED


Maintenance DIP5K/EN MT/A22

DIP 5000 Page 37/42

6. FAULT CLASSIFICATION
Faults are divided into two classes: Major and Minor
Major Faults
A major fault is a fault whose occurrence inhibits normal operation of the equipment or
entails a risk to operation. In all cases, it involves placing the command output relays in rest
mode. The relays are kept in this mode until the fault disappears.
Minor Faults
A minor fault is a fault whose appearance causes no risk to operation. In this case, normal
operation of the equipment is guaranteed.

Faults are divided into two types: Reversible and Irreversible


Reversible faults
Reversible faults indicate an abnormal condition at a given moment. The teleprotection
returns to normal operating mode as soon as the fault disappears.
Irreversible faults
Irreversible faults indicate permanent non-operation of the link or equipment. Manual
intervention (including repowering or resetting) is necessary to resolve it.

Faults are divided into three categories: Powering up/Hardware/Communication


DIP5K/EN MT/A22 Maintenance

Page 38/42 DIP 5000

The following table summarises the faults classified in categories with class and type
information:

FAULTS CLASS TYPE Version**

"Powering up" faults


Timer RAM test MAJ IRREV
DSP RAM test MAJ IRREV
EPROM Flash test MAJ IRREV
Communication interface presence MAJ IRREV
Loopback test MAJ IRREV
Configuration checksum MAJ IRREV
SR114 coherence test MAJ IRREV
IRIG-B coherence test MAJ IRREV
IR183 coherence test MAJ IRREV A

"Hardware" faults
Presence of SR114 modules MAJ REV
AL137/AL139 fault MIN REV
Presence of operating terminal blocks MIN REV
Battery fault (timer) MIN IRREV
Input/Output test MAJ IRREV
UT power supply voltage test MAJ REV
Link Test MAJ IRREV A

"Communication" faults
Transmission time alarm MIN/MAJ* REV D
Lack of received signal MAJ REV D
Lack of Rx timing MAJ REV D
Lack of Tx timing MAJ REV D
Synchro Loss MAJ REV D
Bit Error Rate/MAJ ALARM MAJ REV D
Bit Error Rate/MIN ALARM MIN REV D
Major remote Alarm MAJ REV D
Minor remote Alarm MIN REV D
Tx Command duration Alarm MIN/MAJ* REV
Missing Guard MAJ REV A
Low Level MAJ REV A
Locking MAJ REV A Dual tone***
Noise MAJ REV A Dual tone
External Alarm MIN/MAJ* REV A
* configuration with HMI
** In the Version column, ‘D’ indicates that the fault concerns only the Digital version of the
DIP5000. ‘A’ indicates that the fault concerns only the Analog version. None indicates that
the fault concerns both versions.
Remote equipment faults are indicated locally. They are classed as reversible whatever their
nature. Once the remote fault is removed, the local alarm disappears.
Maintenance DIP5K/EN MT/A22

DIP 5000 Page 39/42

7. FIRMWARE DIP5000 UPGRADE


7.1 Overview
The upgrade procedure includes four steps:

• Prerequisite,

• Installing the files on the PC,

• Transferring update files,


During this step files are written in the UT148 flash memory (30 seconds to copy a file).

• Connecting the DIP5000.


7.2 Prerequisite
During the update procedure, the equipment must be disconnected to avoid unwanted
commands.
Before apply upgrading procedure:

• Switch off the DIP5000 equipment.

• Unplug Input/Output connectors P11 to P13.

• Unplug the transmission line access P18 connector.

• Unplug the optical connector from IR 182 module if connected.


7.3 Installing the files on the PC
The release is supplied in a zipped file containing 2 files: Diptsoft.dat and Readme.txt.

• Create a temporary directory on the PC hard drive (for example C:\/diptemp).

• Copy the zip update file to the created directory.

• Using Winzip extract the files dipsoft.dat and readme.txt in the created directory.

• Open the readme.txt file using Notepad.

• Copy the update password for future use:

• Copy the dipsoft.dat file to the HMI application PC installation directory (default:
C:\Program Files\AREVA\IHM Dip5000\. If an old dipsoft.dat file is present, a message
will ask you to replace it; answer YES.
DIP5K/EN MT/A22 Maintenance

Page 40/42 DIP 5000

7.4 Transferring update files

Once the upgrade procedure is launched do not interrupt it by resetting, switching-


off the DIP5000 or disconnecting the serial link. If this rule is not applied, damage
requiring return of the equipment to the factory may occur.

1. Check the prerequisite step (disconnect DIP5000),


2. Switch on the DIP5000,
3. Connect the serial communication cable RS 232 between the PC and the DIP5000,
4. Launch the HMI application,
5. Connect the HMI to the DIP menu Tools/connect:

6. Select the Tools/Password menu


7. Enter the 15 characters password copied from the readme.txt file (you can copy/paste
the password from the readme.txt file):

8. Click the button. The DIP5000 Firmware loading window appears:

This window notifies the user of the current DSP and EPLD version and the versions to load.
Maintenance DIP5K/EN MT/A22

DIP 5000 Page 41/42

9. Click the button


10. Notification messages appear with information on file transfer:

When all files have been successfully transferred, the DIP5000 resets.
11. Reset the Event and Alarm logs when upgrading from a digital version earlier than
ZZ339A-05 or an analog version earlier than ZZ350A-03.
12. Check that the DIP5000 version complies with the upgrade version by selecting menu
Read/local/version.
13. Delete the C:/ diptemp directory, and the dipsoft.dat file from the HMI directory
NOTE: In the event of a communication problem beetween the HMI PC and
the DIP5000 the following notification message appears:

Resume the transferring update files procedure from step 4.


7.5 Connecting the DIP5000
1. Switch of the DIP5000,
2. Plug the connectors,
3. Switch on the DIP5000.
DIP5K/EN MT/A22 Maintenance

Page 42/42 DIP 5000

BLANK PAGE
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22

DIP 5000

HUMAN MACHINE
INTERFACE

PART 1: DIP 5000 - ANALOG SINGLE TONE


PART 2: DIP 5000 - ANALOG CODED DUAL TONE
PART 3: DIP 5000 - DIGITAL
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
SINGLE TONE
DIP 5000

HUMAN MACHINE
INTERFACE

PART 1: DIP 5000 ANALOG SINGLE TONE


Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
SINGLE TONE
DIP 5000 Page 1/70

CONTENTS

1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 8

2. HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL 9


2.1 Information presentation 9
2.2 Example in a paragraph 9

3. OVERVIEW 10
3.1 Foreword 10
3.2 System Required 10
3.3 Installing the HMI 10

4. USER LEVELS AND PASSWORDS 11


4.1 User level structure 11

5. DIP 5000 PASSWORD MANAGEMENT 13


5.1 Rules for Password Creation 13
5.2 Accessing the Password Manager Menus with the <Password> Menu 13
5.3 Modifying the Password Manager password with the password Menu 14
5.4 Creating a User Password with the <Create> Menu 15
5.5 Managing the Password list 15
5.6 Exiting the Password Manager 15

6. INTERFACE DESCRIPTION 16
6.1 Main screen 16
6.2 Header bar 16
6.3 Menu bar 17
6.4 Toolbar 17
6.5 Status bars 17
6.6 Work and dialog zone. 18

7. FUNCTIONALITIES DESCRIPTION 19
7.1 <Tools> Menu 19
7.2 <File> Menu 19
7.3 <DIP> Menu 20
7.4 <History> Menu 20
7.5 <Test> Menu 20
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 2/70 DIP 5000

8. OPERATING THE HMI DIP 5000 SINGLE TONE 21


8.1 Launching the HMI 21
8.2 Connecting to a DIP 5000 21
8.3 Operating <Tools> Menu 22
8.3.1 Entering a password 23
8.3.2 Change firmware password 23
8.3.3 Returning to level 0 23
8.3.4 Disconnecting the HMI 23
8.3.5 Connecting the HMI to the DIP 5000 24
8.3.6 Exiting the HMI 25
8.4 General configuration procedure 25
8.5 Creating a Configuration File>New> 26
8.5.1 Configuration Window description 27
8.5.2 Configuration Window Toolbar 27
8.6 Configuring General parameters 29
8.6.1 Configuring Number of Commands 29
8.6.2 Configuring Version 29
8.6.3 Configuring IRIG-B 30
8.6.4 Configuring HMI speed 30
8.6.5 Configuring Logical Address 30
8.6.6 Entering Comments 30
8.6.7 Configuring Link Test 31
8.6.8 Sending a General Parameters Configuration file to the DIP 5000 31
8.7 Configuring <Sender> parameters 32
8.7.1 Configuring Guard Source 32
8.7.2 Configuring Sender LF Band 33
8.7.3 Configuring Sender Transmission levels 33
8.7.4 Configuring Command transmission parameters 34
8.7.5 Sender Transmission parameters configuration procedure 36
8.7.6 Sending Sender Parameters Configuration to the DIP 5000 37
8.8 Configuring Receiver parameters 38
8.8.1 Configuring LF band 38
8.8.2 Configuring Receiver Input level 39
8.8.3 Configuring Receiver Protection Scheme 39
8.8.4 Configuring Relay State on AIarm 40
8.8.5 Configuring Receiver Holding Delay 40
8.8.6 Configuring Unblocking parameters 40
8.8.7 Sending Receiver parameters configuration 41
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
SINGLE TONE
DIP 5000 Page 3/70

8.9 Configuring Input/Output Parameters 42


8.9.1 Configuring I/O board 42
8.9.2 Configuring Input Filter Delay 43
8.9.3 Configuring Combinatorial logic on inputs 43
8.9.4 Sending Input/Output Configuration 44
8.10 Configuring Alarm Parameters 45
8.10.1 Configuring Alarm on External Input 45
8.10.2 Configuring Input Command Duration alarm 46
8.10.3 Configuring Loss of Signal Alarm 46
8.10.4 Configuring Alarm Output delay 47
8.10.5 Sending Alarm Configuration 47
8.11 File <Configuration> menu 48
8.11.1 Editing a configuration file 48
8.11.2 Saving a configuration file 49
8.11.3 Sending a configuration file 49
8.11.4 Closing a configuration file 49
8.12 Operating the <DIP> Menu 49
8.12.1 Reading the Configuration 50
8.12.2 Reading Hardware Configuration 51
8.12.3 Reading Versions 51
8.12.4 Reading the Alarm Snapshot 52
8.12.5 Reading the Input/Output States 52
8.13 Operating <DIP><Maintenance> menus 53
8.13.1 Switching to Maintenance Normal Mode and vice-versa 54
8.13.2 Maintenance status bar 54
8.13.3 Reading Input Level Measurement 55
8.13.4 Configuring Ouput Levels Setting 55
8.13.5 Configuring Receiver level 56
8.13.6 Operating Maintenance Force/Lock/Loop 58
8.14 Setting the Date 63
8.15 Resetting the DIP 63
8.16 Operating <History> Menu 64
8.16.1 Reading Events 64
8.16.2 Reading Alarms 66
8.16.3 Reading Local Command Counters 67
8.16.4 Erasing Events 68
8.16.5 Erasing Alarms 68
8.17 Operating <Test> Menu 69
8.18 Help Menu 69
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 4/70 DIP 5000

LIST OF FIGURES

FIGURE 1 – MAIN SCREEN BEFORE PC/DIP 5000 CONNECTION 16


FIGURE 2 – EXAMPLE OF MAIN SCREEN AFTER PC/DIP 5000 CONNECTION 16
FIGURE 3 – MENU BAR 17
FIGURE 4 – TOOLBAR 17
FIGURE 5 – STATUS BAR 17
FIGURE 6 – EXAMPLE OF DIALOG BOX WITH LIST DISPLAY 18
FIGURE 7 – TOOLS MENU 22
FIGURE 8 – MAIN CONFIGURATION WINDOW 26
FIGURE 9 – TOOLBAR 27
FIGURE 10 – CONFIGURATION SYNTHESIS WINDOW 28
FIGURE 11 – CONFIGURATION GENERAL TAB 29
FIGURE 12 – SENDER CONFIGURATION TAB 32
FIGURE 13 – RECEIVER CONFIGURATION TAB 38
FIGURE 14 – INPUT/OUTPUT CONFIGURATION TAB 42
FIGURE 15 - COMBINATORIAL LOGIC ON INPUTS 43
FIGURE 16 – CONFIGURATION ALARMS TAB 45
FIGURE 17 – CONFIGURATION EXIT MENU 48
FIGURE 18 – HARDWARE CONFIGURATION WINDOW 51
FIGURE 19 – VERSION WINDOW 51
FIGURE 20 – ALARM SNAPSHOT WINDOW 52
FIGURE 21 – INPUT/OUTPUT WINDOW 52
FIGURE 22 – MAINTENANCE LEVELS 53
FIGURE 23 – MAINTENANCE MENU 54
FIGURE 24 – MAINTENANCE STATUS BAR 54
FIGURE 25 – MAINTENANCE FORCE/LOCK/LOOP TAB 58
FIGURE 26 – EXAMPLE OF READING THE EVENT LIST 65
FIGURE 27 – EXAMPLE OF READING THE ALARM LIST 66
FIGURE 28 – EXAMPLE OF READING COUNTERS STATEMENT 67
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
SINGLE TONE
DIP 5000 Page 5/70

MODIFICATIONS PAGE
VERSION DATE COMMENTS
A11 01/04/2001 ORIGINAL ISSUE
B11 08/23/2004 AREVA LOGO AND ADDITION OF ANALOG
VERSION
C11 07/12/2006 NEW FEATURES AND ADDITIONAL TECHNICAL
EXPLANATIONS
D11 11/14/2007 NEW CHAPTER. TASK ORIENTED WRITING. HMI
CHAPTER SEPARATED IN THREE PARTS DIGITAL,
ANALOG SINGLE TONE, ANALOG DUAL TONE.
E11 02/11/2008 MINOR CORRECTIONS
A22 08/14/2008 PACKAGE RELEASE 2.2
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 6/70 DIP 5000

BLANK PAGE
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
SINGLE TONE
DIP 5000 Page 7/70

GENERAL
This manual describes the Human-Machine interface of the DIP 5000, i.e. the software
application which enables commissioning, operational use and maintenance of this
equipment.

DEFINITIONS
HMI tool for using the DIP 5000 (Human-Machine Interface)
Configuration all the characteristics (fixed components) and parameters
(customisation components) of a DIP 5000
Configuration File micro-computer file containing all the configuration components of a
DIP 5000
Input password password for accessing the ‘Password Manager’ utility
User level all the authorised operations corresponding to the level of
responsibility of a given operator
Level password password for accessing a user level

NOTE: Windows® and PC™ are registered trademarks.


DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 8/70 DIP 5000

1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE UNIT, THE USER


SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY
SECTION DIP5K/EN SS/A11 OR LATER ISSUE, THE TECHNICAL DATA
SECTION AND THE RATING ON THE EQUIMENT RATING LABEL.

THE FRONT PANEL MOUNTED MONITOR DOWNLOAD PORT IS AN


EXTRA-LOW VOLTAGE (ELV) CIRCUIT WHICH PROVIDES BASIC
INSULATION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK. WHEN THE RELAY IS
ENERGISED, THE TERMINALS OF THIS PORT SHOULD NOT BE
TOUCHED SINCE IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF A SINGLE FAULT
CONDITION THERE WOULD BE A VERY LOW PROBABILITY OF AN
ELECTRIC SHOCK. THIS PORT IS DESIGNED TO BE USED FOR
MAINTENANCE PURPOSES, THAT IS MONITORING AND SOFTWARE
DOWNLOADS; IT IS NOT INTENDED TO BE PERMANENTLY
CONNECTED.
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
SINGLE TONE
DIP 5000 Page 9/70

2. HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL


2.1 Information presentation

• Menu Paths are indicated in this manner: Menu_entry_level1 > Menu_entry_level2>


Path example: Select File > New

• In the text Menu names are shown between <> example: menu <DIP>

• Window names are shown between <> example: < Input Window >

• Buttons are shown with screen captures example:


2.2 Example in a paragraph
<HISTORY> menu MENU NAME BETWEEN <>
To Erase Events:
Select History Erase>Erase Events

A <Confirmation> window is then displayed:

Answer
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 10/70 DIP 5000

3. OVERVIEW
3.1 Foreword
As it is powerful and easy to use, the DIP 5000 Analog HMI enables local:

• complete commissioning of the unit and control of its levels, without the need for other
tools,

• levels adjustment without measuring apparatus,

• filing of configurations (=>rationalisation of commissioning actions),

• dated recording of unit information (=> analysis and statistics),

• interactive and user-friendly maintenance,

• printing of unit parameters.


3.2 System Required
The HMI runs on PCs fitted equipped with Pentium III microprocessors and higher, operating
under WINDOWS 2000 or XP Service Pack 2. They must have at least 40 Mb free on the
hard disk and 256MB of RAM.
IMPORTANT: WHERE SEVERAL TASKS ARE RUNNING AT THE SAME TIME (OFFICE
TOOLS OR OTHER), TRANSMISSION FAULTS MAY OCCUR ON THE PC-
HMI. IT IS THEREFORE RECOMMENDED THAT ALL APPLICATIONS
ARE CLOSED BEFORE USING THIS HMI.
3.3 Installing the HMI
Installation:

• insert the CDROM provided in the reader,

• run the setup.exe file from the <Run> <Menu> in the program manager:
D\:setup.exe,

• follow the instructions.


Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
SINGLE TONE
DIP 5000 Page 11/70

4. USER LEVELS AND PASSWORDS


4.1 User level structure
The DIP 5000 places operations in hierarchical order: some actions have no impact on unit
operation, others, due to their impact on security and operation, require specific
responsibility on the part of the operator.
The HMI is therefore structured in user levels; there are 2 of them, 0 and 2.
Level 0 is the default level on start-up. To enforce this hierarchical arrangement, the
command menus are displayed according to user level.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 12/70 DIP 5000

Menus

Level
Menus 0 2
File new x x
open x x
Tools Identification x x
To user level 0 x x
connect x x
disconnect x x
exit x x
DIP * configuration x x
hardware configuration x x
version x x
Alarms snapshot x x
input/output x x
Reset x
DIP/Date * read x x
write x
DIP/Maintenance * Input level measure x x
Output levels setting, adjustment receiving x
alignment and automatic alignment
switch to maintenance mode x
Unlocking line (security) x
Unlocking relay (security) x
local loop back x
transmitter forcing x
command output forcing x
alarm forcing x

Test * Link test x

History * event list x x


alarm list x x
Counter list x x
Clear event file x
Clear alarm file x

Help x x

TABLE 1 – MENU ACCESSIBILITY ACCORDING TO USER LEVEL


* To access these menus, you need to be connected.
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
SINGLE TONE
DIP 5000 Page 13/70

5. DIP 5000 PASSWORD MANAGEMENT


The DIP 5000 Security Password Manager application, associated with the HMI application,
is used to create, modify, read, and delete passwords.
To launch the application, click the desktop “DIP 5000 Security” icon or open the DIP 5000
group of programs and select it.
For security reasons, access to the Password Manager is password protected.
5.1 Rules for Password Creation
Passwords are case sensitive and include 1 to 15 characters to be chosen exclusively from
the following:

• upper case (A to Z)

• lower case (a to z)

• numbers (0 to 9)

• ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . /: ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ¨ { | } ~


5.2 Accessing the Password Manager Menus with the <Password> Menu
The <Password> menu enables you to access the Password manager menus <Create> and
<List Passwords>.
To access the Password Manager menus:
1. Launch the DIP 5000 Security application clicking on the desktop icon; the following
Passwords Manager DIP 5000 window opens:

2. Select Password>Input, the following < Password Input> window opens:

3. Enter DIP5000 in upper case in this window (only the first time).
NOTE: Modifying the Password Manager password is recommended after the
first use (see the next paragraph).

4. Click the button.


DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 14/70 DIP 5000

The following window opens:

The <Create> and <List Passwords> menus are available.


5.3 Modifying the Password Manager password with the password Menu
The password Manager menu allows you to modify the password manager password.
For the first use the password is DIP5000 (in upper case), modifying it after the first use is
highly recommended.
1. Access the Manager Menu (see § 5.2)
2. Select Password>Change the following Window opens:

3. Enter the new password in compliance with the rules for Password Creation (see § 5.1).
Carefully note the new password. If you lose it the application must be reinstalled.

4. Click the button


5. Confirm the new password by re-entering it.
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
SINGLE TONE
DIP 5000 Page 15/70

5.4 Creating a User Password with the <Create> Menu


Several passwords can be created.
1. To create User Passwords select < Create>
The following window < Password Entry> opens:

2. Enter the password to be created while complying with the password creation rules (see
§ 5.1). Enter the password again in the “Confirm password” field.

3. Click the button.


5.5 Managing the Password list
To access the Password List, click the Menu <List Passwords> of the Password Manager

The list of passwords is displayed.

1. To remove a password, select the password line in the list and click the
button. A confirmation message is then displayed, Answer yes.
5.6 Exiting the Password Manager
To exit the password manager and return to the WINDOWS environment, select Password>
Exit.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 16/70 DIP 5000

6. INTERFACE DESCRIPTION
The HMI has an integrated environment, using standard WINDOWS tools and processes.
As only the operating modes specific to the HMI will be mentioned in the following, it is
recommended that operators not familiar with WINDOWS refer to the user manual for this
environment.
6.1 Main screen
The main screen is composed of functional zones (see the following figures).

The work zone The status bar The header bar


The toolbar The menu bar D0172ENa

FIGURE 1 – MAIN SCREEN BEFORE PC/DIP 5000 CONNECTION

FIGURE 2 – EXAMPLE OF MAIN SCREEN AFTER PC/DIP 5000 CONNECTION


6.2 Header bar
The header displays the HMI name at the top part of the window.
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
SINGLE TONE
DIP 5000 Page 17/70

6.3 Menu bar


The operator launches commands via the standard WINDOWS menus, displayed according
to the current user level (password dependent).

FIGURE 3 – MENU BAR


6.4 Toolbar
The operator can launch commands and read information locally via the toolbar shortcuts
Rolling the mouse over a tool displays information on its function.

Open Maintenance Window


Reading the configuration
Reading the alarm queue
Reading the event queue
Reading/Writing the date
Disconnection
Choosing a password
D0173ENa

FIGURE 4 – TOOLBAR
6.5 Status bars
Depending on the user level and the type of operation in progress, status bars can appear
displaying the following information.
The bottom bar displays:

• the connection status (HMI) (connect/disconnect icon)

• the link address

• the transmission speed of serial port (HMI connection)

• the current operating mode (Operation/Maintenance)

• any alarm present (clicking in this zone opens a window displaying the faults that
have triggered this alarm)

• the user level granted ( 0 or 2 depending on the password)

• a green led indicating the connection status (OK when flashing)

• the DSP firmware version

FIGURE 5 – STATUS BAR


DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 18/70 DIP 5000

6.6 Work and dialog zone.


Most of the commands are also launched using the dialog boxes (see figure 6 below). Six
standard Window tools are used:

• optional button groups

• tick boxes

• command buttons

• text boxes

• lists

• scroll bars

FIGURE 6 – EXAMPLE OF DIALOG BOX WITH LIST DISPLAY


Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
SINGLE TONE
DIP 5000 Page 19/70

7. FUNCTIONALITIES DESCRIPTION
7.1 <Tools> Menu

Identification: Opens a pop up window, asking you to enter a password to set your user
level. Access to a higher user level is password protected.
Back to level 0: this will return you to priority level 0.
Disconnect: Disconnects the HMI from the DIP 5000.
Exit: Closes the DIP 5000 HMI application.
7.2 <File> Menu

File>New: Creates a configuration file from a default configuration in a DIP 5000 version
(Single tone or Dual tone). When selected, a pop-up window opens asking you to choose
DIP 5000 version (Single tone or Dual tone).

File>Open: Selecting this menu allows the following to be opened:

• Event files (*.events),

• Alarm files (*.alarms),

• Counter files (*.cnter),

• Config files: configuration file.


DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 20/70 DIP 5000

7.3 <DIP> Menu

This menu is used to read the following parameters on the local unit:

• Configuration: Read the configuration file from the DIP 5000and modify all
configuration parameters,
• Hardware configuration: Read hardware configuration parameters,
• Maintenance: Used to launch measurements, adjust levels, force values,
• Alarms snapshot: Provides a view of the current alarm status,
• Input/Output: Read input and output status,
• Version: Read firmware versions,
• Date Setup: Read and write the date and time on the unit,
• Reset: Perform hardware and software resets on the unit.
7.4 <History> Menu

• Events: Read and display the event log,

• Alarms: Read and display the alarm log,

• Counters: Display the status of input/ouput commands counters. Counter Information


can be saved and printed,

• Erase: Delete the event and alarm logs via two sub menus <Erase Events> and
<Erase Alarms>.
7.5 <Test> Menu

⇒ This menu performs a Link test on the unit.


Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
SINGLE TONE
DIP 5000 Page 21/70

8. OPERATING THE HMI DIP 5000 SINGLE TONE


8.1 Launching the HMI
The HMI is launched by clicking on:
Start>Programs>HMIDIP5K>HMIDIP5K>
or by clicking the Desktop HMIDIP5K shortcut.
Immediately after program initialisation, you can:

• Connect to a DIP 5000

• Create a confirguration

• Modify an existing, saved confirguration


8.2 Connecting to a DIP 5000

To connect to a DIP 5000, click on the Connect icon or open the <Tools> menu:

and pick <Connect local> which will open the <Connection> window:
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 22/70 DIP 5000

You can pick among the ports automatically detected by the HMI or shortcuts previously
defined. To create a new shortcut, right-click in the desired location of the Favorites tree.

8.3 Operating <Tools> Menu


The <Tools> menu is used to:

• grant a level to a user according to a password,

• reset the user level to 0,

• disconnect the HMI from the DIP 5000,

• exit the HMI.


Modifying the user level is possible by entering the associated password in the password
window of the identification menu.

FIGURE 7 – TOOLS MENU


Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
SINGLE TONE
DIP 5000 Page 23/70

8.3.1 Entering a password


When the HMI is opened the level user granted is 0 for which no password is required.
To access the higher level 2, the user must enter a password. For more details about user
level and password management see § 4. and § 5.
To enter a password:
1. Select Tools> Identification, the following window opens:

2. Enter the password.

3. Check the level granted in the status bar.


8.3.2 Change firmware password
The DIP 5000 firmware can, but need not, have a password. If you are already at user
level 2, the menu will look like this:

4. You can change the firmware password with this option. Bear in mind that if you lose
the firmware password, the motherboard (UT148) will have to be returned to the
factory.
8.3.3 Returning to level 0
The user level can be reset to 0 at any moment.
To set user level to 0
1. Select Tools> Back to level 0

2. Check for user in the bottom bar.


8.3.4 Disconnecting the HMI
1. Select Tools> Disconnect
2. The HMI is disconnected, the <DIP>, <History> Menu disappears.
The following top bar icons are greyed and inaccessible:
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 24/70 DIP 5000

8.3.5 Connecting the HMI to the DIP 5000


Select Tools>Connect Local to open the <Connect> window:

The HMI has scanned the machine for all RS 232C ports which are listed under "Default".
You can also define names of groups and/or individual ports by right-clicking on elements of
the "Favorites" tree leading to a structure like this:

Select the desired port and click on the "Connect" button.


When the HMI is connected, check that:

• The DIP and History Menu are accessible,

• Information is displayed in the bottom status bar (granted ),

• All icons are coloured and accessible.


Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
SINGLE TONE
DIP 5000 Page 25/70

8.3.6 Exiting the HMI


Select Tools>Exit
A confirmation messages appears

Answer .
The HMI closes.
8.4 General configuration procedure
The configuration of a new unit or reconfiguration of an existing unit involves creating a
configuration file:

• Select File > New or File > Open,

• Select the DIP 5000 Single Tone version in the < Version selection > Window after
clicking File > New,

• Modify the configuration displayed or create a new configuration,

• Save the changed configuration (File>Save).


Configuration file creation is available regardless of PC/DIP 5000 connection status, and
from level 0. As this availability enables off-site creation and the preparation of configuration
libraries, it optimises commissioning and maintenance operations.
The configuration of the unit can be modified by reading the configuration:

• Select DIP>Configuration

• Modify the displayed configuration,

• Save the changed configuration (File>Save).


DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 26/70 DIP 5000

8.5 Creating a Configuration File>New>


This menu option will create a new configuration on the basis of a default configuration. This
configuration can be modified, saved for later use (even from level 0) or sent to the unit (at
level2).
1. Select the File>New menu opens a pop-up window <Version Selection> requesting the
DIP 5000 version.

2. Select <Single tone> in the scroll-down menu and click OK.


After the DIP 5000 version has been selected, a default configuration window opens.

FIGURE 8 – MAIN CONFIGURATION WINDOW


Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
SINGLE TONE
DIP 5000 Page 27/70

8.5.1 Configuration Window description


The configuration parameters are divided in 5 Tabs:

• General

• Sender

• Receiver

• Input/Output

• Alarms
This configuration window is used to access to the following parameters:

• Number of Commands

• Version (Normal/Enhanced)

• Comments

• HMI Speed

• Link test

• Logical Address

• IRIG-B State

• Sender parameters

• Receiver parameters

• Input/Output parameters

• Alarms
8.5.2 Configuration Window Toolbar

Open Synthesis Window

Save the configuration


D0176ENa

FIGURE 9 – TOOLBAR
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 28/70 DIP 5000

Clicking the button opens a Synthesis Window displaying the DIP 5000 Configuration
parameters in text format:

FIGURE 10 – CONFIGURATION SYNTHESIS WINDOW


Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
SINGLE TONE
DIP 5000 Page 29/70

8.6 Configuring General parameters


Open the <Configuration> window (see § 8.5).

FIGURE 11 – CONFIGURATION GENERAL TAB


8.6.1 Configuring Number of Commands

Select the value corresponding to your configuration by checking the corresponding radio
button.
8.6.2 Configuring Version
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 30/70 DIP 5000

Select the version:

• Normal: in this mode the power available for a signal command is unchanging, and
linked to the number of commands. Total available power is uniformly distributed
between the number of commands.

• Enhanced: the power available for a command signal is automatically adjusted


according to the number of command signals to send at a given time, and of the
acceptable power on the medium. So all available power for a command is allocated
depending on variable conditions.
8.6.3 Configuring IRIG-B

In case of IRIG-B module presence, check ON.


Connect the GPS equipment to the P20 connector.
Synchronize the DIP date to the external source (one synchronisation signal every 30
seconds).
8.6.4 Configuring HMI speed

Select the 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, or 9600 bps values by checking the corresponding radio
button,
8.6.5 Configuring Logical Address
Range 0 to 255. The sender and the receiver units must have the same logical address.
8.6.6 Entering Comments

Enter the Source Station, the Destination Station, and your comments in compliance with
the following rules:

• Source and destination stations: 20 characters maximum.

• Comments: 70 characters maximum.


Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
SINGLE TONE
DIP 5000 Page 31/70

8.6.7 Configuring Link Test

The Link Test feature is used to automatically and periodically check the transmission
medium between the sender and the receiver, by sending a message in a loop.
To schedule transmission tests:
Select test periodicity by checking the corresponding button:

• Daily: in this case, enter the hour and minutes using the scroll-down window

• Hourly: in this case, enter the minutes using the scroll-down window.

8.6.8 Sending a General Parameters Configuration file to the DIP 5000


When you have completed the General Parameters configuration as described above:

Click the button the following window opens:

The DIP 5000 resets.


Check for the correct status of LEDs after the reset. Note that the user level is reset to 0
every time a configuration file is sent to a DIP 5000 unit, so if you were at level 2, you will
have to re-enter your password.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 32/70 DIP 5000

8.7 Configuring <Sender> parameters


To configure <Sender> parameters:
Open the <Configuration> window (see § 8.5)
Click the <Sender> tab, the following window opens:

FIGURE 12 – SENDER CONFIGURATION TAB


8.7.1 Configuring Guard Source

Select the Guard Source:

• Internal: The Guard source is the DIP unit,

• External: The Guard source comes from an external unit (PLC or other).
NOTE: The <LF Band Guard> parameter is Guard Source parameter
dependent. So the Guard source parameter must first be configured.
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
SINGLE TONE
DIP 5000 Page 33/70

8.7.2 Configuring Sender LF Band

The Bandwidth is a technical characteristic of the medium used corresponding to its


bandwidth capacity for signal transmission.
Depending on the characteristics of the medium, select the appropriate bandwidth via the
Bandwidth scroll-down window.
Possible values are:

• 300 - 2000
• 300 - 2400
• 300 - 3400
Select the Guard via the Guard scroll-down window.
Choices of <Guard> parameter are <Bandwidth> parameter dependent:

• 3680 for the bandwidth 300-3400


• 2600 for the bandwidth 300 -2400
• 2400 or 3680 for the bandwidth 300-2000
8.7.3 Configuring Sender Transmission levels

The Transmission level corresponds to the signal power allocated to a Frequency and to
the Guard.
The value range is -30 dBm to 6 dBm, the display accuracy is 0,1 dBm.
To configure Transmission levels For Guard and Frequency 1 to 4:
Select, using the scrolling button, the Transmission levels in compliance with the following
rule:
The difference between frequency transmission levels must not exceed 16 dBm. If this rule is
not respected, a warning message appears when attempting to save the configuration file.

If this warning message appears, modify the transmission levels in consequence.


DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 34/70 DIP 5000

8.7.4 Configuring Command transmission parameters

The transmission of a signal input command requires the following parameters to be


configured:

• Holding Delay

• Pulsed Mode or not

• Input Valid Delay

• Protection schemes
8.7.4.1 Configuring Sender Holding Delay

Holding Delay Parameter description


The Holding Delay parameter corresponds to the minimum transmission time of a validated
command. If, however, the Pulsed mode box has been checked, this is a maximum value as
shown in the illustration above.
The transmission time is the maximum value between the Holding delay and the input
signal command duration.
Example:
Holding delay: 100 ms.
A first input signal command duration is 5ms.
Holding delay 100 ms> Command duration 5 ms: The command will be transmitted for
100 ms.
A second input command duration is 120 ms.
Input signal command duration 120 ms > Holding delay 100 ms: The command will be
transmitted for 120 ms.
Parameter values
Parameter values are in ms.
Range value 0 to 500 ms.
Procedure
For each command, select the Holding Delay by positioning the scrolling button.
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
SINGLE TONE
DIP 5000 Page 35/70

8.7.4.2 Configuring Sender Input Valid Delay

Input Valid Delay Parameter description


At the receipt end the restitution of a command requires a processing time that varies
according to the chosen protection scheme. To be rebuilt, an input command must be
transmitted during a time at least equal to the processing time.
The Input Valid Delay corresponds to a threshold applied to an input signal command
duration conditioning the activation of the Holding Delay.

• Input signal commands whose duration is inferior to the Input Valid Delay are
validated and transmitted without any prolongation.
Restitution at the receipt end of input commands sent in such condition is not
guaranteed because the transmission time may be less than the processing time
required by the Protection Scheme.

• Input signal commands whose duration is greater than the Input Valid Delay are
validated and transmitted for a minimum duration corresponding to the Holding Delay
parameter.
When the Holding Delay parameter is greater than the processing reception
duration, reception of input command sent in such condition is guaranteed to be
lossless.
Parameter Values
Parameter values are in ms.
Range value 0 to 5 ms.
Example
E.g. holding delay 50ms, input validation delay 5ms:
1. Input signal command 3ms, duration less than the Input valid Delay, the <Holding
Delay> is not taken into account; the command is sent without any prolongation time.
2. Input signal command 6ms, command input duration greater than the Input Valid Delay.
The <Holding Delay> is taken into account and the command is transmitted for the
Holding Delay: 50 ms.
3. Input signal command 60 ms: command input duration greater than the Input Valid
Delay. Signal Input command greater than the <Holding Delay>. The signal input
command is transmitted for 60 ms.
Procedure
Select the Input Valid Delay for each command by positioning the scrolling button.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 36/70 DIP 5000

8.7.4.2.1 Configuring Sender Protection Schemes

Parameter Description
3 protection Schemes are available
Permissive tripping,
Blocking,
Direct tripping.
Permissive tripping commands are always monitored by a protection relay. The circuit
breaker is tripped when receipt of the command coincides with operation of the protection
relay at the receiving end responding to a system fault. The intention of these schemes is to
speed up tripping for faults occurring within the protected zone.
Blocking commands are initiated by a protection element that detects faults external to the
protected zone. Detection of an external fault at the local end of a protected circuit results in
a blocking signal being transmitted to the remote end. At the remote end, receipt of the
blocking signal prevents the remote end protection operating if it had detected the external
fault. The risk of a spurious trip is higher.
Direct tripping, intertrip signals are sent directly to the master trip relay. Receipt of the
command causes circuit breaker operation. The method of communication must be reliable
and secure because any signal detected at the receiving end will cause a trip of the circuit at
that end.
Procedure
For each command select the protection scheme by selecting the value with the scroll down
window.
8.7.5 Sender Transmission parameters configuration procedure
Depending on user needs and of the characteristics of input signals applied to the DIP 5000,
notably their duration, two procedures are available.
8.7.5.1 Procedure Without Input Valid Delay
For each command:
1. Using the scroll-down window select a protection scheme.
Optional:
2. Select a Holding Delay using the scrolling button.

3. Click the button.


4. Give a path for the saved file and name it.
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
SINGLE TONE
DIP 5000 Page 37/70

8.7.5.2 Procedure with Input Valid Delay


For each command
1. Using the scroll-down window select a protection scheme.
2. Using the scroll-down window select the input valid delay

3. Click the button.


NOTE: The <Holding Delay> parameter is automatically set to a minimum
value compatible with the application scheme.
4. Give a path for the saved file and name it.
<Holding Delay>, Input Valid delay , protection schemes parameters are dependent.
If you do not follow the given procedure, by selecting for example <Holding Delay> before
protection schemes incompatibilities can occur.
If incompatibilities are detected when selecting the protection schemes parameter, warning
messages are displayed.
8.7.6 Sending Sender Parameters Configuration to the DIP 5000
When you have completed Sender Parameters configuration as described above:

click the button, the following window opens:

The DIP 5000 resets.


Check for the correct status of the LEDs after the reset.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 38/70 DIP 5000

8.8 Configuring Receiver parameters


To configure Receiver parameters:
Open the <Configuration> window (see § 8.5)
Click the <Receiver> tab, the following window opens:

FIGURE 13 – RECEIVER CONFIGURATION TAB


8.8.1 Configuring LF band

The Bandwidth is a technical characteristic of the medium used corresponding to its signal
transmission capacity.
Depending on the characteristics of the medium, select the appropriate bandwidth via the
Bandwidth scroll-down window.
Possible values are:

• 300-2000,

• 300-400,

• 300-3400.
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
SINGLE TONE
DIP 5000 Page 39/70

The Guard parameter is bandwidth dependent. It is automatically set according to the


Bandwidth parameter:

• 2100-2300 for the 300-2000 frequency,

• 2400-2600 for the 2400-2660 frequency,

• 3500-3800 for the 300-3400 frequency.


8.8.2 Configuring Receiver Input level

Guard Signal
This parameter defines the Guard Signal level.
Parameter values are in dBm.
Value Range -40 to 0 dBm.
Select the Guard Signal input level using the scrolling button.
Commands vs Guard
This parameter corresponds to the relative level between signal commands and the Guard
Signal.
Parameter values are in dB.
Depending on the selected version (normal or enhanced) two values ranges are possible:
0 - 6 dB for the normal version,
0 - 16 db for the enhanced version.
Select the Commands vs Guard using the scrolling button.
NOTE: The Receiver Input level, can also be set from the Maintenance window, manually or
automatically (see § 8.13).
8.8.3 Configuring Receiver Protection Scheme

Parameter description
Three protection type values are available: Permissive, Blocking, and Direct tripping.
For each command, select the Type using the scroll-down window.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 40/70 DIP 5000

8.8.4 Configuring Relay State on AIarm

Parameter description
Idle state: the restitution relay is set to the idle state if an alarm occurs.
Former state: the restitution relay contact stays open or closed, even when an alarm is set.
The alarm has no influence on contact state.
For each command select the Relay State on Alarm using the scroll-down window.
8.8.5 Configuring Receiver Holding Delay

The value range is 0 to 500 ms step 1 ms.


For each command select the <Holding Delay> value using the scrolling button.
8.8.6 Configuring Unblocking parameters

Unblocking
Only command which type is Permissive tripping can be unblocked. Each command can be
unblocked, independently of the others.
For each command to unblock check the corresponding box.
Unblocking Threshold
Parameter values are in dB. The value range is -20 to -10 dB. Display accuracy is ± 0.1dB.

Select the unblocking threshold using the scrolling button value.


Unblocking Delay
Parameter values are in ms. The value range is 5 to 80 ms. Display accuracy is ± 1 ms.
Select the unblocking Delay value using the scrolling button.
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
SINGLE TONE
DIP 5000 Page 41/70

8.8.7 Sending Receiver parameters configuration


When you have complete Receiver Parameters configuration as described above:

Click the button, give a path for the configuration file and name it.

Click the button the following window opens:

The DIP 5000 resets.


Check for the correct status of LEDs after the reset and absence of alarms.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 42/70 DIP 5000

8.9 Configuring Input/Output Parameters


To configure Input/Output parameters:
Open the <Configuration> window (see § 8.5)
Click the Input/Ouput tab the following window opens:

FIGURE 14 – INPUT/OUTPUT CONFIGURATION TAB


8.9.1 Configuring I/O board

Select the I/O Boards parameter corresponding to your hardware configuration by checking
the corresponding radio button.
For 2 commands select 1 board,
For more than 2 commands, 1 board or two boards can be selected.
NOTE: If two boards are selected, a Combinatorial Logic on Inputs part is
displayed.
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
SINGLE TONE
DIP 5000 Page 43/70

8.9.2 Configuring Input Filter Delay

Parameter Description
The Input Filter Delay is a threshold applied to the input command signal. It is used to
exclude high noise-level signals which could be taken as input signal commands.
Signal commands with a duration less than the Input Filter Delay duration are not
transmitted.
Signal commands with a duration greater than the Input Filter Delay duration are validated
and transmitted. The propagation time of the command transmitted via the Input Filter Delay
increases of the Input Filter Delay.
Parameter value
Range 0 to 3 ms in 1 ms steps.
Procedure
Select the value using the scrolling button for each command to which an Input Filter Delay
is to be applied.
8.9.3 Configuring Combinatorial logic on inputs
This panel is only available having configured 4 commands/2 boards.

FIGURE 15 - COMBINATORIAL LOGIC ON INPUTS

It is used to allocate commands with logical associations between input signals.


DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 44/70 DIP 5000

For each command the possible choices are:

• IN1: The command is allocated to the input signal connected to the IN1 input (P10
connector)

• IN2: The command is allocated to the input signal connected to the IN2 input (P10
connector)

• IN1 or IN2: The command is allocated to the result of the OR operator applied to the
input signal connected to the IN1 input (P10 connector) and the IN2 input (P10
connector)

• IN1 and IN2: The command is allocated to the result of the AND operator applied to
the input signal connected to the IN1 input (P10 connector) and the IN2 input (P10
connector)
For command 2 same explanation replacing IN1 by IN3 and IN2 by IN4.
For command 3 same explanation replacing IN1 by IN5 IN2 by IN6 and P10 connector by
P12 connector.
For command 4 same explanation replacing IN1 by IN7 IN2 by IN8 and P10 connector by
P12 connector.
8.9.4 Sending Input/Output Configuration
When you have completed Input/Output Parameters configuration as described above:

Click the button, give a path for the configuration file and name it.

Click the button the following window opens:

The DIP 5000 resets.


Check for the correct status of LEDs after the reset and that there are no alarms.
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
SINGLE TONE
DIP 5000 Page 45/70

8.10 Configuring Alarm Parameters


To configure Alarm parameters:
Open the <Configuration> window (see § 8.5)
Click the Alarms tab.

FIGURE 16 – CONFIGURATION ALARMS TAB


8.10.1 Configuring Alarm on External Input

The External alarm input comes from an external device, PLC or other.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 46/70 DIP 5000

The external unit and the DIP 5000 must be interconnected with a special connection cable
supporting alarm wires.
Parameter values are in seconds. The value range is 0 to 2.5 s. The display accuracy is
± 0.1s.

To configure Alarm on External Input


1. Check the Alarm on external input box,
2. Check the alarm level Minor or Major button.
8.10.2 Configuring Input Command Duration alarm
This alarm is set if the input command signal duration is more than the parameter value.
Parameter values are in seconds from 0.5 to 10 s. The display accuracy is ± 0.1s.

To configure Input Command Duration Alarm:


1. Check the Input Command Duration Alarm box,
2. Select the parameter value using the scrolling button,
3. Select the alarm level, Minor or Major.
8.10.3 Configuring Loss of Signal Alarm

This alarm occurs if the Signal level, measured through internal digital filter, is under a
Threshold during a Delay.
Threshold
Defines the level under which an alarm is set.
Parameter values are in dBr. The value range is -16 to -6 dBr. Display accuracy is ± 0.1 dBr

Delay
Defines the low level signal delay from which an alarm is set.
Parameter values are in seconds. The value range is 1 to 10 s. The display accuracy is
± 0.1s.

To configure Loss of Signal Alarm


1. Select the Threshold level using the scrolling button.
2. Select the delay using the scrolling button.
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
SINGLE TONE
DIP 5000 Page 47/70

8.10.4 Configuring Alarm Output delay

Alarm output delay:


Closing of the contact relay can be delayed, possible delay values are the following:
0,
2,5 s
5s
10 s.
For each Relay 1 and 2, Major and Minor alarm:
Select the delay by positioning the scrolling button.
8.10.5 Sending Alarm Configuration
When you have finished Alarm Parameters configuration as described above:

Click the button, give a path for the configuration file and name it.

Click the button the following window opens:

The DIP 5000 resets.


Check for the correct status of leds after the reset and the absence of alarms.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 48/70 DIP 5000

8.11 File <Configuration> menu

Open Synthesis Window


Changes can be saved from this menu,
Send the configuration to teleprotection
Exit takes you to the basic window.
D0177ENa

FIGURE 17 – CONFIGURATION EXIT MENU


This menu allows configuration files to be edited, saved, sent, and closed.
8.11.1 Editing a configuration file
The Edit menu is used to display a parameter values synthesis window.
To edit a configuration file from the <Configuration> window:
Select File > Edit

Or Click the button and the following window opens:


Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
SINGLE TONE
DIP 5000 Page 49/70

8.11.2 Saving a configuration file

Save: This menu opens a standard dialog box of Windows® allowing the displayed
configuration to be saved in a file.
To save a configuration file:
Select File > Save
Give a path and a name to the configuration file.
8.11.3 Sending a configuration file
Send: This menu, accessible from user level 2, with connection established, is used to send
the displayed configuration to the unit. After receiving the configuration file, the unit resets.
When the unit restarts the sent configuration is taken into account.
A window configuration is opened in the HMI using the menus <File><New> or
<File><Open> or <DIP><Configuration>.
Once modified, the configuration file can be sent to the unit by the menu <File><Send> or
the <Send> button.
To send a configuration file:

Select File > Send or click the button.


The following window opens:

The DIP 5000 resets.


Check for the correct status of leds after the reset and the absence of alarms.
8.11.4 Closing a configuration file
Exit: This menu closes the configuration window.
To close a configuration window:
Select File > Exit
8.12 Operating the <DIP> Menu
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 50/70 DIP 5000

The <DIP> menu may be used to display:

• Configuration,

• Hardware configuration,

• Maintenance

• Alarms Snapshot

• Input/Output

• Versions

• Date Setup
The DIP Menu also allows the <Reset> command to be launched (from user level 2).
8.12.1 Reading the Configuration
To read the configuration parameters of the connected DIP 5000:
Select DIP> Configuration and the DIP 5000 Configuration is displayed:

When the configuration window is open, the user can modify configuration parameters (see
§ 8.6 and following).
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
SINGLE TONE
DIP 5000 Page 51/70

8.12.2 Reading Hardware Configuration


To read the Hardware Configuration
Select DIP> Hardware Config
The following <Hardware> window opens:

FIGURE 18 – HARDWARE CONFIGURATION WINDOW


This hardware window shows the hardware configuration, installed devices are readable and
the corresponding box is checked. Uninstalled devices are greyed and unreadable.
8.12.3 Reading Versions
This menu enables you to read the firmware version of EPLD and DSP.
To read the Version:
Select DIP>Versions
The following window opens:

FIGURE 19 – VERSION WINDOW


DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 52/70 DIP 5000

8.12.4 Reading the Alarm Snapshot


To read the alarm states in the Alarms Snapshots:
Select DIP> Alarm Snapshot

FIGURE 20 – ALARM SNAPSHOT WINDOW


8.12.5 Reading the Input/Output States
To read the Input Output States:
Select DIP> Input/Output
The following Input Output States window opens:

FIGURE 21 – INPUT/OUTPUT WINDOW


The <Inputs/Outputs state> is the representation of the Acquisitions state and the
Commands Restitutions state, with two possible states < Active and Inactive>.

− Inactive Command= Inputs in Black and Outputs in Blue

− Active Command = Inputs and Outputs in Red


Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
SINGLE TONE
DIP 5000 Page 53/70

Example of active command:

A signal command is active on IN1, the corresponding input is red,


The signal is transmitted, Tx C1 in red,
The Command Restitution state R1 is active and red.
8.13 Operating <DIP><Maintenance> menus
The <DIP>< Maintenance > menu enables the following:

• switching to maintenance or normal mode,

• line and relay unlocking,

• local loopback,

• transmission, output or alarm forcing.


To access to the Maintenance menus:
Select DIP>Maintenance and the following window opens:

FIGURE 22 – MAINTENANCE LEVELS


Only Input levels are accessible when accessing Maintenance menu at level 0.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 54/70 DIP 5000

In this case only the Levels Tab is accessible.


Accessing from user level 2 allows output level settings, manual, or automatic level
adjustment. A supplementary Force/Lock/Loop tab giving access to force and loop
commands is available.

8.13.1 Switching to Maintenance Normal Mode and vice-versa

FIGURE 23 – MAINTENANCE MENU


To switch from Maintenance to Normal mode
Select Mode > Normal mode
Only the <Levels> tab is available.
To switch from Normal mode to Maintenance mode
Select Mode> Maintenance.
In Maintenance mode, the tab <Force\Lock\loop> becomes available.
8.13.2 Maintenance status bar
The maintenance status bar displays:

• line status (locked/unlocked)

• relay status (locked/unlocked)

• loopback status on/off.

FIGURE 24 – MAINTENANCE STATUS BAR


Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
SINGLE TONE
DIP 5000 Page 55/70

8.13.3 Reading Input Level Measurement

This Panel, accessible from user level 2, shows the Input level graphically, as well as
numerically in the top part of the panel.
The range of displayed values is -45 to 15 dBr, 0 dBr is the nominal receiver alignment
value. Display accuracy is ± 0.1 dBr.

Clicking the button refreshes the values displayed.


Clicking the Autorefresh box causes the information displayed to be refreshed periodically.
8.13.4 Configuring Ouput Levels Setting

This Panel, accessible from user level 2, is used to set the DIP 5000 frequencies and guards
output levels.
The value range is -30 dBm to 6 dBm with an accuracy of ± 0.1 dBm accuracy.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 56/70 DIP 5000

Procedure
For the Guard frequency and Frequencies 1 to 4:
Select the output level by positioning the scrolling button.

When you have finished, click the button.


8.13.5 Configuring Receiver level
8.13.5.1 Manually

This panel, accessible from user level 2 is used to adjust receiver level.
Guard Frequency
The received level of the guard frequencies is directly given in dBm.
This level can be adjusted to between - 45 dBm and +15dBm.
Display accuracy is ± 0.1 dBm.

Relative Level commands/guard


The relative level commands/guard is given in dB.
This level can be adjusted between 0 and +6dB in normal mode and 0 and +16dB in
enhanced mode.
Adjustments are made by taking the output level and the attenuation of the medium into
account.
The display accuracy is ± 0.1 dBm.

The settings for Guard and Relative Level Commands Guards are independent and the
settings values must be sent separately.
Procedure
Using the scrolling button windows, select the Guard Receive level.

Click the button.


Position the scrolling button to select the Relative Level Commands Guards.

Click the button.


To save your settings after a reset see § 8.13.5.3.
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
SINGLE TONE
DIP 5000 Page 57/70

8.13.5.2 Automatic Adjust

The button is accessible from user level 2.


This command launches receiver alignment.
This alignment is automatic according to the received level of the guard frequency. At the
end of alignment, the received level of the guard frequency will change.
To launch Automatic adjust:

Click the button.


The following window is displayed to show that automatic adjust has started:

When the adjustment is complete, the following message is displayed:

Click the button.


To save your settings after a reset, see the next paragraph.
8.13.5.3 Saving output and receiver level settings
Output and receiver level settings (manual or automatic) are lost after a reset.
When you have completed your settings, close the maintenance window to keep them:
A pop up window appears:

Answer .
A message informing the user of DIP 5000 reset is displayed.
The settings are now stored in the flash memory and will be active after a reset.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 58/70 DIP 5000

8.13.6 Operating Maintenance Force/Lock/Loop


This tab is accessible from user level 2 and in maintenance mode.
To access the Force/Lock/Loop window, open the Maintenance window (see § 8.13) and
select the Force/Lock/Loop tab.

FIGURE 25 – MAINTENANCE FORCE/LOCK/LOOP TAB


8.13.6.1 Configuring Unlock Loop Back:

Loop
In this mode, transmission is looped on reception even if the transmission media access is
locked.
Procedure
To activate/deactivate the loop:
Select Active or Inactive by checking the corresponding radio button.
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
SINGLE TONE
DIP 5000 Page 59/70

Unlock
The states for line AF and contact relay are:

• Unlocked

• Locked
Unlocking Line AF: This state is used to connect the DIP 5000 transmitter to the
transmission line. This operating mode introduces some risks of unwanted commands since
the operator can simulate the acquisition of a command.
Locking Line AF: This state is used to disconnect the DIP 5000 transmitter from the
transmission line. The operator can then simulate command acquisition without any risk.
Unlocking Contact relay: When this state is activated, the output command relays states
comply with the command conditions present on the reception line. This operating mode
introduces some risks of local unwanted commands in the event of loopback.
Locking Contact Relay: When this state is activated, the output command relays are forced
to the idle state, whatever the command conditions present on the reception line.
Procedure
To unlock Line AF:
Check the Line AF box
To lock Line AF
Un-check the line AF box
To unlock Contact Relay
Check the Contact Relay box
To lock Contact relay
Un-check the Contact Relay box
Once the Loop and Unlock parameters are configured:

Click the button,


Check the update status of your settings in the bottom bar:

8.13.6.1.1 Transmitter Forcing


DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 60/70 DIP 5000

The HMI does not work like a simulator. In particular, forcing


transmits real output commands and command transmission.
Therefore, careless use of these commands may have major
consequences on operation.
This panel is used to send frequencies on unlocked lines referring to various states; standby,
command, or test message. To use the feature, the recopy relays must always be unlocked.
To force a frequency:
Check the corresponding radio button.

Click the force button .

The forced frequency turns red:

To stop forcing, click the button.


8.13.6.2 Forcing Restitution Relay

This panel is used to force the state of the output command relays on the local unit,. The
output command relays will be activated only if the relays are unlocked. The recopy relays
must be always unlocked.
To force an Output Relay:
Check the corresponding Command box

Click the force button

The forced command turns red:

To stop forcing, click the button.


Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
SINGLE TONE
DIP 5000 Page 61/70

8.13.6.3 PLC Command forcing

Forcing Transmission reception


When signal commands are sent or received via the PLC, transmission/reception of other
signals can be blocked so that all the power is available for signal commands. Blocking
transmission and reception signals are sent with signal commands to activate the blocking
feature.
Forcing PLC commands activates the transmission /reception blocking feature, to check its
operational state.
To check PLC Emission blocking:
Check the Emission active radio button

Click the button.

The emission turns to red


Using a multimeter, check the contact relay Pin 3-10 of the P18 connector which must be
closed.

To stop forcing click the button.


To check PLC Reception blocking:
Check the Reception active radio button

Click the button,

The reception turns red


Using a multimeter, check the contact relay Pin 5 of the P18 connector which must be
closed.

To stop forcing, click the button.


Forcing Active Inactive
When a DIP becomes inactive, contact relay 7-14 of the P18 connector closes to inform
PLC. Forcing Inactivate simulates the inactive state of the DIP.
To force the inactive state of the DIP:
Check the inactive radio button

The inactive turns red .


DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 62/70 DIP 5000

Click the button.


Using a multimeter, check the contact relay 5-12 of the P18 connector which must be closed.
In command
This checks for presence of the external alarm between Pin 6-13 of the connector P18.

In presence of an external alarm, active turns yellow


If there is no external alarm, inactive is green .
8.13.6.4 Forcing alarms

To force alarms:
Check the box for the Alarms to be forced, Major, Minor or both.

Click the force button .


The other parts of the window become greyed and inaccessible.
Check that the alarm status LEDs show an alarm.

To stop forcing click the button.


Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
SINGLE TONE
DIP 5000 Page 63/70

8.14 Setting the Date


The DIP>Date Setup menu is used to read or set the DIP 5000 date.
To set the date select DIP>Date Setup, the following windows opens:

Write the date on teleprotection


(either by recopying date and time from
the PC or by sending some date and time chosen by the user).
D0179ENa

Set the date in the PC Time Date part of the window,


When date information has been entered,

Click on the button to copy PC Time Date settings in the DIP 5000 part.

NOTE: Viewing and date setup is also possible clicking on the button
from the top toolbar.
8.15 Resetting the DIP
To reset the DIP 5000 from the DIP menu:
Select DIP> Reset
A confirmation message pop-up window is displayed:

Answer .
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 64/70 DIP 5000

The following window appears to inform the user that a reset is being performed.

After restarting of the DIP 5000, check the correct status of the LEDS and that there are no
alarms.
8.16 Operating <History> Menu

There are two history information categories:

• undated (counters)

• dated by the internal clock (events/alarms).


The <History> menu is used to display:

• the Event log

• the Alarm log

• Counters
The <History> menu also allows the events and alarms buffers to be erased.
WARNING: AFTER CLEARING THE BUFFERS THE INFORMATION CANNOT BE
RECOVERED
8.16.1 Reading Events
To read Events:
Select History>Events the following message is displayed while events are being loaded:
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
SINGLE TONE
DIP 5000 Page 65/70

The Events Window is then displayed:

FIGURE 26 – EXAMPLE OF READING THE EVENT LIST


The File Menu is used to save or print event files (*.event) and to exit from the Events
window:

The record and print buttons respectively allow files to be recorded and printed.

The refresh button refreshes the events list.


Event files (*.event) can be opened using the File menu of the Main window:

Internal time-stamped events, are recorded in a stack limited to 1785 events. When the stack
is full, any further event replaces the oldest one.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 66/70 DIP 5000

8.16.2 Reading Alarms


To read alarms:
Select History>Alarm the following message is displayed while alarms are being loaded:

The Alarm Windows is then displayed.

Retrieve alarms queue


D0181ENa

FIGURE 27 – EXAMPLE OF READING THE ALARM LIST


Internal time-stamped alarms are recorded in a stack with a capacity limited to 1785 alarm
events. When the stack is full, any further alarm replaces the oldest one.
The File menu is used to save or print alarm files (.alarms) and to exit the Alarms window.

The record and print buttons respectively save and print alarm files.
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
SINGLE TONE
DIP 5000 Page 67/70

The refresh button refreshes the alarm list.


Alarm files (*.alarms) can be opened using the File menu of the Main window:

8.16.3 Reading Local Command Counters


To display Local Command Counters:
Select History>Counters
The following window is then displayed:

FIGURE 28 – EXAMPLE OF READING COUNTERS STATEMENT


Use the File Menu to save or print Counter files (*.cnter) and to exit from the Counter
window:

The record and print buttons respectively allow files to be recorded and printed.
Counter files (*.cnter) can be opened using the File menu of the Main window:

The stack capacity of counters is limited to 65535.


DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 68/70 DIP 5000

8.16.4 Erasing Events


The Erase Events option will delete all entries from the event list.
NOTE: Erasing events completely removes them from the system, and the
action cannot be undone. If you might need to view the events at a
later date, use the File>Save option to save a copy of the event list
before using Erase>Events.
To delete the currently displayed event list:
Select History> Erase> Erase Events

A confirmation window is then displayed:

Answer
Check the event file is empty by selecting History> Events.
8.16.5 Erasing Alarms
The Erase Alarms option will delete all entries from in the alarm list.
NOTE: Erasing alarms completely removes them from the system, and the
action cannot be undone. If you might need to view the alarms at a
later date, use the File>Save option to save a copy of the alarm list
before using Erase>Events.
To delete the currently displayed alarm list.
Select History > Erase> Erase Alarms
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
SINGLE TONE
DIP 5000 Page 69/70

The following pop-up message window is then displayed:

Answer
Check the Alarm file is empty by selecting History> Alarms
8.17 Operating <Test> Menu

Link test is used to check the ability of the DIP 5000 link to send and receive bidirectional
commands.
Launching Link Test automatically can also be scheduled daily or Hourly see § 8.6.7 for
settings.
Command processing has priority on Link Test.
To launch Link Test:
Select Test> Link Test
In case of bad test results, a DIP 5000 failure is declared.
8.18 Help Menu

This menu allows the Help file to be accessed and the HMI software version to be read.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 70/70 DIP 5000

8.18.1.1.1 Reading the HMI software version


To read the HMI software version:
Select Help > About the following window opens:
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DUAL TONE
DIP 5000

HUMAN MACHINE
INTERFACE

PART 2: DIP 5000 ANALOG DUAL TONE


Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DUAL TONE
DIP 5000 Page 1/68

CONTENTS

1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 8

2. HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL 9


2.1 Information presentation 9
2.2 Example in a paragraph 9

3. OVERVIEW 10
3.1 Foreword 10
3.2 System Required 10
3.3 Installing the HMI 10

4. USER LEVELS AND PASSWORDS 11


4.1 User level structure 11
4.2 Menus 12

5. DIP 5000 PASSWORD MANAGEMENT 13


5.1 Rules for Password Creation 13
5.2 Accessing the Password Manager Menus with the <Password> Menu 13
5.3 Modifying the Password Manager password with the Password Menu 14
5.4 Creating User Password with the <Create> Menu 15
5.5 Managing the Password listing with the Menu <List> 15
5.6 Exiting the Password Manager 15

6. INTERFACE DESCRIPTION 16
6.1 Main screen 16
6.2 Header bar 16
6.3 Menu bar 17
6.4 Toolbar 17
6.5 Status bars 17
6.6 Work and dialog zone 18

7. FUNCTIONALITIES DESCRIPTION 19
7.1 <Tools> Menu 19
7.2 <File> Menu 19
7.3 <DIP> Menu 20
7.4 <History> Menu 20
7.5 <Test> Menu 20

8. OPERATING THE HMI DIP 5000 DUAL TONE 21


8.1 Launching the HMI 21
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 2/68 DIP 5000

8.2 Operating <Tools> Menu 21


8.2.1 Entering a password 21
8.2.2 Change firmware password 22
8.2.3 Returning to level 0 22
8.2.4 Disconnecting the HMI 22
8.2.5 Connecting the HMI 22
8.2.6 Connecting the HMI to the DIP 5000 22
8.2.7 Exiting the HMI 23
8.3 Operating <File> Menu 24
8.4 General Configuration Procedure 24
8.5 Creating Configuration File> New 25
8.5.1 Configuration Window description 26
8.5.2 Configuration window toolbar 26
8.6 Configuring General Parameters 27
8.6.1 Configuring HMI speed 27
8.6.2 Configuring Logical Adress 27
8.6.3 Entering comments 28
8.6.4 Configuring Link Test 28
8.6.5 Configuring IRIG-B 29
8.6.6 Events and Alarms Limitation 29
8.7 Configuring Sender Parameter 29
8.7.1 Configuring LF band 30
8.7.2 Configuring Sender Transmission levels 30
8.7.3 Configuring Command transmission parameters 31
8.7.4 Sender Transmission parameter configuration procedure 33
8.7.5 Sending Sender Parameter Configuration to the DIP 5000. 34
8.8 Configuring Receiver Parameters 35
8.8.1 Configuring LF band 35
8.8.2 Configuring Receiver Input Level 36
8.8.3 Configuring Receiver Protection Schemes 37
8.8.4 Configuring Relay State on AI 37
8.8.5 Configuring Receiver Holding Delay 38
8.8.6 Configuring Unblocking parameters 38
8.8.7 Sending Receiver Parameter Configuration 38
8.9 Configuring Input/output Parameters 39
8.9.1 Configuring I/O Boards 39
8.9.2 Configuring Input Filter Delay 40
8.9.3 Configuring Combinatorial Logic on Inputs 40
8.9.4 Sending Input/Output Configuration 41
8.10 Configuring Alarm Parameters 42
8.10.1 Configuring Alarm on External Input 42
8.10.2 Configuring Input Duration Command Alarm 43
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DUAL TONE
DIP 5000 Page 3/68

8.10.3 Configuring Loss of Signal Alarm 43


8.10.4 Configuring Noise Alarm 44
8.10.5 Configuring on Link test failure 44
8.10.6 Configuring Locking alarm 44
8.10.7 Configuring Alarm Outputs Delay 45
8.10.8 Sending Alarm Configuration 45
8.11 File Configuration Menus 46
8.11.1 Editing a configuration file 46
8.11.2 Saving a configuration file 46
8.11.3 Sending a configuration file to the unit 47
8.11.4 Closing a configuration file 47
8.12 Operating the <DIP> Menu 47
8.12.1 Reading the unit's configuration parameters 48
8.12.2 Reading the hardware Configuration 49
8.12.3 Reading Version 49
8.12.4 Reading the Alarm snapshots 50
8.12.5 Reading the Input/Output Status 50
8.13 Operating DIP Maintenance Menus 52
8.13.1 Switching Maintenance /Normal mode 52
8.13.2 Maintenance status bar 53
8.13.3 Reading Input level measurement 53
8.13.4 Configuring Output Levels settings 54
8.13.5 Configuring Receiver Level 54
8.13.6 Saving output level and receiver level settings 56
8.13.7 Configuring Maintenance Force loopback 56
8.13.8 Configuring input/output Loopback 57
8.13.9 Transmitter forcing 58
8.13.10 Forcing Restitution Relay 59
8.13.11 Forcing PLC 59
8.13.12 Alarm Forcing 60
8.14 Setting the Date 61
8.15 Resetting the DIP 62
8.16 Operating the < History> Menu 62
8.16.1 Reading Events 63
8.16.2 Reading Alarms Window 64
8.16.3 Reading counters 65
8.16.4 Erasing Events 66
8.16.5 Erasing Alarms 66
8.17 <Test> Menu 67
8.18 <Help> menu 67
8.18.1 Reading the HMI software version 68
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 4/68 DIP 5000

LIST OF FIGURES

FIGURE 1 – MAIN SCREEN BEFORE PC/TELEPROTECTION CONNECTION 16


FIGURE 2 – EXAMPLE OF MAIN SCREEN AFTER PC/ DIP 5000N CONNECTION 16
FIGURE 3 – MENU BAR 17
FIGURE 4 – TOOLBAR 17
FIGURE 5 – STATUS BAR 17
FIGURE 6 – EXAMPLE OF DIALOG BOX WITH LIST DISPLAY 18
FIGURE 7 – TOOLS MENU 21
FIGURE 8 – FILE MENU 24
FIGURE 9 - VERSION SELECTION WINDOW 25
FIGURE 10 - CONFIGURATION GENERAL 25
FIGURE 11 – TOOLBAR 26
FIGURE 12 – CONFIGURATION SYNTHESIS WINDOW 27
FIGURE 13 - SENDER CONFIGURATION TAB 29
FIGURE 14 - RECEIVER CONFIGURATION TAB 35
FIGURE 15 - INPUT/OUTPUT CONFIGURATION TAB 39
FIGURE 16 - INPUT/OUTPUT I/O BOARDS 39
FIGURE 17 - INPUT FILTER DELAY 40
FIGURE 18 - COMBINATORIAL LOGIC ON INPUTS 40
FIGURE 19 - CONFIGURATION ALARMS 42
FIGURE 20 – CONFIGURATION EXIT MENU 46
FIGURE 21 – HARDWARE CONFIGURATION WINDOW 49
FIGURE 22 – INPUT/OUTPUT WINDOW 50
FIGURE 23 - MAINTENANCE LEVELS 52
FIGURE 24 - MAINTENANCE FORCE 56
FIGURE 25 HISTORY MENU 62
FIGURE 26 - EVENTS WINDOW DUAL TONE 63
FIGURE 27 - ALARMS WINDOW 64
FIGURE 28 - LOCAL COMMAND COUNTERS WINDOW 65
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DUAL TONE
DIP 5000 Page 5/68

MODIFICATIONS PAGE

VERSION DATE COMMENTS


A11 01/04/2001 ORIGINAL ISSUE
B11 08/23/2004 AREVA LOGO AND ADDITION OF ANALOG
VERSION
C11 07/12/2006 NEW FEATURES AND ADDITIONAL TECHNICAL
EXPLANATIONS
D11 11/14/2007 NEW CHAPTER. TASK ORIENTED WRITING. HMI
CHAPTER SEPARATED IN THREE PARTS DIGITAL,
ANALOG SINGLE TONE ,ANALOG DUAL TONE
E11 02/11/2008 MINOR CORRECTIONS
A22 08/14/2008 PACKAGE RELEASE 2.2
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 6/68 DIP 5000

BLANK PAGE
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DUAL TONE
DIP 5000 Page 7/68

GENERAL
This manual describes the Human-Machine interface of the DIP 5000 teleprotection, i.e. the
software application which enables commissioning, operational use and maintenance of this
unit.

DEFINITIONS
HMI tool for using the DIP 5000 teleprotection (Human-Machine Interface)
Configuration all the characteristics (fixed components) and parameters
(customisation components) of a teleprotection
Configuration File micro-computer file containing all the configuration components of a
teleprotection
Input password password for accessing the ‘Password Manager’ utility
User level all the authorised operations corresponding to the level of
responsibility of a given operator
Level password password for accessing a user level

NOTE: Windows® and PC™ are registered trademarks.


DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 8/68 DIP 5000

1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER


SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY
SECTION DIP5K/EN SS/A11 OR LATER ISSUE, THE TECHNICAL DATA
SECTION AND THE RATING ON THE EQUIMENT RATING LABEL.
THE FRONT PANEL MOUNTED MONITOR DOWNLOAD PORT IS AN
EXTRA-LOW VOLTAGE (ELV) CIRCUIT WHICH PROVIDES BASIC
INSULATION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK. WHEN THE RELAY IS
ENERGISED, THE TERMINALS OF THIS PORT SHOULD NOT BE
TOUCHED SINCE IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF A SINGLE FAULT
CONDITION THERE WOULD BE A VERY LOW PROBABILITY OF AN
ELECTRIC SHOCK. THIS PORT IS DESIGNED TO BE USED FOR
MAINTENANCE PURPOSES, THAT IS MONITORING AND SOFTWARE
DOWNLOADS; IT IS NOT INTENDED TO BE PERMANENTLY
CONNECTED.
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DUAL TONE
DIP 5000 Page 9/68

2. HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL


• The firmware or software version numbers which may appear in illustrations in this
manual may not reflect the latest implemented in the unit; the information is
nonetheless current.
2.1 Information presentation

• Menu Path are indicated: Menu_entry_level1 > Menu_entry_level2>

• Path example:Select File > New

• In the text Menu name are between <> example: menu <DIP>

• Windows name are between <> example: <Windows Input>

• Buttons are shown with screen captures example:


2.2 Example in a paragraph
<HISTORY> menu MENU NAME BETWEEN <>
To Erase Events:
Select History> Erase> Erase Events INDICATES THE PATH

A <Confirmation> window is then displayed:

Answer
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 10/68 DIP 5000

3. OVERVIEW
3.1 Foreword
As it is powerful and easy to use, the DIP 5000 Analogic teleprotection HMI enables local:

• complete commissioning of the unit and control of its levels, without the need for other
tools,

• level adjustment without measuring apparatus,

• filing of configurations (=>rationalisation of commissioning actions),

• time-stamped recording of unit information (=> analysis and statistics),

• interactive and user-friendly maintenance,

• printing of unit parameters.


3.2 System Required

• The HMI runs on PCs fitted equipped with PIII microprocessors and higher, operating
under WINDOWS 2000 or XP. They must have at least 40 Mb free on the hard disk.
3.3 Installing the HMI

• insert the CDROM provided in the reader,

• run the setup.exe file from the <Run> <Menu> in the program manager: D\:set up,

• follow the instructions.


Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DUAL TONE
DIP 5000 Page 11/68

4. USER LEVELS AND PASSWORDS


4.1 User level structure
The DIP 5000 places operations in hierarchical order: some actions have no impact on unit
operation, others, due to their impact on security and operation, require specific
responsibility on the part of the operator.
The HMI is therefore structured in user levels; there are 2 of them, 0 and 2.
Level 0 is the default level on start-up. To enforce this hierarchical arrangement, the
command menus are displayed according to user level.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 12/68 DIP 5000

4.2 Menus

Level
Menus 0 2
File new x x
open x x
Tools Identification x x
To user level 0 x x
connect x x
disconnect x x
exit x x
DIP * configuration x x
hardware configuration x x
version x x
Alarms snapshot x x
input/output x x
Reset x
DIP/Date * read x x
write x
DIP/Maintenance * Input level measure x x
Output levels setting, adjustment receiving x
alignment and automatic alignment
switch to maintenance mode x
Unlocking line (security) x
Unlocking relay (security) x
local loop back x
transmitter forcing x
commands output forcing x
alarms forcing x

Test * Link test x

History * event list x x


alarm list x x
Counter list x x
Clear event file x
Clear alarm file x

Help x x

TABLE 1 – MENU ACCESSIBILITY ACCORDING TO USER LEVEL


* To access these menus, in addition to the required level, you need to be connected.
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DUAL TONE
DIP 5000 Page 13/68

5. DIP 5000 PASSWORD MANAGEMENT


The DIP 5000 Security Password Manager application, associated to the HMI application, is
used to create, modify, read and delete the passwords.
To launch the application, click the desktop icon “DIP 5000 Security” icon or open the
DIP 5000 group of programs and select it.
For security reasons, access to the Password Manager is password protected.
5.1 Rules for Password Creation
Passwords are case sensitive (Upper or lower) and include 1 to 15 characters to be
chosen exclusively from the following:

• upper case (A to Z)

• lower case (a to z)

• numbers (0 to 9)

• ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . /: ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ¨ { | } ~


5.2 Accessing the Password Manager Menus with the <Password> Menu
The <Password> menu enables you to access the Password manager menus <Create> and
<List Passwords >.
To access the Password Manager menus:
1. Launch the DIP 5000 Security application clicking on the desktop icon, the following
Passwords Manager DIP 5000 window opens:

2. Select Password > Input, the following < Password Input> window opens:

3. Enter DIP5000 in upper case in this window (only the first time).
NOTE: Modifying the Password Manager password is recommended after the
first use (see the next paragraph).

4. Click the button.


DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 14/68 DIP 5000

The following window opens:

The <Create> and <List Passwords> menus are available.


5.3 Modifying the Password Manager password with the Password Menu
The password Manager menu allows you to modify the password manager password.
For the first use the password is DIP5000 (in upper case), modifying it after the first use is
highly recommended.
1. Access the Manager Menu (see § 5.2)
2. Select Password>Change the following Window opens:

3. Enter the new password in compliance with the rules for Password Creation (see § 5.1).
Carefully note the new password. If you lose it the application must be reinstalled.

1. Click the button. The following window appears:

2. Confirm the new password by re-entering it.


Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DUAL TONE
DIP 5000 Page 15/68

5.4 Creating User Password with the <Create> Menu


Several passwords can be created.
1. To create User Passwords select < Create>
The following window < Password Entry> opens:

2. Enter the password to be created while complying with the password creation rules (see
§ 5.1). Enter the password again in the “Confirm password” field.

3. Click the button.


5.5 Managing the Password listing with the Menu <List>
To access the Password List, click the Menu <List Passwords> of the Password Manager

The list of passwords is displayed.

1. To Remove a password, select the password line in the list and click the
button. A confirmation message is then displayed, Answer yes.
5.6 Exiting the Password Manager
To exit the password manager and return to the WINDOWS environment select
Password>Exit.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 16/68 DIP 5000

6. INTERFACE DESCRIPTION
The HMI has an integrated environment, using standard WINDOWS tools and processes.
As only the operating modes specific to the HMI will be mentioned in the following, it is
recommended that operators not familiar with WINDOWS refer to the user manual for this
environment.
6.1 Main screen
The main screen is composed of functional zones (see the following figures)

The work zone The status bar The header bar


The toolbar The menu bar D0172ENa

FIGURE 1 – MAIN SCREEN BEFORE PC/TELEPROTECTION CONNECTION

FIGURE 2 – EXAMPLE OF MAIN SCREEN AFTER PC/ DIP 5000N CONNECTION


6.2 Header bar
The header displays the HMI name at the top part of the window.
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DUAL TONE
DIP 5000 Page 17/68

6.3 Menu bar


The operator launches commands via the standard WINDOWS menus, displayed according
to the current user level (password dependent).

FIGURE 3 – MENU BAR


6.4 Toolbar
The operator can launch commands and read information locally via the toolbar shortcuts
Rolling the mouse over a tool displays information on its function.

Open Maintenance Window


Reading the configuration
Reading the alarm queue
Reading the event queue
Reading/Writing the date
Disconnection
Choosing a password
D0173ENa

FIGURE 4 – TOOLBAR
6.5 Status bars
Depending on the user level and the type of operation in progress, status bars can appear
displaying the following information:
The bottom bar displays:

• the connection status (HMI) (connect/disconnect icon)

• the link address

• the transmission speed of serial port (HMI connection)

• the current operating mode (Operation/Maintenance)

• Any alarm present (clicking in this zone opens a window displaying the faults that
have triggered this alarm)

• the user level granted (from 0 to 2 depending on the password)

• a green led indicating the connection status (OK when flashing)

• the DSP firmware version

FIGURE 5 – STATUS BAR


DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 18/68 DIP 5000

6.6 Work and dialog zone


Most of the commands are also launched using the dialog boxes (see figure 6 – Example of
dialog box with list display below). Six standard Window tools are used:

• optional button groups

• tick boxes

• command buttons

• text boxes

• lists

• scroll bars

FIGURE 6 – EXAMPLE OF DIALOG BOX WITH LIST DISPLAY


Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DUAL TONE
DIP 5000 Page 19/68

7. FUNCTIONALITIES DESCRIPTION
7.1 <Tools> Menu

Identification: Opens a pop up window, asking you to enter a password to set your user
level. Access to a higher user level is password protected.
Back to level 0: this will return you to priority level 0.
Disconnect: Selecting this menu disconnects the HMI from the DIP 5000.
Exit: Closes the DIP 5000 HMI application.
7.2 <File> Menu

File>New: Creates a configuration file from a default configuration in a DIP 5000 version
(Single tone or Dual tone). When selected a pop-up window opens asking you to choose
DIP 5000 version (Single tone or Dual tone)

File>Open: Selecting this menu allows the following to be opened:

• Events files (*.events),

• Alarm files (*.alarms)*,

• Counters files (*.cnter),

• Config files: configuration file.


DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 20/68 DIP 5000

7.3 <DIP> Menu

This menu enables you to read the following parameters on the local unit:

• Configuration: Read and modify all configuration parameters,

• Hardware configuration: Read hardware configuration parameters,

• Maintenance: Used to launch measures, adjust levels, forcing…

• Alarms snapshot: Provides a view of the current alarm status,

• Input/Output: Read input and output status.

• Version: Read firmware versions,

• Date Setup: Read and write the date and time on the unit.

• Reset: Enables hardware and software resets on the unit.


7.4 <History> Menu

• Events: Read and display event log,

• Alarms: Read and display alarm log,

• Counters: Display the status of input/ouput commands counters. Counter Information


can be saved and printed.

• Erase: Via two sub menus Erase Events and Erase Alarms, allows event and alarm
logs to be deleted from the unit.
7.5 <Test> Menu

• This menu performs a Link test on the unit.


Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DUAL TONE
DIP 5000 Page 21/68

8. OPERATING THE HMI DIP 5000 DUAL TONE


8.1 Launching the HMI
The HMI is launched by clicking on:
Start>Programs>HMIDIP5K>HMIDIP5K>
Or by clicking the Desktop HMIDIP5K shortcut
8.2 Operating <Tools> Menu
The <Tools> menu is used to:

• grant a level to a user according to a password,

• reset the user level to 0,

• disconnect the HMI from the DIP 5000,

• connect the HMI to the DIP 5000,

• exit the HMI.


Modifying the user level is possible by entering the associated password in the password
window of the identification menu.

FIGURE 7 – TOOLS MENU


8.2.1 Entering a password
When the HMI is opened without entering a password the level user granted is 0.
To access the higher level 2, the user must enter a password. For more details about user
level and password management see § 4. and § 5.
To enter a password:
1. Select Tools> Identification, the following window opens:

2. Enter the password.

3. Check for in the bottom bar.


DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 22/68 DIP 5000

8.2.2 Change firmware password


The DIP 5000 firmware can, but need not, have a password. If you are already at user
level 2, the menu will look like this:

You can change the firmware password with this option. Bear in mind that if you lose the
firmware password, the motherboard (UT148) will have to be returned to the factory.
8.2.3 Returning to level 0
At any moment, user level can be set to 0.
To set user level to 0
1. Select Tools> Back to level 0

2. Check for user in the bottom bar.


8.2.4 Disconnecting the HMI
1. Select Tools> Disconnect
2. The HMI is disconnected, the DIP, History Menu disappears.
The following top bar icons are greyed and inaccessible:

8.2.5 Connecting the HMI


Select Tools>Connect Local
8.2.6 Connecting the HMI to the DIP 5000
Select Tools>Connect Local to open the <Connect> window:
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DUAL TONE
DIP 5000 Page 23/68

The HMI has scanned the machine for all RS 232C ports which are listed under "Default".
You can also define names of groups and/or individual ports by right-clicking on elements of
the "Favorites" tree leading to a structure like this:

Select the desired port and click on the "Connect" button.


The HMI is connected, check that:

• The DIP and History Menu are accessible.

• Information is displayed in the bottom status bar (granted )

• All icons are coloured and accessible.


8.2.7 Exiting the HMI
Select Tools>Exit
A confirmation messages appears

Answer .
The HMI closes.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 24/68 DIP 5000

8.3 Operating <File> Menu


The <File> menu provides access to new and/or existing configuration files.
This menu also allows 4 types of file to be opened:

• *.rtf -> existing configuration file, this selection will open a window (see Figure 10 for
the window display)

• *.alarms -> alarm list file for consultation (see Figure 27 for the window display)

• *.events -> event list file for consultation (see Figure 26 for the window display)

• *.cnter -> counter statement for consultation ( see Figure 28 for the window display)

Creation of a new file based


on a default configuration
Opening an existing configuration
/ alarm queue / event queue/counter
statement file
D0174ENa

FIGURE 8 – FILE MENU


8.4 General Configuration Procedure
The configuration of new unit or reconfiguration of an existing unit involves creating a
configuration file:

• Select File>New or File>Open,

• Select the DIP 5000 Dual Tone version in the <version selection> window after
clicking File>New,

• Modify the configuration displayed or create a new configuration,

• Save the changed configuration (File>Save).


Configuration creation is available regardless of PC/DIP 5000 connection status, and from
level 0. As this availability enables off-site creation and the preparation of configuration
libraries, it optimises commissioning and maintenance operations.
The configuration of the unit can be modified by reading the configuration:

• Select DIP>Configuration

• Modify the displayed configuration,

• Save the changed configuration (File>Save>).


Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DUAL TONE
DIP 5000 Page 25/68

8.5 Creating Configuration File> New


This menu allows a new configuration to be created on the basis of a default configuration.
This configuration can be modified, saved for later use (even at level 0), or sent to the unit
(level2).
Selecting the File>New menu opens a pop up window asking for the DIP 5000 version.
Select Dual tone in the scroll-down window and click OK.

FIGURE 9 - VERSION SELECTION WINDOW


After Selecting “Dual tone” in the scroll-down window the “Configuration” window appears.

FIGURE 10 - CONFIGURATION GENERAL


DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 26/68 DIP 5000

8.5.1 Configuration Window description


The configuration parameters are divided in 5 tabs:

• General

• Sender

• Receiver

• Input/Output

• Alarms
This configuration window is used access to the following parameters:

• Comments

• HMI Speed

• Link test

• Logical address

• IRIG-B State

• Sender parameters

• Receiver parameters

• Input/Output parameters

• Alarms
8.5.2 Configuration window toolbar

Open Synthesis Window

Save the configuration


D0176ENa

FIGURE 11 – TOOLBAR
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DUAL TONE
DIP 5000 Page 27/68

Clicking the button opens a Synthesis Window displaying the DIP 5000 Configuration
parameters in text format:

FIGURE 12 – CONFIGURATION SYNTHESIS WINDOW


8.6 Configuring General Parameters
8.6.1 Configuring HMI speed

Select the 600, 1200, 2400, 4800 or 9600 bps value by checking the corresponding button,
8.6.2 Configuring Logical Adress
Range 0 to 255. The sender and the receiver units must have the same logical address.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 28/68 DIP 5000

8.6.3 Entering comments

Enter the Source Station, the Destination Station, and your comments in compliance with the
following rules:

• Source and destination stations: 20 characters maximum.

• Comments: 70 characters maximum.


8.6.4 Configuring Link Test
The Link Test feature is used to automatically and periodically check the transmission
medium between the sender and the receiver, by sending a message in a loop.
For Link testing, the frequencies combination F3 and F7, reserved exclusively for test
purpose, is used.

To schedule transmission test:


Select the test periodicity by checking the corresponding button:

• Daily: in this case enter the hour and minutes using the scroll-down window

• Hourly: in this case enter the minutes using the scroll-down window.
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DUAL TONE
DIP 5000 Page 29/68

8.6.5 Configuring IRIG-B

In case of IRIG-B module presence, check On.


Connect the GPS equipment to the P20 connector.
Synchronize the DIP date to the external source (one synchronisation signal every 30
seconds).
8.6.6 Events and Alarms Limitation
This must be checked only if the unit will be controlled by a TMS 5000 system.
8.7 Configuring Sender Parameter
Open the configuration window (see § 8.5).
Click the Sender Tab.

FIGURE 13 - SENDER CONFIGURATION TAB


DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 30/68 DIP 5000

8.7.1 Configuring LF band

The Bandwidth is a technical characteristic of the medium used corresponding to its


bandwidth capacity for signal transmission.
Depending on the characteristics of the medium, select the appropriate bandwidth via the
Bandwidth scroll-down window.
Possible values are:

• 300-1900

• 400-2000

• 300-1900

• 670-2260

• 850-2450

• 1040-2630

• 1220-2810

• 1400-3000

• 1590-3180

• 2000-3600
8.7.2 Configuring Sender Transmission levels

The transmission level corresponds to the signal power allocated to a Frequency and to the
Guard.
The value range is -30 dBm to 6 dBm, the display accuracy is 0,1 dBm.
To configure Transmission levels For Guard and Frequency 1 to 8:
Select, using the scrolling button, the transmission level in compliance with the following rule:
The difference between frequency transmission levels must not exceed 16 dBm. If this rule is
not respected, a warning message appears when attempting to save the configuration file.
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DUAL TONE
DIP 5000 Page 31/68

If this warning message appears, modify the transmission levels in consequence.


8.7.3 Configuring Command transmission parameters

The transmission of an input command requires the following parameters to be configured:

• Holding Delay

• Pulsed Mode or not

• Input Valid Delay

• Protection schemes
8.7.3.1 Configuring Sender Holding Delay

Holding delay Parameter description


The Holding Delay parameter corresponds to the minimum transmission time of a validated
command. If, however, the Pulsed mode box has been checked, this is a maximum value as
shown in the illustration above.
The transmission time is the maximum value between the Holding Delay and the input
signal command duration.
Example:
Holding delay: 100 ms.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 32/68 DIP 5000

A first input signal command duration is 5ms.


Holding delay 100 ms > Command duration 5 ms: The command will be transmitted during
100 ms.
A second input command duration is 120 ms.
Input signal command duration 120 ms > Holding delay 100 ms: The command will be
transmitted during 120 ms.
Parameter values
Parameter values are in ms.
Range value 0 to 500 ms.
Procedure
For each command, select the Holding Delay by positioning the scrolling button.
8.7.3.2 Configuring Sender Input Valid delay

Input Valid Delay Parameter description


At the receipt end the restitution of a command requires a processing time that varies
according to the chosen protection scheme. To be rebuilt an input command must be
transmitted during a time at least equal to the processing time.
The Input Valid Delay corresponds to a threshold applied to an input signal command
duration conditioning the activation of the Holding Delay.
Input signal commands whose duration is inferior to the Input Valid Delay are validated and
transmitted without any prolongation.
Restitution at the receipt end of input commands sent in such condition is not guaranteed
because the transmission time may be less than the processing time required by the
Protection Scheme.
Input signal commands whose duration is greater than the Input Valid Delay, are validated
and transmitted for a minimum duration corresponding to the Holding Delay parameter.
When the Holding Delay parameter is greater than the processing reception duration,
reception of input command sent in such condition is guaranteed to be lossless.
Parameter Values
Parameter values are in ms.
Range value 0 to 5 ms.
Example
E.g. holding delay 50ms, input validation delay 5ms:

• Input signal command 3ms, duration less than the Input valid Delay, the Holding
Delay is not taken into account, the command is sent without any prolongation time.
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DUAL TONE
DIP 5000 Page 33/68

• Input signal command 6ms, command input duration greater than the Input Valid
Delay (5ms). The Holding delay is taken into account and the command is
transmitted for the Holding Delay: 50 ms.

• Input signal command 60 ms: command input duration greater than the Input Valid
Delay. Signal Input command greater than the Holding Delay. The signal input
command is transmitted for 60 ms.
Procedure
Select the Input Valid Delay for each command by positioning the scrolling button.
8.7.3.3 Configuring Sender Protection Scheme

Parameter Description
6 protection Schemes are available. There are three basic schemes, Permissive tripping,
Blocking, and Direct tripping.. Each of these, in turn, has a more secure version, but which is
slower
Permissive tripping commands are always monitored by a protection relay. The circuit
breaker is tripped when receipt of the command coincides with operation of the protection
relay at the receiving end responding to a system fault. The intention of these schemes is to
speed up tripping for faults occurring within the protected zone.
Blocking commands are initiated by a protection element that detects faults external to the
protected zone. Detection of an external fault at the local end of a protected circuit results in
a blocking signal being transmitted to the remote end. At the remote end, receipt of the
blocking signal prevents the remote end protection operating if it had detected the external
fault. The risk of a spurious trip is higher.
Direct tripping, intertrip signals are sent directly to the master trip relay. Receipt of the
command causes circuit breaker operation. The method of communication must be reliable
and secure because any signal detected at the receiving end will cause a trip of the circuit at
that end.
Procedure
For each command select the protection scheme by selecting the value with the scroll down
window.
8.7.4 Sender Transmission parameter configuration procedure
Depending on user needs and of the characteristics of input signals applied to the DIP 5000,
notably their duration, two procedures are available.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 34/68 DIP 5000

8.7.4.1 Procedure without Input Valid Delay


For each command:
1. Using the scroll-down window select a protection scheme.
Optional:
2. Select a Holding Delay using the scrolling button.

3. Click the button.


4. Give a path for the saved file and name it.
8.7.4.2 Procedure with Input Valid Delay
For each command
1. Using the scroll-down window select a protection scheme.
2. Using the scroll-down window select the input valid delay

3. Click the button.


NOTE: The Holding Delay parameter is automatically set to a minimum value
compatible with the application scheme.
4. Give a path for the saved file and name it.
Holding delay, Input Valid delay, and protection schemes parameters are dependent.
If you do not follow the given procedure, for example, by selecting Holding delay before
protection schemes incompatibilities can occur.
If incompatibilities are detected when selecting the protection schemes parameter, warning
messages are displayed.
8.7.5 Sending Sender Parameter Configuration to the DIP 5000.
When you have completed Sender Parameters configuration as described above:

Click the button, the following window opens:

The DIP 5000 resets.


Check for the correct status of the LEDs after the reset.
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DUAL TONE
DIP 5000 Page 35/68

8.8 Configuring Receiver Parameters


Open the <Configuration> window (see § Erreur ! Source du renvoi introuvable.)
Click the <Receiver> tab, the following window opens:

FIGURE 14 - RECEIVER CONFIGURATION TAB


8.8.1 Configuring LF band

The Bandwidth is a technical characteristic of the medium used corresponding to its signal
transmission capacity.
Depending on the characteristics of the medium, select the appropriate bandwidth via the
Bandwidth scroll-down window.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 36/68 DIP 5000

Possible values are:

• 300-1900

• 400-2000

• 670-2260

• 850-2450

• 1040-2630

• 1220-2810

• 1400-3000

• 1590-3180

• 2000-3600
8.8.2 Configuring Receiver Input Level

Guard Signal
This parameter defines the Guard Signal level.
Parameter values are in dBm.
Value Range -40 to 0 dBm.
Select the Guard Signal input level using the scrolling button.
Commands vs Guard
This parameter corresponds to the relative level between signal commands level and Guard
Signal.
Parameter values are in dB.
Value Range -6 + 6 dB
Select the Commands vs Guard using the scrolling button.
NOTE: The Receiver Input level can also be set from the Maintenance
window, manually or automatically.
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DUAL TONE
DIP 5000 Page 37/68

8.8.3 Configuring Receiver Protection Schemes

Parameter description
These are the same protection schemes described in Configuring Sender Protection
Scheme on page 33.
When assigning type to commands make sure that receiver and sender are both using the
same protection scheme.
Procedure
For each command:
Select the Type using the scroll-down window.
NOTE: Make sure that the selected type belongs to the same type range
values.
8.8.4 Configuring Relay State on AI

Parameter description
Idle state: the restitution relay is set to the idle state if an alarm occurs.
Former state: the restitution relay contact keeps, open or closed, even an alarm is set. The
alarm has no influence on contact state.
For each command:
Select the Relay State on AI using the scroll-down window.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 38/68 DIP 5000

8.8.5 Configuring Receiver Holding Delay

The value range is 0 3000 ms step 1 ms.


For each command select the Holding Delay value using the scrolling button.
8.8.6 Configuring Unblocking parameters

Unblocking
Only command which type is Permissive tripping can be unblocked. Each command can be
unblocked, independently of the others.
For each command to unblock, check the corresponding box.
Unblocking Threshold
Parameter values are in dB. The value range is -20 to -10 dB. Display accuracy is ± 0.1dB.

Select the unblocking threshold using the scrolling button value.


Unblocking Delay

Parameter values are in ms. The value range is 5 to 80 ms. Display accuracy is ± 1 ms.

Select the unblocking Delay value using the scrolling button.


8.8.7 Sending Receiver Parameter Configuration
When you have complete Receiver Parameters configuration as described above:

Click the button, give a path for the configuration file and name it.

Click the button the following window opens:

The DIP 5000 resets.


Check the correct status of LEDs after the reset and absence of alarms.
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DUAL TONE
DIP 5000 Page 39/68

8.9 Configuring Input/output Parameters


To configure Input/Outputs parameters:
Open the configuration window (see § 8.5)

FIGURE 15 - INPUT/OUTPUT CONFIGURATION TAB


8.9.1 Configuring I/O Boards

FIGURE 16 - INPUT/OUTPUT I/O BOARDS


Select the I/O Boards parameter corresponding to your hardware configuration by checking
the corresponding button.
NOTE: If two boards are selected, a Combinatorial Logic on Inputs part is
displayed.
In the case of a two board configuration:

• For 2 commands select 1 board,

• For more than 2 commands, one or two boards can be selected.


DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 40/68 DIP 5000

8.9.2 Configuring Input Filter Delay

FIGURE 17 - INPUT FILTER DELAY


Parameter Description
The Input Filter Delay is a threshold applied to the input command signal. It is used to
exclude high noise-level signals which could be taken as input signal commands.
Signal commands with a duration less than the Input Filter Delay duration are not
transmitted.
Signal commands with a duration greater than the Input Filter Delay duration are validated
and transmitted. The propagation time of the command transmitted via the Input Filter Delay
increases of the Input Filter Delay.
Parameter value
Range 0 to 3 ms in 1 ms steps s.
Procedure
Select the value using the scrolling button for each command to which an Input Filter Delay
is to be applied.
8.9.3 Configuring Combinatorial Logic on Inputs
This panel is only available having configured 4 commands/2 boards.

FIGURE 18 - COMBINATORIAL LOGIC ON INPUTS


Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DUAL TONE
DIP 5000 Page 41/68

It is used to allocate commands with logical associations between input signals.


For each command the possible choices are:

• IN1: The command is allocated to the input signal connected to the INT1 input (P10
connector)

• IN2: The command is allocated to the input signal connected to the INT2 input (P10
connector)

• IN1 or IN2: The command is allocated to the result of the OR operator applied to the
input signal connected on the INT1 input (P10 connector) and the INT2 input (P10
connector)

• IN1 and IN2: The command is allocated to the result of the AND operator applied to
the input signal connected to the INT1 input (P10 connector) and the INT2 input (P10
connector)
For command 2 same explanation replacing IN1 by IN3 and IN2 by IN4.
For command 3 same explanation replacing IN1 by IN5 IN2 by IN6 and P10 connector by
P12 connector.
For command 4 same explanation replacing IN1 by IN7 IN2 by IN8 and P10 connector by
P12 connector.
8.9.4 Sending Input/Output Configuration
When you have completed Input/Output Parameters configuration as described above:

Click the button, give a path for the configuration file and name it.

Click the button the following window opens:

The DIP 5000 resets.


Check the correct status of LEDs after the reset and that there are no alarms.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 42/68 DIP 5000

8.10 Configuring Alarm Parameters


To configure Alarms parameters:
Open the <Configuration> window (see § 8.5)
Click the Alarms tab.

FIGURE 19 - CONFIGURATION ALARMS


8.10.1 Configuring Alarm on External Input

The External alarm input comes from an external unit, PLC or other.
The external unit and the DIP 5000 must be interconnected with a special connection cable
supporting alarm wires.
Parameter values are in seconds. The value range is 0 to 2.5 s. The display accuracy is
± 0.1s.
To configure Alarm on External Input
1. Check the Alarm on external input box,
2. Check the alarm level Minor or Major button.
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DUAL TONE
DIP 5000 Page 43/68

8.10.2 Configuring Input Duration Command Alarm

This alarm is set if the input command signal duration is more than the parameter value.
Parameter values are in seconds. The values range 0.5 to 10 s. The display accuracy is
± 0.1s.

To configure Input Command Duration Alarm:


1. Check the Input Command Duration Alarm box,
2. Select the parameter value using the scrolling button,
3. Select the alarm level, Minor or Major.
8.10.3 Configuring Loss of Signal Alarm

Loss of signal Alarm


This alarm occurs if the Signal level, measured through internal digital filter, is under a
Threshold during a Delay.
Threshold
Defines the level under which an alarm is set.
Parameter values are in dBr. The value range is -16 to -6 dBr. Display accuracy is ± 0.1 dBr

Delay
Defines the low level signal delay from which an alarm is set.
Parameter values are in seconds. The value range is 1 to 10 s. The display accuracy is
± 0.1s.

To configure Loss of Signal Alarm


1. Select the Threshold level using the scrolling button.
2. Select the delay using the scrolling button.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 44/68 DIP 5000

8.10.4 Configuring Noise Alarm

Noise alarm
This alarm occurs if the noise level, measured through internal digital filter, is above a
Threshold during a Delay.
Alarms are displayed in the Snapshot window.
Threshold
Parameter values are in dBr. The value range is -12 to -6 dBr. The display accuracy is
± 0.1 dBr.

Delay
Parameter values are in s. The value range is 1 to 10 s. The display accuracy is ± 0.1s.

To configure Noise Alarm:


Select the Threshold value by positioning the scrolling button.
Select the Delay by positioning the scrolling button.
8.10.5 Configuring on Link test failure

The Link test can be periodical (Daily or Hourly) launched (for settings see § 8.6.4).
An instantaneous Link test can also be launched from the toolbar (Menu Test > Link Test).
In case of test failure, an alarm is set. An alarm status is displayed in the Alarm Snapshot
window.
To configure Alarm on link test failure select the level of alarm by checking the
corresponding button.
8.10.6 Configuring Locking alarm

This alarm occurs in case of medium transmission default during a specified period.
Parameter values are 1 to 10 s. in steps of 1 s.
To configure Locking alarm check the Locking alarm box and select the duration by
positioning the scrolling button the Locking Alarm.
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DUAL TONE
DIP 5000 Page 45/68

8.10.7 Configuring Alarm Outputs Delay

Alarm output delay:


Closing of the contact relay can be delayed, possible delay values are the following
0,
2,5 s
5s
10 s.
For each Relay 1 and 2, Major and Minor alarm:
Select the delay by positioning the scrolling button.
8.10.8 Sending Alarm Configuration
When you have finished Alarm Parameters configuration as described above:

Click the button, give a path for the configuration file and name it.

Click the button the following window opens:

The DIP 5000 resets.


Check the correct status of leds after the reset and the absence of alarms.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 46/68 DIP 5000

8.11 File Configuration Menus

Open Synthesis Window


Changes can be saved from this menu,
Send the configuration to teleprotection
Exit takes you to the basic window.
D0177ENa

FIGURE 20 – CONFIGURATION EXIT MENU


This menu allows configuration files to be edited, saved, sent and closed.
8.11.1 Editing a configuration file
The Edit menu is used to display a synthesis Parameter values window.
To view a configuration file from the Configuration window select File > Edit or Click the
button and the following window opens:

8.11.2 Saving a configuration file

Save: This menu opens a standard Windows®dialog box allowing the displayed
configuration to be saved in a file.
To save a configuration file:
Select File > Save
Give a path and a name to the configuration file.
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DUAL TONE
DIP 5000 Page 47/68

8.11.3 Sending a configuration file to the unit


Send: This menu, accessible from user level 2, is used to send the HMI displayed
configuration to the unit. After receiving the configuration file, the unit resets. When the unit
restarts, the sent configuration is taken into account.
A configuration window is opened in the HMI using the menus File > New or File > Open or
DIP > Configuration.
Once modified, the configuration file can be sent to the unit using the menu File >Send or

the button.
To send a configuration file:

Select File > Send or click on the button.


The following window opens:

The DIP 5000 resets.


Check the correct status of LEDs after the reset and the absence of alarms.
8.11.4 Closing a configuration file
Exit: This menu closes the configuration window.
To close a configuration window select File > Exit
8.12 Operating the <DIP> Menu

The <DIP> menu allows to display:

• Configuration,
• Hardware configuration,
• Alarms Snapshot
• Input/Output
• versions
Date Setup See § 8.14 for more details. The DIP menu can also be used to launch the
<Reset> command.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 48/68 DIP 5000

8.12.1 Reading the unit's configuration parameters


To read the configuration parameters:
Select DIP> Configuration the Configuration window opens:

The user can now modify configuration parameters (see § 8.6 and following).
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DUAL TONE
DIP 5000 Page 49/68

8.12.2 Reading the hardware Configuration


Select DIP> Hardware Config
The following Hardware window opens:

FIGURE 21 – HARDWARE CONFIGURATION WINDOW


This hardware window shows the hardware configuration, installed devices are readable and
the corresponding box is checked. Uninstalled devices are greyed and unreadable.
8.12.3 Reading Version
To read the Version:
Select DIP>Versions and the following window opens:
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 50/68 DIP 5000

8.12.4 Reading the Alarm snapshots


To read the alarm status in the Alarms Snapshots select DIP> Alarm Snapshot

8.12.5 Reading the Input/Output Status


To read the Input Output States select DIP> Input /Output and the following Input Output
States window opens:

FIGURE 22 – INPUT/OUTPUT WINDOW


The “Inputs/Outputs” state is the representation of the Acquisitions state and the Commands
Restitutions state, with two possible states < Active and Inactive>.
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DUAL TONE
DIP 5000 Page 51/68

1. Inactive Command = Inputs in Black and Outputs in Blue


2. Active Command = Inputs and Outputs in Red
Example of active command:

A signal command is active on IN1, the corresponding input is red,


The signal is transmitted, Tx C1 in red,
The Command Restitution state R1 is active and red.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 52/68 DIP 5000

8.13 Operating DIP Maintenance Menus


The DIP> Maintenance menu enables the following:

• switching to maintenance or normal mode,

• line and relay unlocking,

• local loopback,

• transmission, output or alarm forcing,

• resetting events and alarms to be reset to zero (local or remote)


To access to the Maintenance menus select DIP> Maintenance the following window opens
(user level 2 case):

FIGURE 23 - MAINTENANCE LEVELS


The maintenance features available depends on user level:

• User level 0: only reading of Input level is accessible.

• User level 2: same as level 0 plus Force/Loop/Lock tab.


8.13.1 Switching Maintenance /Normal mode

Switching to Maintenance mode is available at user level 2.


To switch from Maintenance to Normal mode
Select Mode > Normal mode
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DUAL TONE
DIP 5000 Page 53/68

In Normal mode, only the <level> tab is available.


To switch from Normal mode to Maintenance mode
Select Mode> Maintenance.
In Maintenance mode, the Force/Lock/loop tab becomes available.
8.13.2 Maintenance status bar
The maintenance status bar displays:

• line status (locked/unlocked)

• relay status (locked/unlocked)

• loopback status on/off.

8.13.3 Reading Input level measurement

This Panel, accessible from user level 0, show the Input level graphically.
Numerical values are also displayed in the top part of the panel.
The range of displayed values is -45 to 15 dBr, 0 dBr is the nominal value of receiver
alignment. The display accuracy is ± 0.1 dBr.

Clicking on the button allows the values displayed to be refreshed.


Clicking the Autorefresh box causes the information displayed to be refreshed periodically.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 54/68 DIP 5000

8.13.4 Configuring Output Levels settings

This Panel, accessible from user level 1 and higher, is used to set the DIP 5000 frequencies
and guards output levels.
The value range is -30 dBm to 6 dBm with an accuracy of ± 0.1 dBm

Procedure
For the Guard frequency and Frequency 1 to 7 select the output level by positioning the
scrolling button.

When you have finished, Click on the button.


8.13.5 Configuring Receiver Level

This panel, accessible at user level 2 allows the receiver level to be adjusted.
Guard Frequency
The receiver level of the guard frequencies is directly given in dBm.
This level can be adjusted to between - 45 dBm and +15dBm.
The display accuracy is ± 0.1 dBm.
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DUAL TONE
DIP 5000 Page 55/68

Relative Level commands/guard


The relative level commands/guard is given in dB.
This level is adjustable between 0 and +6dB in normal mode and 0 and +16dB in enhanced
mode.
Adjustments are made by taking the output level and the attenuation of the medium into
account.
The display accuracy is ± 0.1 dBm.
The settings for Guard and Relative Level Commands Guards are independent and setting
values must be sent separately.
Procedure
Using the scrolling button windows, select the Guard Receive level.

Click on the button.


Position the scrolling button, select the Relative Level Commands Guards.

Click on the button.


To save your settings after a reset, see § 8.13.6.
8.13.5.1.1 Automatic Adjust;

The button is accessible at user level 2.


This command launches receiver alignment.
In dual tone command transmission is coded on two frequencies. Input level adjustment at
0dB requires two frequencies level adjustment so two frequencies are sent consecutively.
To launch Automatic adjust:

Click the button.


The following window appears to show that automatic adjust has started:

When the adjustment is complete, the following message is displayed:

Click the button.


To save your settings after a reset see the next paragraph.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 56/68 DIP 5000

8.13.6 Saving output level and receiver level settings


Output level and receiver level setting (manual or automatic) are lost after a reset unless
they have been explicitly saved to the DIP 5000 memory. The HMI will ask you

Answer .
A message confirming DIP 5000 reset is displayed.
The settings are now stored in the flash memory and will be active after any reset of the
DIP 5000.
8.13.7 Configuring Maintenance Force loopback
This tab is accessible from user level 2 and in maintenance mode.
To access the Force/Lock/Loop window, open the Maintenance window and select the
<Force/Lock/Loop> tab.

FIGURE 24 - MAINTENANCE FORCE


Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DUAL TONE
DIP 5000 Page 57/68

8.13.8 Configuring input/output Loopback

Loop
In this mode, transmission is looped on reception even if the transmission media access is
locked.
Procedure
To activate the loop, select Active by checking the corresponding button.
To deactivate the loop, select Inactive by checking the corresponding button.
Unlock
The states for line AF and contact relay are:

• Unlocked

• Locked
Unlocking Line AF: This state is used to connect the teleprotection transmitter to the
transmission line. This operating mode introduces some risks of unwanted commands since
the operator can simulate the acquisition of a command.
Locking Line AF: This state is used to disconnect the teleprotection transmitter from the
transmission line. The operator can then simulate a command acquisition without any risk.
Unlocking Contact relay: When this state is activated, the output commands relays states
comply with the command conditions present on the reception line. This operating mode
introduces some risks of local unwanted commands in the event of loop back.
Locking Contact Relay: When this state is activated, the output commands relays are forced
to the idle state, whatever the command conditions present on the reception line.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 58/68 DIP 5000

Procedure
To unlock Line AF:
Check the Line AF box
To lock Line AF
Un –Check the line AF box
To unlock Contact Relay
Check the Contact Relay box
To lock Contact relay
Un –Check the Contact Relay box
Once the Loop and Unlock parameters are configured:

Click the button,


Check the update status of your settings in the bottom bar:

8.13.9 Transmitter forcing

Freq 8 corresponds to the frequency guard, Freq 1 to Freq 7 are used to encode signal
commands.
As two frequencies are required to encode signal commands, and the frequencies are forced
separately; there is no risk of sending a command by forcing frequency.
This panel is used to send frequencies on unlocked lines referring to various states; standby,
command or test message. To use the feature, the recopy relays must always be unlocked.
To force a frequency, check the corresponding button.

Click the force button .

The forced frequency turns red:

To stop forcing, click the button.


Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DUAL TONE
DIP 5000 Page 59/68

8.13.10 Forcing Restitution Relay

This panel is used to force the state of the output commands relays on the local unit. The
output command relays will be activated only if the relays are unlocked. The recopy relays
must be always unlocked.
To force an Output Relay check the corresponding Command box,

Click the force button

The forced command turns red

To stop forcing click the button.


8.13.11 Forcing PLC

Forcing Emission Reception


When signal commands are sent or received via the PLC, transmission/reception of other
signals can be blocked so that all the power is made available for signal commands.
Blocking emission and reception signals are sent with signal commands to activate the
blocking feature.
Forcing PLC commands allows the transmission /reception blocking feature to be activated.
To check PLC Emission blocking check the Emission active button

Click the button.


DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 60/68 DIP 5000

The emission box turns red


Using a multimeter, check the contact relay Pin 3-10 of the P18 connector which must be
closed.

To stop forcing click the button.


To check PLC Reception blocking check the Reception active button

Click the button,

The reception box turns red


Using a multimeter, check the contact relay Pin 5-12 of the P18 connector which must be
closed.

To stop forcing click the button.


Forcing Active Inactive
When a DIP becomes inactive, contact relay 7-14 of the P18 connector closes to inform the
PLC. Forcing Inactive allows the inactive state of the DIP to be simulated.
To force the inactive state of the DIP check the inactive button inactive

The inactive box turns red .

Click the button.


Using a multimeter check the contact relay 5-12 of the P18 connector which must be closed.
In command
This part allows the external alarm presence between Pin 6-13 of the connector P18 to be
checked.

In presence of an external alarm, active turns yellow


If there is no external alarm, inactive is green .
8.13.12 Alarm Forcing

To force alarms:
Check the boxes of the type of Alarm(s) to be forced, Major, Minor or both.
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DUAL TONE
DIP 5000 Page 61/68

Click the force button .


The other parts of the window become greyed and inaccessible.
Check the alarm status LEDs that must be in the alarm status.

To stop forcing click the button.


8.14 Setting the Date

Set the date in the PC Time Date part of the window,


When date information has been entered,

Click on the button to copy PC Time Date settings in the DIP 5000 Time/date
part.

NOTE: Viewing and date setup is also accessed by clicking on the


button in the toolbar.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 62/68 DIP 5000

8.15 Resetting the DIP


To reset the DIP 5000 from the DIP menu select DIP> Reset
A confirmation message pop-up window is displayed:

Answer .
The following window appears to inform the user that reset is being performed.

After restarting of the DIP 5000, check the correct status of the LEDS and that there are no
alarms. After any reset, in particular after sending a configuration file to the DIP 5000 unit,
the user will have to renter a password for the HMI.
8.16 Operating the < History> Menu

FIGURE 25 HISTORY MENU


There are two history information categories:

• undated (counters)

• timestamped by the internal clock (events/alarms).


The <History> menu allows the following information to be displayed:

• Events files

• Alarms file

• Counters
The <History> menu allows also the events and alarms buffers to be erased.
WARNING: AFTER CLEARING BUFFERS, THE INFORMATION CANNOT BE
RECOVERED
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DUAL TONE
DIP 5000 Page 63/68

8.16.1 Reading Events


To read Events:
Select History>Events and the following message pop-up window appears indicating
events are being loaded:

NOTE: Reading Events is also possible by clicking on the button in the


toolbar.
The stack has a capacity of 1785 events.

FIGURE 26 - EVENTS WINDOW DUAL TONE


The File Menu allows events files (*.event) to be saved and printed and the user to exit from
the Event file:

The record and print buttons respectively allow files to be recorded and printed.

The retrieve button refreshes the events log.


DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 64/68 DIP 5000

Use the File menu in the Main window to read event files (*.event).

Internal timestamped events are recorded in a stack limited to 1785 events. When the stack
is full, any further event replaces the oldest one recorded.
8.16.2 Reading Alarms Window
To read Alarms, select History>Events and the following message pop-up window
confirming events are being loaded:

NOTE: Reading alarms is also possible by clicking on the in the toolbar.

FIGURE 27 - ALARMS WINDOW


Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DUAL TONE
DIP 5000 Page 65/68

8.16.3 Reading counters


To read counter information ,select History> Counters and the following screen appears

FIGURE 28 - LOCAL COMMAND COUNTERS WINDOW


The File Menu allows Counter files (*.cnter) to be saved and printed and the user to exit from
the Counter file:

The record and print button respectively allow files to be recorded and printed.
The File menu of the Main window allows counters files (*.cnter) to be opened:

The stack capacity of counters is limited to 65535.


DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 66/68 DIP 5000

8.16.4 Erasing Events


The Erase Events option allows the deletion of all events displayed in the event list.
NOTE: Erasing events completely removes them from the system, and the
action cannot be undone. If you might need to view the events at a
later date, use the File>Save option to save a copy of the event list
before using Erase>Events.
To delete the currently displayed event list, select History> Erase> Erase Events

A confirmation window is then displayed:

Answer
8.16.5 Erasing Alarms
The Erase Alarms option allows the deletion of all alarms displayed in the alarm list.
NOTE: Erasing alarms completely removes them from the system, and the
action cannot be undone. If you might need to view the alarms at a
later date, use the File>Save option to save a copy of the alarm list
before using Erase>Events.
To delete the currently displayed alarm list select History > Erase> Erase Alarms
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DUAL TONE
DIP 5000 Page 67/68

The following pop-up message confirmation window is then displayed:

Answer
8.17 <Test> Menu

Link test is used to check the ability of the DIP 5000 link to send and receive bidirectional
commands.
Launching Link Test automatically can also be scheduled Daily or Hourly (see § 8.6.4 for
settings).
Command processing has priority over Link Test.
To launch Link Test, select Test> Link Test
In case of bad test results, a DIP 5000 failure is declared.
A minor or major alarm is set, depending on the alarm configuration (see § 8.10.5).
8.18 <Help> menu

This menu allows the Help file to be accessed and the HMI software version to be read.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 68/68 DIP 5000

8.18.1 Reading the HMI software version


To read the HMI software version select Help > About and the following window opens:
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DIGITAL
DIP 5000

HUMAN MACHINE
INTERFACE

PART 3: DIP 5000 DIGITAL


Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DIGITAL
DIP 5000 Page 1/58

CONTENTS

1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 8

2. HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL 9


2.1 Information presentation 9
2.2 Example in a paragraph 9

3. OVERVIEW 10
3.1 Foreword 10
3.2 System Required 10
3.3 Installing the HMI 10

4. USER LEVELS AND PASSWORDS 11


4.1 User level Structure 11
4.2 Menus 12

5. DIP 5000 SECURITY PASSWORD MANAGER 13


5.1 Rules for password creation 13
5.2 Accessing to the Password manager Menus with the Password Menu 13
5.3 Modifying the Password Manager Password with the password Menu 14
5.4 Creating User Passwords with the Create Menu 15
5.5 Managing the Password listing with the Menu List 16
5.6 Exiting the Password Manager 16
5.7 Viewing the Software Password Manager Version 16

6. INTERFACE DESCRIPTION 17
6.1 Main screen description 17
6.2 Header bar 18
6.3 Menu bar 18
6.4 Toolbar 18
6.5 Pop-up menus 18
6.6 Status bars. 18
6.7 Work and dialogue zone. 20

7. FUNCTIONALITIES DESCRIPTION 21
7.1 <File> Menu 21
7.2 <Tools> Menu 21
7.3 <Read> Menu 22
7.4 <Date> Menu 22
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 2/58 DIP 5000

7.5 <Maintenance> Menu 22

8. OPERATING THE HMI 23


8.1 Launching the HMI 23
8.2 Configuration procedure 23
8.2.1 File menu Configuration procedure 23
8.2.2 Read menu Configuration procedure 23
8.3 Operating <Tools> Menu 24
8.3.1 Entering Password 24
8.3.2 Returning to level 0 24
8.3.3 Connecting the HMI to the DIP 5000 24
8.3.4 Disconnecting the HMI 25
8.4 Operating the Configuration Window 26
8.4.1 Accessing to the configuration Window 26
8.4.2 Configuration Window <File> menu 27
8.4.3 Configuration Window <Modify> Menu 28
8.5 Configuring Generals Parameters 29
8.6 Configuring Communication Interface Parameters 30
8.7 Configuring backup interface 31
8.8 Configuring Input Output 33
8.8.1 Configuring Input/Output Parameters 33
8.8.2 Configuring Input filter and logic 34
8.8.3 Configuring Inputs logic 34
8.9 Configuring Application Parameters 36
8.9.1 Configuring Holding Delays for Transmission: 36
8.9.2 Configuring Holding Delays for Output Command 37
8.9.3 Configuring Teleprotection Schemes 37
8.10 Configuring the Alarms Parameters 39
8.10.1 Configuring Bit Error Rate Threshold 39
8.10.2 Configuring Time Overrunning Alarm 39
8.10.3 Configuring the Transmission time Alarm 40
8.10.4 Configuring Relay Command Delay 40
8.11 Sending a configuration file 41
8.12 Entering Comments 41
8.13 Operating the <Read> Menu 42
8.13.1 Menu Description 42
8.13.2 Reading Configuration 43
8.13.3 Reading Hardware Configuration 43
8.13.4 Reading DIP firmware version 44
8.13.5 Reading the comments 44
8.13.6 Reading the Events List 45
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DIGITAL
DIP 5000 Page 3/58

8.13.7 Reading Alarms List 47


8.13.8 Reading the counter 48
8.13.9 Reading the alarm snapshots 48
8.13.10 Reading the Input/Output 49
8.14 <Date> Menu 49
8.14.1 Reading the date 49
8.14.2 Writing the date 49
8.15 <Maintenance> Menu 50
8.15.1 Switching the Maintenance / Operating mode 51
8.15.2 Locking/Unlocking 51
8.15.3 Loop 51
8.15.4 Forcing 52
8.15.5 Transmitter forcing 52
8.15.6 Alarms forcing 53
8.15.7 Command forcing 53
8.15.8 Interface forcing 54
8.15.9 Clearing buffers 55
8.15.10 Resetting the DIP 55
8.16 Reading the HMI version 55

9. PROCEDURE BACKUP EXAMPLE 56


9.1 Example description 56
9.2 Prerequisite 56
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 4/58 DIP 5000

LIST OF FIGURES

FIGURE 1 –MAIN SCREEN BEFORE PC/TELEPROTECTION CONNECTION 17


FIGURE 2 – EXAMPLE OF MAIN SCREEN AFTER PC/TELEPROTECTION CONNECTION 17
FIGURE 3 – MENU BAR 18
FIGURE 4 – TOOLBAR 18
FIGURE 5 – MAINTENANCE STATUS BAR DISPLAY 19
FIGURE 6 – EXAMPLE OF DIALOG BOX WITH LIST DISPLAY 20
FIGURE 7 – FILE MENU 21
FIGURE 8 – MAIN CONFIGURATION WINDOW MENU 26
FIGURE 9 – CONFIGURATION WINDOW TOOLBAR 27
FIGURE 10 – CONFIGURATION EXIT MENU 27
FIGURE 11 – EXAMPLE OF READING THE EVENT QUEUE 45
FIGURE 12 – EXAMPLE OF A TIME MEASUREMENT 46
FIGURE 13 – EXAMPLE OF READING THE ALARM QUEUE 47
FIGURE 14 - EXAMPLE OF LOCAL COMMAND COUNTER 48
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DIGITAL
DIP 5000 Page 5/58

MODIFICATIONS PAGE
VERSION DATE COMMENTS
A11 01/04/2001 ORIGINAL ISSUE
B11 08/23/2004 AREVA LOGO AND ADDITION OF ANALOG
VERSION
C11 07/12/2006 NEW FEATURES AND ADDITIONAL TECHNICAL
EXPLANATIONS
D11 11/14/2007 NEW CHAPTER. TASK ORIENTED WRITING. HMI
CHAPTER SEPARATED IN THREE PARTS DIGITAL,
ANALOG SINGLE TONE ,ANALOG DUAL TONE.
E11 02/11/2008 MINOR CORRECTIONS
A22 08/14/2008 PACKAGE RELEASE 2.2
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 6/58 DIP 5000

BLANK PAGE
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DIGITAL
DIP 5000 Page 7/58

GENERAL
This manual describes the Human-Machine interface of the DIP 5000 teleprotection, i.e. the
microcomputer application which enables commissioning, operational use and maintenance
of this equipment.

DEFINITIONS
HMI tool for using the DIP 5000 teleprotection (Human-Machine Interface)
Configuration all the characteristics (fixed components) and parameters
(customisation components) of a teleprotection
Configuration File micro-computer file containing all the configuration components of a
teleprotection
Input password password for accessing the ‘Password Manager’ utility
User level all the authorised operations corresponding to the level of
responsibility of a given operator
Level password password for accessing a user level

NOTE: Windows® and PC™ are registered trademarks.


DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 8/58 DIP 5000

1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER


SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY
SECTION DIP5K/EN SS/A11 OR LATER ISSUE, THE TECHNICAL DATA
SECTION AND THE RATING ON THE EQUIMENT RATING LABEL.

THE FRONT PANEL MOUNTED MONITOR DOWNLOAD PORT IS AN


EXTRA-LOW VOLTAGE (ELV) CIRCUIT WHICH PROVIDES BASIC
INSULATION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK. WHEN THE RELAY IS
ENERGISED, THE TERMINALS OF THIS PORT SHOULD NOT BE
TOUCHED SINCE IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF A SINGLE FAULT
CONDITION THERE WOULD BE A VERY LOW PROBABILITY OF AN
ELECTRIC SHOCK. THIS PORT IS DESIGNED TO BE USED FOR
MAINTENANCE PURPOSES, THAT IS MONITORING AND SOFTWARE
DOWNLOADS, IT IS NOT INTENDED TO BE PERMANENTLY
CONNECTED.
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DIGITAL
DIP 5000 Page 9/58

2. HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL


• The version Firmware or Software number which appear on print screen may not
reflect the latest implemented in the equipment.
2.1 Information presentation

• Menu Path are indicated: Menu_entry_level1 > Menu_entry_level2>


Path example: Select File > New

• In the text Menu name are between <> example: <DIP> menu

• Window names are between <> example: <Windows Input>

• A screen capture represents button example: represents the OK button


2.2 Example in a paragraph
<HISTORY> menu MENU NAME BETWEEN <>
To Erase Events:
Select History>Erase>Erase Events INDICATES THE PATH

A <Confirmation> window is then displayed: WINDOW NAME BETWEEN <>

Answer SHOWS THE BUTTON


DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 10/58 DIP 5000

3. OVERVIEW
3.1 Foreword
As it is powerful and easy to use, the DIP 5000 teleprotection HMI enables local or remote:

• complete commissioning of the equipment and control of its levels, without the need
for other tools,

• filing of configurations (=>rationalisation of commissioning actions),

• dated recording of equipment information (=> analyses and statistics),

• interactive and user-friendly maintenance,

• printing of equipment parameters.


3.2 System Required
The HMI runs on PCs fitted equipped with PIII microprocessors and higher, operating under
WINDOWS 2000 or XP. They must have at least 40 Mb free on the hard disk.
Important: Where several tasks are running at the same time (office tools or other),
transmission faults may occur on the PC-HMI. It is therefore recommended that all
applications are closed before using this HMI.
3.3 Installing the HMI
For security reasons, the HMI installation from a copy of the supplied disk is recommended..
Installation:

• insert the CDROM provided in the reader,

• run setup.exe file from the <Run> <Menu> in the program manager: D:\setup,

• follow the instructions.


Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DIGITAL
DIP 5000 Page 11/58

4. USER LEVELS AND PASSWORDS


4.1 User level Structure
The DIP 5000 teleprotection places operations in hierarchical order: some actions have no
impact on the operation of equipment, others, due to their impact on security and operation,
require specific responsibility on the part of the operator.
The HMI is therefore structured in user levels; there are 2 of them, 0 and 2.
Level 0 is the default level on start-up. To make this hierarchical arrangement, the command
menus are displayed according to user level.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 12/58 DIP 5000

4.2 Menus

Level
Menus 0 2
File new x x
open x x
exit x x
Tools password x x
to user level 0 x x
connect x x
disconnect x x
Read (local/remote) * configuration x x
hardware configuration x x
version x x
comment x x
event list x x
alarm list x x
counter x x
alarms snapshot x x
input/output x x
Date (local/remote) * read x x
write x x
Maintenance * switch to maintenance mode x
unlocking line (security) x
unlocking relay (security) x
local loopback x
remote loopback x
transmitter forcing x
commands output forcing x
alarms forcing x
clear event file (local/remote) x
Interface forcing x
clear alarm file (local/remote) x
local reset x

TABLE 1 – MENU ACCESSIBILITY ACCORDING TO USER LEVEL


* To access these menus, in addition to the required level, you need to be connected.
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DIGITAL
DIP 5000 Page 13/58

5. DIP 5000 SECURITY PASSWORD MANAGER


The DIP 5000 Security Password Manager application, associated to the HMI application, )is
used to create, modify, read and delete passwords.
To launch the application, click on the desktop icon “DIP 5000 Security” icon or open the
DIP 5000 group of programs and select it.
For security reasons, access to the Password Manager is password protected.
5.1 Rules for password creation
Passwords are case sensitive (upper or lower) and include 1 to 15 characters to be
chosen exclusively from the following.

• upper case (A to Z)

• lower case (a to z)

• numbers (0 to 9)

• ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . /: ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ¨ { | } ~


5.2 Accessing to the Password manager Menus with the Password Menu
The <Password> menu enables you to access to the Password manager Menus Create and
list.
To access to the Password Manager Menus:
1. Launch the DIP 5000 Security application by clicking on the desktop icon, the following
Passwords Manager DIP 5000 window opens:

1. Select Password > Input, the following <Password Input> window opens:

2. Enter DIP 5000 in upper case in this window (only the first time).
NOTE: Modifying the Password Manager password is recommended after the
first use (see the next paragraph).
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 14/58 DIP 5000

3. Click the button.


The following window opens:

The <Create> and <List> menus are available.


5.3 Modifying the Password Manager Password with the password Menu
The password Manager menu allows you to modify the password manager password.
For the first use the password is DIP 5000 (in upper case), modifying it after the first use is
highly recommended.
1. Access to the Manager Menu (see § 5.2)
2. Select Password>Change the following Window opens:

3. Enter the new password in compliance with the rules for Password Creation (see § 5.1).
Carefully note the new password. If you lose it the application must be reinstalled.

1. Click the button. The following window appears:


Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DIGITAL
DIP 5000 Page 15/58

2. Confirm the new password by re-entering it. The following message is then displayed:

3. Click the button.


5.4 Creating User Passwords with the Create Menu
Several passwords can be associated to the same level.
1. To create User Passwords select < Create>
The following window <Password Entry> opens:

2. Enter the password to be created in the <Password Entry> Window while complyting
with the password creation rules (see § 5.1).

3. Click the button. A confirmation message appears:

4. Click the Yes button.


5. Enter other passwords to be defined in the <Password Entry> window if necessary.

6. When you have finished click the button. Check the Password listing
(see the next paragraph).
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 16/58 DIP 5000

5.5 Managing the Password listing with the Menu List


To access to the Password Listing, click the <List> Menu

The list of passwords is displayed.

1. To Remove a password, select the password line in the list and click the
button. A confirmation message is then displayed, Answer yes.
5.6 Exiting the Password Manager
To exit from the password manager and return to the WINDOWS environment select
Password Exit.
5.7 Viewing the Software Password Manager Version
Select ?>About, the following window appears:
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DIGITAL
DIP 5000 Page 17/58

6. INTERFACE DESCRIPTION
The HMI is an integrated environment, using standard WINDOWS tools and processes.
As only the operating modes specific to the HMI will be mentioned in the following, operators
not familiar with WINDOWS must refer to the user manual for this environment.
6.1 Main screen description
The main screen is composed of 5 functional zones (figure 1 and figure 2 below):

The work zone The status bar The header bar


The toolbar The menu bar D0171ENa

FIGURE 1 –MAIN SCREEN BEFORE PC/TELEPROTECTION CONNECTION

FIGURE 2 – EXAMPLE OF MAIN SCREEN AFTER PC/TELEPROTECTION CONNECTION


DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 18/58 DIP 5000

6.2 Header bar


The header displays HMI name and its current version at the top part of the screen.
6.3 Menu bar
The operator launches commands via the standard WINDOWS display HMI menus,
according to current user level, determined by the connection password.

FIGURE 3 – MENU BAR


6.4 Toolbar
The operator can launch commands and access readings locally via the toolbar shortcuts.
Rolling the mouse over a tool displays, information on its function.

Reading Inputs / Outputs


Reading the date
Reading the counters
Reading the event queue
Reading the alarm queue
Reading the configuration
Writing the date
Disconnection
Connection
Opening a configuration or event or alarm file (depending on the extension chosen)
New configuration (a default configuration is suggested)
Choosing a password D0163ENa

FIGURE 4 – TOOLBAR
6.5 Pop-up menus
By right-clicking on the work space, with connection to the equipment established, a pop-up
menu appears enabling you to carry out all the read operations on local or remote
equipment.
6.6 Status bars.
Depending on user level and the type of operation in progress, status bars display the
following information:
With the HMI connected to the DIP 5000 in maintenance mode, the top bar displays:

• Line status (locked/unlocked)

• Relay status (locked/unlocked)

• Loopback type (Rx on Tx/Tx on Rx/remote loopedback)


Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DIGITAL
DIP 5000 Page 19/58

The bottom bar displays:

• Connection status (HMI) (connect/disconnect icon)

• The operating mode in progress (Exploitation/Maintenance)

• Link address

• Transmission time

• Bit error rate

• Alarm presence (clicking in this zone opens a window displaying the faults that have
triggered this alarm)

• User level (0 or 2)

FIGURE 5 – MAINTENANCE STATUS BAR DISPLAY


DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 20/58 DIP 5000

6.7 Work and dialogue zone.


Most of the commands are also launched using the dialog boxes (figure 6 below). Six
standard Windows tools are used:

• Optional button groups

• Tick boxes

• Command buttons

• Text boxes

• Lists

• Cursors

By clicking on a line, The information about this line is displayed


D0170ENa

FIGURE 6 – EXAMPLE OF DIALOG BOX WITH LIST DISPLAY


Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DIGITAL
DIP 5000 Page 21/58

7. FUNCTIONALITIES DESCRIPTION
7.1 <File> Menu

The <File> menu elements are used create, modify, and send configuration files, as well as
opening saved alarm (*.Ala) and event (*.Evt) files.

Creation of a new file based on a default configuration


Opening an existing configuration / alarm queue / event queue file
Exiting the HMI D0164ENa

FIGURE 7 – FILE MENU


New File: This menu enables the creation of a new configuration from a default
configuration.
Open File: This menu enables you to open a previously saved configuration file or open an
alarm or event queue.
This menu allows 3 types of file to be opened:

• *.Cfg -> existing configuration file, this selection will open the window (see figure 8)

• *.Ala -> alarm list file for consultation (see figure 13 for the window display

• *.Evt -> event list file for consultation (see figure 11 for the window display)
Exit File: Closes the HMI program.
7.2 <Tools> Menu
Password: This menu enables you to modify the user level. The move to a higher level is
protected and requires input of a password.
To user level 0: This menu enables you to return to the lowest priority 0 level.
Disconnect: This menu enables you to remove the connection between the DIP 5000 and
the PC.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 22/58 DIP 5000

7.3 <Read> Menu


This menu enables you to read the following parameters on the local or remote equipment:

• Configuration: Read all the configuration parameters,

• Hardware configuration: Read hardware parameters,

• Version: Read firmware versions,

• Comment: Read comment records,

• Events list: Read event queue,

• Alarms list: Read alarm queue,

• Alarms snapshot: Provides a photo of the alarm statuses,

• Input/Output: Input and output status read.


7.4 <Date> Menu
This menu enables you to read or write the date and time on the local or remote equipment:

• Read: Reads the date and time of local or remote equipment,

• Write: Writes the date and time of local or remote equipment, either by recopying the
date and time from the PC, or by sending a date and time selected by the user.
7.5 <Maintenance> Menu
This menu enables all the following maintenance actions:

• Maintenance Mode: Switching from operating mode to maintenance mode,

• Locking: Locks or unlocks the communication line and the command output relays,

• Loop: Carries out a loopback either on the local equipment or on the remote
equipment,

• Forcing: Forces transmission or reception commands and also forces alarm relays.

• Interface: Allows to force interface optical or backup

• Clear buffers: Deletes event and alarm log queues from the local or remote
equipment,

• Reset: Enables hardware and software resets on local or remote equipment.


Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DIGITAL
DIP 5000 Page 23/58

8. OPERATING THE HMI


8.1 Launching the HMI
The HMI is started by clicking on:
Start>Programs>DIP 5000>DIP 5000>
8.2 Configuration procedure
Configuration creation is available regardless of the PC/Teleprotection connection status,
and from level 0. As this availability enables off-site creations and the preparation of
configuration libraries, it optimises commissioning and maintenance operations.
The configuration of new equipment or reconfiguration of existing equipment involves
creating or modifying a configuration file via the configuration window (see § 8.4). The
configuration window can be accessed from the menu bar in two ways, via the:

• File menu

• Read menu
8.2.1 File menu Configuration procedure
1. Click on File>New> or File>Open
2. Modify the configuration displayed,
3. Save the changed configuration (<File><Save as ...>).
4. Send the configuration to the equipment.
8.2.2 Read menu Configuration procedure
The configuration on the local or remote equipment can also be modified by reading this
configuration:
1. Click on Read>Local or Remote>Configuration
2. Modify the configuration displayed,
3. Save the changed configuration (<File><Save as ...>).
4. Send the configuration to the equipment.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 24/58 DIP 5000

8.3 Operating <Tools> Menu


The <Tools> menu allows user passwords to be entered, user level to be returned to 0, and
disconnection from a DIP 5000.
8.3.1 Entering Password
When the HMI is opened, without entering a password, the level user granted is 0.
To access the higher level 2, the user must enter a password. For more details about user
level and password see § 4.
1. Select Tools>Password, the following <Input password> window opens:

2. Enter the password

3. Check the level granted or (depending of the password) in the


bottom bar.
8.3.2 Returning to level 0
At any moment, the user level can be set to 0.
To set the user level to 0
1. Select Tools>To user level 0.

2. Check that user level is in the bottom bar.


8.3.3 Connecting the HMI to the DIP 5000
To connect the HMI to a DIP 5000:

Click on the Connect icon to open the <Connect> window:


Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DIGITAL
DIP 5000 Page 25/58

The HMI has scanned the machine for all RS 232C ports which are listed under "Default".
You can also define names of groups and/or individual ports by right-clicking on elements of
the "Favorites" tree leading to a structure like this:

Select the desired port and click on the "Connect" button.


Check the status information displayed in the bottom bar. For more information about status
bar information, see 6.6

8.3.4 Disconnecting the HMI


To disconnect the HMI:
1. Select Tools>Disconnect
2. The HMI is disconnected, the Read, Data, and Maintenance menus are greyed out and
inacessible.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 26/58 DIP 5000

8.4 Operating the Configuration Window


8.4.1 Accessing to the configuration Window
To open the Configuration Window from the File Menu Bar, there are two methods:
1. Select File > New to open a default configuration file,
2. Select File > Open to open an existing configuration file.
The following window appears:

FIGURE 8 – MAIN CONFIGURATION WINDOW MENU


Note: Opening the configuration window is also possible from the menu bar
by selecting Read> local> Configuration.
The configuration window is used to read, modify or create configuration files.
Rolling the mouse over a tool displays, information on its function.
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DIGITAL
DIP 5000 Page 27/58

Comments
Alarms
Application parameters
Inputs / Outputs
Communication interface
General
Print the configuration
Double click on a significant word from the branch list
on the corresponding configuration window
Save the configuration
D0166ENa

FIGURE 9 – CONFIGURATION WINDOW TOOLBAR


8.4.2 Configuration Window <File> menu

This menu allows configuration files to be saved and/or printed.


Saving a configuration
To save a configuration:
1. Select File > Save
2. Choose a directory in your Windows environment
3. Name to the *.cfg file.
To print a configuration select File > Print.
To exit from the configuration window select File > Exit.

Changes can be saved and printed from this menu,


Exit takes you to the basic window.
D0167ENa

FIGURE 10 – CONFIGURATION EXIT MENU


DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 28/58 DIP 5000

8.4.3 Configuration Window <Modify> Menu


This menu allows a configuration to be modified (default configuration or new).
To modify a configuration, from the Menu bar
1. Select File>New> or File>Open the following configuration window opens:

2. Select the parameter to modify:


Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DIGITAL
DIP 5000 Page 29/58

The following window appears:

1. Enter the parameter values of your choice,


2. Click the valid button,
3. Repeat this action for each parameter to modify.
NOTE: Clicking on a Parameter group title in the configuration window allows
also parameter values to be modified.
When the configuration is complete, you must save it by selecting the File> Save menu and
send it using the send button. Detailed configuration of parameters is described in the
following paragraphs.
8.5 Configuring Generals Parameters
1. Open the configuration window (see § 8.4.1).
2. Select Modify > General> the following <General configuration> window opens:

If necessary, modify the following parameter values:


Logical address: enter a value in the 0 127 range.
NOTE: The Remote and the local DIP 5000 must have the same logical
address.
Configuration: check the circle 2, 4 or 8 commands,
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 30/58 DIP 5000

HMI port Speed: select the 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 bps value using the scroll
down field,
IRIG-B: select the Off or On value by checking the corresponding circle.
Connect the GPS equipment to the P20 connector.
Synchronize the DIP date to the external source (one synchro top each 30 seconds).

3. When all parameters values are defined click on the button.


The <General configuration> window closes.
4. Check the configuration window update with the new parameter values:

8.6 Configuring Communication Interface Parameters


1. Open the Configuration window (see § 8.4.1).
2. Select Modify> Communication Interface the following <Interface> window opens:

3. Select the Interface Module corresponding to your hardware configuration in the scroll
down field, possible values are:

− IR182 (Optical Fiber),

− IR173 G703-6 (2 MBps),

− IR179 V11 (RS 422),

− IR180 G703-1 codirectional,

− IR185 C37-94 (Optical Fiber)


Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DIGITAL
DIP 5000 Page 31/58

4. Click the button, the following window opens:

5. Select the Clock Source value, Received or Internal, by checking the corresponding
circle.

6. Click the button, the <Interface> window closes.


7. Check the parameter values are updated in the configuration window.

8.7 Configuring backup interface


With IR182 and IR185 optical interface, redundancy can be ensured using another digital
interface IR173, 179 or 180.
The Backup interface parameter corresponds to the redundant digital interface.
Prerequisite
The backup interface can only be configured if an optical interface has been selected as
Communication Interface (see § 0).
Procedure
1. Open the <Configuration> window (see § 8.4.1).
2. Select Modify > backup interface the following <Backup Interface>window opens:
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 32/58 DIP 5000

3. Select the digital interface corresponding to your hardware configuration in the scroll-
down window. Possible values:

− IR 180,

− IR 173,

− IR179.

4. Click the button the following <Backup Interface> window opens:

5. Select the clock source, Received or Internal by checking the corresponding circle.
6. Click the Trigger button the following window opens:

7. Select the Time Delay Before Switching parameter value by positioning the cursor.
Possible values are from 5 ms to 100 ms.
8. Click on the Valid button.
9. Check the parameter values are updated in the configuration window:
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DIGITAL
DIP 5000 Page 33/58

8.8 Configuring Input Output


1. Open the configuration window (see § 8.4.1).
2. Select Modify> Inputs/Outputs.
The following window <Input/Output configuration> opens:

8.8.1 Configuring Input/Output Parameters


1. Select the value corresponding to your hardware (1 or 2 boards) by checking the
corresponding circle.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 34/58 DIP 5000

8.8.2 Configuring Input filter and logic


Input filter
The input filter delay corresponds to the minimum duration of a signal command to be taken
into account.
1. Select the input filter delay corresponding to each command by positioning the cursor.
A window showing the numerical values helps you to position the cursor to the value of your
choice. Possible values are from 0 ms to 100 ms step 1 ms.

Configuring Cmds Reversed Logic


Feature description
With the reversed logic feature, a transition between a high level signal to a low level signal
corresponds to a command.
Procedure
1. Check the box associated to a command to apply Reversed logic.

8.8.3 Configuring Inputs logic


Feature description
Inputs logic allows a logical operator to be assigned to board input signals and to be
allocated to command. This feature is only available with two boards installed.
The logical operator available are:

• OR

• AND

• LOG
When affecting the LOG operator to input signals, a signal command is valid while another
signal command is not sent on the logical associated input.
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DIGITAL
DIP 5000 Page 35/58

The following table describes the outputs corresponding to the possible input signal
combination for the LOG operator.

INPUT 1 INPUT 2 OUTPUT


0 1 0
1 0 1
1 1 PREVIOUS STATE
0 0 PREVIOUS STATE

Procedure
To configure the Inputs logic feature:

1. Click on the button from the configuration window, the following window
<Inputs Logic> opens:

2. Check the box corresponding to a logic operator to allocate it to a command.

3. Click the button of the <Inputs Logic> window.

4. Click the button In the <Input/Output configuration> window


The <Input/Output configuration> window closes.
5. Check the parameter values are updated in the configuration window.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 36/58 DIP 5000

8.9 Configuring Application Parameters


1. Open the configuration window (see § 8.4.1),
2. Select Modify> Application parameters:
The following <Application Parameters> window opens:

8.9.1 Configuring Holding Delays for Transmission:

Holding Delay Transmission corresponds to the validity duration of an input command.


In the Transmission part, check the command to which you want to apply a holding delay,
1. Click in the value green box and adjust the delay value (range value 20 to 250 ms).
2. Repeat this configuration for each command to which a delay must be applied.
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DIGITAL
DIP 5000 Page 37/58

8.9.2 Configuring Holding Delays for Output Command

The Holding Delay Command Output corresponds to the validity duration of a Command
Output.
1. Check the Command Output to which you want to apply a delay.
2. Adjust the delay positioning the cursor (1 to 3000 ms).
3. Repeat this configuration for each command output to which a delay must be applied.
8.9.3 Configuring Teleprotection Schemes
In the scroll down menu select the receiver teleprotection Scheme to apply to Cmd 1/2 the
possible choices are:

• Permissive

• Direct tripping

• Blocking
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 38/58 DIP 5000

1. In the scroll down menu the Receiver teleprotection Scheme to apply to Cmd 3/4.

2. Click on the button,


3. Check the parameter values are updated in the Configuration window.
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DIGITAL
DIP 5000 Page 39/58

8.10 Configuring the Alarms Parameters


1. Open the configuration window (see § 8.4.1).
2. Select Modify> Alarms
The following <Alarm Setup> Window opens:

8.10.1 Configuring Bit Error Rate Threshold

1. Check the Bit Error Rate circle corresponding to the Minor Alarm threshold.
2. Check the Bit Error Rate circle corresponding to the Major Alarm threshold.
8.10.2 Configuring Time Overrunning Alarm

If an input signal overruns over the Time Overrunning Input threshold defined, an alarm is
set.
1. Check the box Alarm Time Overrunning Input
2. Position the cursor to define a value time duration (value range 1 to 30 seconds)
3. Affect a level Minor or Major by checking the corresponding circle.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 40/58 DIP 5000

8.10.3 Configuring the Transmission time Alarm

If the transmission time is over the Transmission time Alarm threshold defined an alarm is
set.
1. Check the Alarm Transmission Time box,
2. Position the Cursor to define a Transmission Time value (range value 3 to 20 ms)
3. Affect a level Minor or Major by checking the corresponding circle.
8.10.4 Configuring Relay Command Delay

Closing of the contact Relay Command can be delayed, possible delay values are the
following
0
2,5 s
5s
10 s
For each Relay 1 and 2, Major and Minor alarm:
Select the delay by positioning the scrolling button.
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DIGITAL
DIP 5000 Page 41/58

8.11 Sending a configuration file


This menu is used to send a configuration from the HMI PC to the teleprotection unit.
Prerequisite
Sending a configuration is possible with operator level 2. The HMI PC must be connected to
the teleprotection unit.
Procedure
To send the configuration, select the <Send> menu (Local or Remote) from the
<Configuration> Menu:

If the configuration has been sent successfully, a message window appears:

After clicking on the OK button, the DIP 5000 is reset.


8.12 Entering Comments
The user can enter comments.
To enter comments:
1. Open the configuration Window (see § 8.4.1).
2. Select Modify>Comments
The following window opens:

1. Complete the following information fields:

− Name of the local station (20 characters max)

− Name of the remote end station (20 characters max)


2. Enter your comments in the "Comments user" field.

3. Click the button.


4. Check your Comments in the <Configuration> window.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 42/58 DIP 5000

8.13 Operating the <Read> Menu


8.13.1 Menu Description

The <Read> menu is used to display the following information on the local or the remote
teleprotection:

• Configuration

• Hardware configuration

• DIP firmware version

• Comments

• Event list

• Alarms list

• Counters

• Alarms snapshot

• Input/Output status

• Remote bit error rate (the local bit error rate is continually displayed in the lower status
bar)
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DIGITAL
DIP 5000 Page 43/58

8.13.2 Reading Configuration


To read the local configuration select Read > Local > Configuration the configuration
Window appears:

NOTE: The remote configuration can be read by selecting Read > Remote>
Configuration
8.13.3 Reading Hardware Configuration
To read the local Hardware Configuration select Read > Local> Hardware Configuration
the following window opens:
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 44/58 DIP 5000

8.13.4 Reading DIP firmware version


To read the Local software version select Read > Local > Version, the following window
opens:

8.13.5 Reading the comments


To read the comments select Read > Local > Comments the following window opens:
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DIGITAL
DIP 5000 Page 45/58

8.13.6 Reading the Events List


To read the Events select Read > Local> Events list, the following window opens:

This window gives additional information about forcing


Click on the column headers to sort the list by number, date, time or nature.
D0168ENa

FIGURE 11 – EXAMPLE OF READING THE EVENT QUEUE


File capacity is 1785 events.
Click on the disk tool (or use the File>Save) menu to generate the event file (*.evt) which
can be consulted by the File>Open menu on the main screen.
Click on the printer tool (or use the File>Print menu) to print the event file.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 46/58 DIP 5000

The time is shown in seconds and milliseconds with a


maximum delta of 10 minutes.
To measure the time between two events, first right-click to
"mark" the reference then left-click on another event.
D0169ENa

FIGURE 12 – EXAMPLE OF A TIME MEASUREMENT


Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DIGITAL
DIP 5000 Page 47/58

8.13.7 Reading Alarms List


To read the local alarm list select Read > Local >Alarms list the following window opens:

FIGURE 13 – EXAMPLE OF READING THE ALARM QUEUE


The file capacity is 1785 alarms.
Time sorts and measurements are made in the same way as for events.
Click the disk tool (or use the File>Save) menu to save the alarm file (*.ala) which can be
consulted by the File>Open menu on the main screen.
Click on the printer tool (or use the File>Print menu) to print the alarm file.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 48/58 DIP 5000

8.13.8 Reading the counter


To read the counter select Read > Local> Counter the following window opens:

FIGURE 14 - EXAMPLE OF LOCAL COMMAND COUNTER

Click on the disk tool (or use the File>Save) menu to save the local counter file (*.cpt) which
can be consulted by the File>Open menu on the main screen.
Click on the printer tool (or use the File>Print menu) to print the alarm file.
8.13.9 Reading the alarm snapshots
To read the alarm snapshots select Read > Local> Alarms Snapshots the following
window opens:

NOTE: The alarm snapshot may also be read possible by clicking on the
Alarm entry visible in the bottom bar in case of alarms.
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DIGITAL
DIP 5000 Page 49/58

8.13.10 Reading the Input/Output


To read the Input/Output select Read > Local> Input/Output the following window opens:

8.14 <Date> Menu


The <Date> menu allows the date of the local or the remote teleprotection to be read or
written.
8.14.1 Reading the date
Select Date> local> Read the following window opens:

8.14.2 Writing the date


Select Date> local> Write the following window opens:
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 50/58 DIP 5000

Using the scroll-down menus, select the day month year and time to set.

8.15 <Maintenance> Menu

The < Maintenance> menu enables the following:

• <Maintenance/Operating mode> switching to maintenance or Operating mode,

• <Locking/unlocking> line and relay locking/unlocking,

• <Loop> local or remote loopback,

• <Forcing> transmitter, command outputs alarms,

• <Interface> ( operating mode only) to select the Active Interface (optical or backup°

• <Clear buffers> to reset events and alarms (local or remote),

• <Reset> local or remote.

The HMI does not work like a simulator. In particular, the forcing
transmits real commands output and commands transmission.
Therefore, careless use of these commands may have major
consequences on operation.
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DIGITAL
DIP 5000 Page 51/58

8.15.1 Switching the Maintenance / Operating mode


To switch from Maintenance to Operating mode:
1. Select Maintenance >Operating Mode
The following window appears to show successful data transmission:

2. Check is displayed in the bottom bar.


To switch from <Maintenance mode> to <Operating mode>:
3. Select Operating Mode>Maintenance.
A message "Data transmitted" is displayed to show data transmission was successful.

4. Check is displayed in the bottom bar.


8.15.2 Locking/Unlocking

The <Locking> Menu is available in Maintenance Mode.


1. Select Locking>Unlock/Lock line to unlock/lock line.
2. Select Locking> Unlock/Lock relays to unlock/lock relay
3. The line status and the relay status displayed in the top bar are updated:

8.15.3 Loop
1. Select Loop>Local loop off to unloop
2. Select Loop>Local loop on to loop
3. The type of loopback displayed in the top bar is updated:
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 52/58 DIP 5000

8.15.4 Forcing

Forcing menus are available in maintenance mode from user level 2.


8.15.5 Transmitter forcing
Be careful, commands can be launched using this feature.
Prerequisites
The active mode must be Operating Mode.
User level 2 or more.
Procedure
To force transmitter:
Select Forcing>Transmitter forcing
The following window opens:

1. Check the boxes corresponding to the commands to force.

2. Click on the button.


A warning messages appears to notify you that local commands outputs will be activated.

3. Click the yes button to confirm.


Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DIGITAL
DIP 5000 Page 53/58

8.15.6 Alarms forcing


This command allows forcing alarms to check their operational state.
To force alarms:
Select Forcing>Alarms the following <Forcing alarms> Window is then displayed:

Check the box for the Alarms to be forced, Major, Minor or both.

Click the force button .


The message Data transmitted is displayed.
Check the alarm status LEDs that must be in the alarm status.
8.15.7 Command forcing
This command allows forcing commands to check their operational state.
To force commands:
Select Forcing Commands Outputs
The following window is displayed:

Check the box corresponding to the command to be forced

Click the force button .


The message Data transmitted is displayed.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 54/58 DIP 5000

8.15.8 Interface forcing


Prerequisite
The backup feature must be activated.
The mode must be <Maintenance>.
User level must be 2 or more.
Procedure
This command allows, when backup feature is activated, switching between the optical
interface and another digital interface.
To switch from an interface to another:
1. Select Maintenance> Interface the following <Interface Forcing>window opens:

The active interface is identified by a dot inside the corresponding circle.


2. Click in the empty circle to switch to the other interface.

3. Click on the button.


The following window requesting a confirmation of the command appears:

4. Select the Yes button. The message < Data transmitted> appears.
The DIP 5000 resets.
After reset, check for correct switching by selecting Maintenance> Interface, the active
interface must have switched.
Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DIGITAL
DIP 5000 Page 55/58

8.15.9 Clearing buffers


This command allows the events and alarm files on local or remote teleprotection to be
cleared.
To clear buffers select Clears Buffer> local> Event or Buffer> local> Alarm

A warning messages < Are you sure> requests confirmation. Answer Yes.
A message appears to confirm events/alarms deletion.

8.15.10 Resetting the DIP


This command is used to reset the local DIP 5000 in < Operating Mode>, local and remote
in <Maintenance mode>.
To reset the DIP select Reset > Local or Reset > Remote.
A message appears to confim the successful reset.

8.16 Reading the HMI version


To read the HMI version select <?> about. The following window opens:

8.16.1.1 Exiting the HMI


To exit the HMI, click on the <Exit> sub-menu from the main screen’s <File> menu.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 56/58 DIP 5000

9. PROCEDURE BACKUP EXAMPLE


9.1 Example description
The following procedure describes the backup feature configuration with main path IR182,
backup IR180, clock and switch delay time 10 ms .
9.2 Prerequisite
IR182 and IR 180 must be installed in the DIP 5000.
Read the Hardware configuration by selecting Read>local> Hardware Configuration the
following window appears:

IR 180 and IR 182 must be present.


9.2.1.1 Configuring

• Select File> Open to open the configuration file

• Select Modify > Comm. Interface. The following window opens:

• Select IR182 in the scroll down menu,

• Click on the Button.


Human Machine Interface DIP5K/EN HI/A22
DIGITAL
DIP 5000 Page 57/58

• Select Modify > Backup Interface. The following window appears:

• Select IR180 in the scroll down menu

• Click on trigger button the following window opens:

• Adjust the Time Delay Before Switching to positioning the cursor to 10 ms.

• Click on the button.

• Check the configuration window is updated with the parameters values.

Note about Switch Delay time


Switch delay time can be settled from 5 to 100ms for each side, means the total time
measured is as follow; switch time = trigger time Dip1 + trigger time Dip2 + ± 8ms for Dip’s
dialogue communication.
The backup operation is automatic from optic to electric and same at the reverse.
DIP5K/EN HI/A22 Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 58/58 DIP 5000

BLANK PAGE
Publication: DIP5K/EN U/A11

AREVA T&D's Automation & Information Systems Business www.areva-td.com


T&D Worldwide Contact Centre online 24 hours a day: +44 (0) 1785 25 00 70 http://www.areva-td.com/contactcentre/

You might also like